Logiq E10

LOGIQ E10
Basic Service Manual
5750007-1EN Rev. 1
Version R1
© 2018 GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY.
DIRECTION 5750007-1EN, REV. 1 LOGIQ E10 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Important Precautions
TRANSLATION POLICY
i
DIRECTION 5750007-1EN, REVISION REV. 1 LOGIQ E10 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
ii -
iii
iv -
v
vi -
vii
viii -
ix
x -
xi
xii -
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In
Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by
a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be
reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the
contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim
for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE personnel. In
performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All
of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical
codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the
GE Global Ultrasound Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual
title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details.
Mail the information to:
Service Documentation
9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2156)
Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA.
GE employees should use Post-market Quality Management (PQM) to report service documentation
issues. These issues will then be in the internal problem reporting tool and communicated to the writer.
SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN

THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety
glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1, Safety Considerations section in
the Service Manual.
xiii
LEGAL NOTES
The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without
prior written permission of GE.
GE may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.
TRADEMARKS
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
© 2018 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
The radio equipment used in the LOGIQ E10 (if present) conforms to the Radio Equipment
Directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The declaration of conformity can be found at the following link:
https://www.intel.com/content/www/us/en/support/articles/000007443/network-and-i-o/wireless-
networking.html
Search under Current or Legacy Adapters for: Intel® Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260NGW
Figure WLAN Label for Intel 8620NGW Module
THIS SYSTEM CONTAINS THE

FOLLOWING WIRELESS
MODULE: INTEL 8260NGW
FCC ID: PD98260NG

IC: 1000M-8260NG
02607-15-02198
Complies with
IDA Standard
DB 02914
HDIF15000519
xiv -
Revision History
Revision Date Reason for change

Rev. 1 2018/02/08 LOGIQ E10 M3 Release
List of Effected Pages (LOEP)
Chapter Revision Chapter Revision Chapter Revision

Title Page Rev. 1 Chapter 4 Rev. 1 Chapter 10 Rev. 1
Warnings Rev. 1 Chapter 5 Rev. 1 Index Rev. 1

TOC Rev. 1 Chapter 6 Rev. 1 Back Cover N/A
Chapter 1 Rev. 1 Chapter 7 Rev. 1

xv
This page was intentionally left blank.
xvi -
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Purpose of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Service manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Contents in this service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Typical users of LOGIQ E10 documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
LOGIQ E10 models covered in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Important conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6
Conventions used in book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 6
Standard hazard icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
Product icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Product Labels on the LOGIQ E10 when used in a veterinary environment 1 - 17
Safety considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Human safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Mechanical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 24
Battery safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 25
Label locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 26
Dangerous procedure warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 27
Lockout/tagout (LOTO) requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 28

Lockout/Tagout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 29
Returning/shipping probes and repair parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 30
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 31

What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 31
Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 31
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 32
Table of Contents xvii
Customer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 33
Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 33
Ultrasound system manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 35
xviii -
CHAPTER 2
Site Preparations
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
General LOGIQ E10 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LOGIQ E10 environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
EMI limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Probe environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Time and manpower requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Purchaser responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Required facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
Desirable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
Minimal floor plan suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
Networking setup requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
Privacy and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15
Environmental Dangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15
xix
CHAPTER 3
LOGIQ E10 Setup
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Setup reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Average setup time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Setup warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Receiving and unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
Receiving and unpacking warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
Tilt indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5
Receiving the LOGIQ E10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
Unpacking the LOGIQ E10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
Packing materials - recycling information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Preparing for setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
Verify customer order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
Physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
Volume Navigation stand (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
Rear cover label and rating label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
EMI protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Completing the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16

LOGIQ E10 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
Connections on the I/O Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
Connections on the Patient I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Connecting Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Password Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Disc Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28
Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 31
Logoff/Power shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
Complete power down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
LOGIQ E10 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
xx -
Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36

Software Options Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37
Setup paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40
User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40
Product Locator Card/UDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40
xxi
CHAPTER 4
Functional Checks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Special Equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Power ON/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
Power SHUT DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
Top Console checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
Brakes and Direction Lock Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
Operation checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
xxii -
CHAPTER 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
LOGIQ E10 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
LOGIQ E10 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
LOGIQ E10 general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

LOGIQ E10 Base Load Image and Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Electronic media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Log File Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Smart Devices Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
User Level of the Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
Card Rack General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
Back End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
ECB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
Top Console with Main Monitor and Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20

Transporting LOGIQ E10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
Operator Panel XY movement - principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
xxiii
Main Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22
Air Flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25

General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Location in the LOGIQ E10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Casters and Brakes description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
Options and Peripherals descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27

Internal Hardware Options and Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27
External peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
Product manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
User documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
Basic Service documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
xxiv -
CHAPTER 6
Service Adjustments
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Monitor adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Access to Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Monitor Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Advanced Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion Adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10

Cautions and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Main Monitor Arm and Monitor Friction Adjustment - Ergotron Arm . . . . . . 6 - 11
Operator Panel movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13

Adjusting the Z-Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Adjusting the XY Locking Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Using the Park Lock Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16
Adjust time-out for DICOM servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
Volume Navigation Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
xxv
CHAPTER 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Gathering troubleshooting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

Collecting vital system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
Collecting a screen capture with logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4
Capturing network logs to use for troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
Service desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
Disruptive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
Color statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
Agent Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34
EMI prevention/abatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36
Shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 39
Test of printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 39
xxvi -
CHAPTER 8
Replacement Procedures
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Contents in this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
Warnings and important information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Manpower - When two persons are needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
PPE Required During Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

LOGIQ E10 Model Software Configuration and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Software provided with the LOGIQ E10: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Space management - moving all images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Loading the Base Image and Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Loading the Application Software Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 21
Cable Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28
Replacing Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29

Covers and Bumpers overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30
Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
Front Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Foot Rest Bumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41
Mains Cable Hook replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Rear Cover/Air Exhaust replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Rear Bumper/Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Rear Trim Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 52
Top Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 55
Filter cleaning / inspection / replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 59
Rear Handle replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 62
Main Monitor Arm Assembly Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
Printer Filler Storage replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
xxvii
Column Cover Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69

Main Cable Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Covers under XY / Frogleg motors replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Bulkhead Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 79
Replacing Top Console Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83

Main Monitor assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 84
Main Monitor Arm assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 91
Main Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 99
Probe Holder Insert replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 106
OP (Operator Panel) Knobs replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 109
Silicone Keyboard Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 111
A/N Keyboard Mechanics replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 114
Upper OP (Operator Panel)/Touch Panel Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . 8 - 117
Lower OP (Operator Panel) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 122
Bulkhead Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 127
Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 133
Cover, UI Upper Assembly (Speakers) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 137
Trackball Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 141
Lower Bezel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 144
Upper Op Encoders/Joysticks and Lower Op Encoders and Encoders/Joysticks re-
placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 148
Upper OP Frame Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 152
Lower OP Frame Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 156
Palm Rest Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 160
Left Handle Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 163
Right Handle Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 166
Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 169
Gel Warmer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 173
Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 177
Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV/TR Probe Holder . . . 8 - 179
XYZ Buttons replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 180
Probe Cable Hooks replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 183
Replacing XYZ Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185

XY Brake Motor replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 186
XY-Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 192
Z-Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 199
Drive Gear Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 208
XYZ Control Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 213
xxviii -
Main Console parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 217

Subwoofer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 218
Casters and Brakes replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 228

Rear Caster(s) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 229
Front Caster(s) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 232
Caster Hubcap replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 236
Pedal Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 239
Pedal Mechanism Cam FRU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 244
Pedal Mechanism Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 250
Front End Acquisition / Card Cage parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 253

Front End Card Rack parts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 254
Front End Card Cage Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 255
Front Plane / XD BUS replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 259
Relay Board (GRLY or RLY) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 263
Transmitter Board (ETX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 266
CRX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 269
ECB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 272
GPU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 278
WLAN replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 286
BIOS Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 292
EPM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 295
Backplane replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 298
Connector Panel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 314
Rear I/O replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 327
Batteries replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 330
HDD replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 335
Fan Tray replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 339
Light Block (Hard Drive/Network Status) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 342
Printer Tray replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 345
Cable Holders - ECB, Main Power Supply and Rear I/O replacement . . . . 8 - 348
Option Box replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 352
Card Cage replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 361
MPS (Main Power Supply) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 368

MPS replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 369
xxix
Peripherals replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 373

Internal Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 374
DVD R/W drive replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 374
Drive Bay Storage Drawer (DVD Storage) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 378
Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 381
External Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 384
Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 385

Main Cable replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 386
V Nav Roll Stand Assembling or Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 394

Parts Reference - Roll Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 395
Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 397
Adjusting Tension on Sliding Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 403
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 405
Cleaning the Mounting Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 405
Options replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 406

LOGIQ E10 Options Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 407
LOGIQ E10 Option Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 408
4D Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 409
CW Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 413
Patient I/O ECG Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 417
Power Assistant Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 423
Printer (Digital Graphic) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 427
Shear Wave Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 431
V Nav Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 434
Wireless LAN Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 437
xxx -
CHAPTER 9
Renewal Parts
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
Parts list groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3
LOGIQ E10 Model Software Configuration and Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5
Top Console parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11
XYZ Mechanism parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
Main Console parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
Casters (Wheels) parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22
Card Rack parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24
Back End parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 28
Main Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 30
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 31
Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 31
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 31
Mains Power Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32
Internal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 34
LOGIQ E10 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35
Main Power Supply cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 37
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 39
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44
Product Labels on LOGIQ E10 and Consoles used in a Veterinary Environment . 9 - 48

xxxi
Hardware Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 49
xxxii -
CHAPTER 10
Care & Maintenance
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Periodic maintenance inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Grounding Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3
Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3
Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3
Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4

How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Preliminary checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Tools, supplies and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
System functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Peripheral/option checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Mains cable inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Optional diagnostic checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
View the logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Air filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Probe maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Safety test overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Leakage Current Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
Grounding continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16
Chassis leakage current test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Data sheet for enclosure/chassis leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Isolated patient lead (source) leakage-lead to ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20
Isolated patient lead (source) leakage–lead to lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 22
Isolated patient lead (sink) leakage-isolation test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23
xxxiii
Probe leakage current test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25

Mains on applied part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28
When There’s Too Much Leakage Current.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29

Chassis Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29
Probe Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29
Peripheral Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29
Still Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29
ECG Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30
Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC and IQC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30
xxxiv -
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of this chapter
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the LOGIQ E10. The service provider
must read and understand all the information presented here before installing or servicing the
LOGIQ E10.
1-1-2 Contents in this chapter

1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 Service manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3 Important conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-4 Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-5 Label locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1-6 Dangerous procedure warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1-7 Lockout/tagout (LOTO) requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1-8 Returning/shipping probes and repair parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
1-9 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1-10 Customer assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

Section 1-2
Service manual overview
1-2-1 Attention
This manual contains necessary and sufficient information for the Field Service Engineer or Biotech
Engineer to safely maintain and service the LOGIQ E10. Advanced equipment training may be provided
by factory trained Field Service trainers for the agreed-upon time period.
This service manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ E10. It is divided into
10 chapters as shown in Table 1-1 "Contents in this service manual" on page 1-3.
Contents in this section
1-2-1 Attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1-2-2 Contents in this service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2-3 Typical users of LOGIQ E10 documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-4 LOGIQ E10 models covered in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-2-5 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2 Section 1-2 - Service manual overview

1-2-2 Contents in this service manual

The service manual is divided into ten chapters.
In the beginning of the manual, before chapter 1, you will find the Revision overview, the Important
precautions including Translation policy, Damage in transportation, Certified electrical contractor
statement, Omission & errors, Service safety considerations and Legal notes, and the Table of
Contents (TOC).
An Index has been included after chapter 10.
Table 1-1 Contents in this service manual
CHAPTER
NUMBER CHAPTER TITLE DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction Contains a content summary and warnings.
2 Site Preparations Contains pre-setup requirements for the LOGIQ E10.
3 LOGIQ E10 Setup Contains setup procedure with procedure checklist.
4 Functional Checks Contains functional checks that must be performed as part of the
installation, or as required during servicing and periodic
maintenance.
5 Components and Functions (Theory) Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the
electronics.
6 Service Adjustments Contains instructions on how to make any available adjustments to

the LOGIQ E10.
7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines for the
LOGIQ E10.
8 Replacement Procedures Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all
changeable FRUs, available option installation instructions, and
upgrade installation instructions.
9 Renewal Parts Contains a complete list of replacement parts for the LOGIQ E10.
10 Care & Maintenance Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the LOGIQ E10.
N/A Index Provides a quick way to find a topic.

1-2-3 Typical users of LOGIQ E10 documentation

The information needed to service the LOGIQ E10 is collected in the Service Manual.
NOTE: Dates on screenshots are represented in MM/DD/YYYY format throughout the manual.
Information on how to change the LOGIQ E10’s date can be found in Chapter 10, Customizing
Your System, of the LOGIQ E10 User Manual.
Typical users of the Basic Service Manual
• Service personnel (setup, maintenance, etc.)

• Hospital’s service personnel
• Architectural planners/installation planners (some parts of Chapter 2 - Site Preparations)
1-2-4 LOGIQ E10 models covered in this manual
Table 1-2 LOGIQ E10 Software Configurations and Hardware/Software Compatibility
Model Number Description System Software Application Software
See Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the

5935000E10 LOGIQ E10, 100-240 VAC R1.x.x
Software on 8-8.
1-4 Section 1-2 - Service manual overview

1-2-5 Product description

Overview of the LOGIQ E10
The LOGIQ E10 is a high performance digital ultrasound imaging system with total data management.
The fully digital architecture of the LOGIQ E10 allows optimal usage of all scanning modes and probe
types throughout the full spectrum of operating frequencies.
Signal flows from the Probe Connector Panel through the Ultrasound system and finally to the monitor
and peripherals.
System configuration is stored on the hard drive.
All necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.
For more information on:
• Installed software versions, see "Software Status" on page 7-17

• Installed hardware, see Section 7-3 "Service desktop" on page 7-10
• Connected probes, see Section 7-3 "Service desktop" on page 7-10
• Compatible software, hardware, peripherals, and probes, see "Software" on page 9-4
Purpose of the user manual
The user manual should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ E10.
The online versions of the user manual is available through the Help function on the LOGIQ E10’s
operator panel.
User manual documentation is provided through electronic Instructions for Use (eIFU).

Section 1-3
Important conventions
1-3-1 Conventions used in book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1-3-2 Standard hazard icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-3-3 Product icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-3-1 Conventions used in book

Model designations
This manual covers the LOGIQ E10 models listed in 1-2-4 "LOGIQ E10 models covered in this manual"
on page 1-4.
Icons
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they will reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels, and
conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
Safety precaution messages
Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service
information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary
message. Known or potential hazards to personnel are labeled in one of three ways:
• DANGER
• WARNING
• CAUTION
When a hazard is present that can cause property damage, but has absolutely no personal injury risk,
a NOTICE is used.
DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL

CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
CAUTION CAUTION IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL OR CAN CAUSE
MINOR PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE POSSIBLE.
NOTICE Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no
personal injury risk.
Notice Example: Disk drive may crash.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide important information about an item or a procedure.
NOTE: Be sure to read the notes; the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort.
1-6 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

1-3-2 Standard hazard icons
Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle,
as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be
used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause harm. Even if a symbol
is not used in this manual, it may be included for your reference.
Table 1-3 Standard hazard Icons
Icon Meaning
Biological
Electrical
Moving
Acoustic output
Explosion
Smoke/fire
Heat

Table 1-3 Standard hazard Icons
Icon Meaning
Pinch point
1-8 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

1-3-2 Standard hazard icons (cont’d)

Other icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
Table 1-4 Standard Icons that indicate that a special procedure is to be used
Icon Meaning
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY
TAG AND LOCK OUT before

TAG performing the procedure
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
WEAR HAND PROTECTION
WEAR FOOT PROTECTION
WEAR EYE PROTECTION

1-3-3 Product icons

The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information
provided on the LOGIQ E10.
Figure 1-1 Rear Panel Label Location
NOTE: This machine should be used in compliance with law. Some jurisdictions restrict certain uses,
such as gender determination (shown for country specific label).
Table 1-5 Label Icons (Rear of Console)

Item Label/Icon Purpose/Meaning
1. GE Cares Label (US/Canada systems only)
1 - 10 Section 1-3 - Important conventions

Table 1-5 Label Icons (Rear of Console)(Continued)

2.
Monitor Label:
How to lock system prior to transport
DO NOT push the system. Use the handle to push/pull the system,
e.g., DO NOT use the monitor. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury or system damage. Standard: ISO 7010-P017.
DO NOT place a finger, hand or any object on the joint of the monitor
or monitor arm to avoid injury when moving the monitor and monitor
arm.
3. Legal Manufacturer’s name and address. Standard: ISO 7000-3082.
4. United States only

Prescription Device label
5. ETL Label: NRTL Listing and Certification Mark is used to designate

conformance to nationally recognized product safety standards. The
Mark bears the name and/or logo of the testing laboratory, product
category, safety standard to which conformity is assessed, and a
control number.
6. Type/Class Label CISPR Emissions Label

7. Authorized European Representative address
Chapter 1 Introduction 1 - 11

8. Country-Specific Labels
9. Eurasian Conformity mark; the single conformity mark for circulation
of products on the markets of member-states of the Customs Union.
This product passed all conformity assessment (approval)
procedures that correspond to the requirements of applicable
technical regulations of the Customs Union.
INMETRO Certification: TUV Rheinland Brazil
Federal Communications Commission Identification label - on LOGIQ

E9 equipped with Wireless LAN
Canada Certification label - on LOGIQ E9 equipped with Wireless

LAN
Malaysian Communications and Multimedia Commission symbol.

Number correspond to GE importing company (GEHC) - on LOGIQ
E9 equipped with Wireless LAN
ANATEL Certification label for Brazil - on LOGIQ E9 equipped with

Wireless LAN
Infocomm Development Authority of Singapore (IDA) standard - on

LOGIQ E9 equipped with Wireless LAN
10. RoHS Label–China systems Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the
only (shown for country maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for
specific label) electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of
China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the
hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium,
cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated
diphenyl ether (PBDE). “20” indicates the number of years during
which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the
use of this product will not result in any severe environmental
pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.
Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the

maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for
electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of
China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the
hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium,
cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated
diphenyl ether (PBDE). “10” indicates the number of years during
which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the
use of this product will not result in any severe environmental
pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.


11. Non-Ionizing Electromagnetic Radiation
12. Wireless LAN
13. “ATTENTION” - Consult accompanying documents” is intended to

alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions
when complete information cannot be provided on the label.
Standard: ISO 7010-M002.
14. “General Warning Sign”

Possible shock hazard. Do not remove covers or panels. No user
serviceable parts are inside. Refer servicing to qualified service
personnel. Standard: ISO 7010-W001.
15. Use two people to transport system on inclines. This label also
indicates the system weight.
The equipment weighs approximately 126 kg (278) lbs. To avoid
possible injury and equipment damage when transporting from one
area of use to another:
• Be sure the pathway is clear.
• Limit movement to a slow careful walk.
• Use two or more persons to move the equipment on inclines or long
distance.
16. This WEEE symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic
equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and
must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized
representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the
decommissioning of your equipment. Standard: EN 50419.
17. Type BF Applied Part (man in the box) symbol is in accordance with
IEC 60417-5333.
18. The CE Mark of Conformity indicates this equipment conforms with

the Council Directive 93/42/EEC.
19. Symbol indicating that the Instructions for Use are supplied in
electronic form (eIFU). Standard: ISO 7000-1641.
20. GOST Symbol. Russia Regulatory Country Clearance. Where

applicable.
This is an example of a country-specific label. Country-specific labels
will be placed on the back of the system.

21. Possible shock hazard. Do not remove covers or panels. No user
personnel.
USB 3.0 Ports
Ethernet Connection
S-Video Connector
HDMI Connector
Signal ground point label CAUTION: This is only for “FUNCTIONAL

GROUNDING”, NOT “PROTECTIVE EARTH”.
NOTE: Grounding reliability can only be achieved when this
equipment is connected to a receptacle marked “Hospital Only” or
“Hospital Grade”. (For U.S.A., Canada, Japan)
Possible shock hazard. Do not remove covers or panels. No user
personnel.
“Equipotentiality” indicates the terminal to be used for connecting

equipotential conductors when interconnecting (grounding) with other
equipment.
Connection of additional protective earth conductors or potential
equalization conductors is not necessary in most cases and is only
recommended for situations involving multiple equipment in a high-
risk patient environment to provide assurance that all equipment is at
the same potential and operates within acceptable leakage current
limits. An example of a high-risk patient would be a special procedure
where the patient has an accessible conductive path to the heart
such as exposed cardiac pacing leads. IEC60417-5021
“Warning” - Dangerous voltage” (the lightning flash with arrowhead)

is used to indicate electric shock hazards. Standard: ISO 7010-
W012.


22. Every system has a unique marking for identification, the Unique
Device Identification (UDI) Label. The UDI label consists of a series
of alpha-numeric characters and barcode which uniquely identify the
LOGIQ E9 system as a medical device manufactured by General
Electric. Scan or enter the UDI information into the patient health
record as required by country-specific laws.
UDI Human Readable Label Text: Global Trade Item Number, GTIN,
Manufacturing Date, Serial Number
UDI Symbol and Data Matrix
System Voltage
Alternating Current symbol is in accordance with IEC 60417-5032
Catalog/Model Number. Standard: ISO 7000-2493.
Serial Number. Standard: ISO 7000-2498.
Date of manufacture YYYY-MM. Standard: ISO 7000-2497.
ECG eTRAX needle

Type CF Applied Part (heart in the box) symbol is in accordance with
IEC 60417-5335.
ECG ECG and Probes

Type CF Defib-Proof Applied Part (heart in the box with paddle)
symbol is in accordance with IEC 60417-5336.
Monitor DO NOT place a finger, hand or any object on the joint of the monitor
Arm or monitor arm to avoid injury when moving the monitor and monitor
arm.
V Nav ISO 7010 - P007

Volume Navigation Pacemaker Warning
Op Panel “Mains OFF” indicates the power off position of the mains power
breaker.
Op Panel “Mains ON” indicates the power on position of the mains power
breaker.
Op Panel Power On/Off.

Standard: IEC 60417-5010

Op Panel To avoid injury, DO NOT place a finger, hand or any object below the
operator panel when it is lowered.
Foot The product has been tested and approved in UL Laboratories,

Pedal based on UL and CSA standards, through mutual approval activities.
and
Battery
Pack
Battery Battery Pack if contains Pb/Cd/Hg

Pack The separate collection symbol is affixed to a battery, or its
packaging, to advise you that the battery must be recycled or
disposed of in accordance with local or country laws. The letters
below the separate collection symbol indicate whether certain
elements (Pb=Lead, Cd=Cadmium, Hg=Mercury) are contained in
the battery. To minimize potential effects on the environment and
human health, it is important that all marked batteries that you
remove from the product are properly recycled or disposed. For
information on how the battery may be safely removed from the
device, please consult the service manual or equipment instructions.
Information on the potential effects on the environment and human
health of the substances used in batteries is available at this url:
http://www.gehealthcare.com/euen/weee-recycling/index.html.

1-3-4 Product Labels on the LOGIQ E10 when used in a veterinary environment
There are different handling instructions when servicing the LOGIQ E10 used in a veterinary
environment.
Table 1-6 Product Labels on the LOGIQ E10 in a veterinary environment
Label Location
Side Covers, Rear Cover
Probe Cable(s), near the connector
Section 1-4
Safety considerations
1-4-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

1-4-2 Human safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1-4-3 Mechanical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-4-4 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-4-5 Battery safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1-4-1 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair
of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this
manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the equipment.
1-4-2 Human safety

• Operating personnel must not remove the Ultrasound system covers.
• Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only.
Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ E10 Training Seminar are authorized to service the
equipment.

ADJUSTING.
DANGER WITH THE POWER ASSISTANT OPTION, DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE

OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. DO NOT REMOVE
THE CAPACITOR PACK COVER.
WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ E10, SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUTDOWN MODE.
WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD,
PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS, GE HAS LIMITED THE LIFTING WEIGHT
FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELD TO 16 KG (35 LBS). ANYTHING OVER 16 KG (35 LBS)
REQUIRES 2 PEOPLE.
CAUTION HAVE TWO PEOPLE AVAILABLE TO DELIVER AND UNPACK THE LOGIQ E10.
ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE LOGIQ E10 CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE
BY ONE PERSON COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH.
1 - 18 Section 1-4 - Safety considerations

1-4-2 Human safety (cont’d)
WARNING USE ALL PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PPE) SUCH AS GLOVES, SAFETY
SHOES, SAFETY GLASSES, AND KNEELING PADS TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
INJURY.
WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE.
OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT
CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNING Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify Equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute
parts or perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.
WARNING For console Ultrasound systems and Ultrasound systems mounted on a cart, when
the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and stores
mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of the main
monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/when
you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is removed and
the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the elevation assembly.
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, the LOGIQ E10 must be turned off and disconnected from
power source. Cord must be controlled at all times.
Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge and the ON/OFF button (white
light on the Op Panel) to turn OFF, as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Disconnect the batteries from the backplane.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, the Power Assist batteries or Power Module and
ECB may be energized even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into
the AC Outlet.
WARNING Use extreme caution as long as the LOGIQ E10 is un-stable, not resting on all four
casters.
WARNING Tilting the LOGIQ E10 requires two people in order to avoid injury to service
personnel and damage to the equipment.
1-4-2 Human safety (cont’d)

WARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all mechanical parts. If sharp edges are
encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
The appropriate PPE is required per EHS Policies and SRA’s.
WARNING Wear all PPE including gloves as indicated in the chemical SDS.

1-4-3 Mechanical safety

WARNING While the software install procedure is designed to preserve data, you should save any
patient data, images, and system setups to a media or hardcopy before doing a
software upgrade.
WARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING THE LOGIQ E10, VERIFY THE FOLLOWING:

- KEYBOARD IS LOCKED IN ITS LOWEST POSITION
- FRONT BRAKE IS LOCKED SO THE LOGIQ E10 IS UNABLE TO SWIVEL
- REAR BRAKES ARE IN THE LOCKED POSITION
WARNING WHEN THE LOGIQ E10 IS RAISED FOR A REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE,
USE EXTREME CAUTION SINCE IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER.
WARNING ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN
EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND
PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR
DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN
SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
WARNING NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK, IT
MAY BE DAMAGED.
WARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the
release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a
second time to engage the brake.
WARNING The LOGIQ E10 should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the
Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as
much as possible before moving the LOGIQ E10.
CAUTION BEFORE YOU MOVE OR TRANSPORT THE LOGIQ E10, MAKE SURE TO FIRMLY LOCK THE
MONITOR ARM AND FLIP DOWN THE MAIN MONITOR TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE
LOGIQ E10.
CAUTION ALWAYS LOCK THE TOP/UPPER CONSOLE IN ITS PARKING (LOCKED) POSITION BEFORE
MOVING THE LOGIQ E10.
CAUTION TO AVOID INJURY WHEN YOU MOVE THE MAIN MONITOR AND THE MONITOR ARM, DO NOT
PUT YOUR FINGER, HAND, OR OBJECT ON THE JOINT OF THE MAIN MONITOR OR THE
MONITOR ARM.
1-4-3 Mechanical safety (cont’d)

CAUTION THE LOGIQ E10 WEIGHS 126 KG (278 LB) AND UP 135 KG (298 LB) DEPENDING ON
INSTALLED PERIPHERALS. USE CARE WHEN MOVING IT OR REPLACING ITS PARTS.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE PRECAUTIONS LISTED BELOW COULD RESULT IN INJURY,
UNCONTROLLED MOTION, AND COSTLY DAMAGE. ALWAYS:
- BE SURE THE PATHWAY IS CLEAR.
- USE SLOW, CAREFUL MOTIONS.
- USE TWO PEOPLE WHEN MOVING ON INCLINES OR LIFTING MORE THAN
16 KG (35 LBS).
CAUTION TO AVOID INJURY OR DAMAGE TO THE MAIN MONITOR, MAKE SURE THERE IS NOTHING
WITHIN RANGE OF THE MAIN MONITOR BEFORE MOVING THE MAIN MONITOR AND
MONITOR ARM. THIS INCLUDES PEOPLE AS WELL AS THINGS.
CAUTION If the Operator Control Panel gas spring is not functioning correctly, there is a chance that the
operator panel could drop down suddenly when you use the manual release handle. To avoid
injury, take care that you are not positioned below the operator panel when using the manual
release handle.
CAUTION Do not move the Ultrasound system if the Operating Panel is in the unlocked position.
CAUTION Ensure that nobody touches the console arm/frogleg when moving the Operator Panel.
CAUTION Use protective glasses during drilling, filing, and during all other work where
eyes protection is needed.
CAUTION Use safety shoes when doing work where there is any chance of foot damage.
CAUTION Use protective gloves when drilling, cutting, and when reaching into
confined or blind spaces.

1-4-3 Mechanical safety (cont’d)

NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables.
CAUTION Do not transport LOGIQ E10 in a vehicle without locking the casters (wheels) and securing it as
described in chapter 4.
NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the Ultrasound system in a vehicle:
• Before transporting, place the Ultrasound system in its special storage case.
• Ensure that the Ultrasound system is firmly secured while inside the vehicle.
• Secure Ultrasound system with straps or as directed otherwise to prevent motion during transport.
• Prevent vibration damage by driving cautiously. Avoid unpaved roads, excessive speeds, and
erratic stops or starts.
1-4-4 Electrical safety

Safe practices
Follow these guidelines to minimize shock hazards whenever you are using the LOGIQ E10:
• To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground.
• The LOGIQ E10 is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an
approved electrical outlet with safety ground. A separate power outlet with a 20 amp circuit breaker
for 120 VAC for 120V area, 7.5 amp circuit breaker for 220-240 VAC for 220/240V area or 15 amp
circuit breaker for 100 VAC for Japan.
• The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
• Both the LOGIQ E10 power cable and the power connector must meet international electrical
standards.
WARNING Connecting the LOGIQ E10 to the wrong voltage level will most likely destroy it.
Probes
Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the LOGIQ E10:
• Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:
- housing
- cable strain relief
- lens
- seal
- connectors
- locking mechanism
• Do not use a damaged or defective probe.
• Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
• The LOGIQ E10 has more than one type of probe port. Use the appropriate probe port designed for
the probe you are connecting.
Peripherals
• Refer to the “Peripherals used in the patient environment” in Chapter 2 of the User Manual for
peripheral isolation information.

1-4-5 Battery safety

The LOGIQ E10 is supplied with lithium ion batteries.
The lithium ion technology is significantly less hazardous to the environment than the lithium metal
technology used in some other batteries (such as watch batteries). Used batteries should not be placed
with common household waste products. Contact local authorities for the location of a chemical waste
collection program nearest you.
NOTE: Regulations vary for different countries. Dispose of used batteries in accordance with local
regulations.
WARNING
THE LOGIQ E10 BATTERIES HAVE A SAFETY DEVICE.

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DIS-ASSEMBLE OR ALTER THE BATTERIES!
ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:
• DO NOT short-circuit the batteries by directly connecting the negative terminals with metal objects.
• DO NOT heat batteries or discard them into a fire.
• DO NOT expose batteries to temperatures over 50 °C. Keep batteries away from fire and other heat
sources.
• DO NOT charge batteries near a heat source, such as, a fire or heater.
• DO NOT leave batteries in direct sunlight.
• DO NOT pierce batteries with a sharp object, hit it, or step on it.
• DO NOT use damaged batteries.
• DO NOT apply solder to batteries.
• DO NOT connect batteries to an electrical power outlet.
• DO NOT immerse batteries in water or allow them to get wet.
CAUTION
USE ONLY BATTERIES APPROVED BY GE AS SUITABLE FOR USE WITH THE LOGIQ E10
ULTRASOUND SYSTEM.
CAUTION
TO PREVENT BATTERIES FROM BURSTING OR IGNITING, OR FUMES FROM THE BATTERIES

CAUSING EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:
• DO NOT place batteries into a microwave oven or pressurized container.

• If a battery leaks or emits an odor, remove it from all possible flammable sources.
• If a battery emits an odor or heat, is deformed or discolored, or in a way appears abnormal during
use, recharging or storage, immediately remove it and stop using it.
NOTE: If you have any questions about the batteries, consult your local GE representative.
• Storage of the battery pack:

- Short-term (less than 1 month): between 0 °C (32 °F) and 50 °C (122 °F)
- Long-term (more than 3 months): between 10 °C (50 °F) and 35 °C (95 °F)
When charging batteries for the first time after long-term storage, recover the battery pack to original
performance through repeating several cycles of full charging and discharging.
Section 1-5
Label locations
For information on label locations, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual
or the latest version of the LOGIQ E10 Release Notes.
Table 1-7 Basic User Manual and Release Notes for the LOGIQ E10
ENGLISH BASIC ENGLISH

MODEL USER MANUAL RELEASE NOTES
NUMBER DIRECTION NUMBER DIRECTION NUMBER
5935000E10
running R1.x.x 5750001-1EN 5750002-1EN
software
1 - 26 Section 1-5 - Label locations

Section 1-6
Dangerous procedure warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this
manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.

ADJUSTING.
WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ E10, SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION
OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A
DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT.

BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT
INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION
OF THE EQUIPMENT.
Section 1-7
Lockout/tagout (LOTO) requirements
Follow Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the AC power plug at all
times during the service process.
To apply Lockout/Tagout:
Table 1-8 Lockout/Tagout
Steps Battery(s) location

1. Plan and prepare for shutdown.
2. Shutdown the equipment.
3. Isolate the equipment.
4. Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices.
5. Disconnect the batteries from the Backplane.
6. Control all stored and residual energy.
7. Verify isolation:
All potentially hazardous stored or residual
energy is relieved.
WARNING Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E10:

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound System where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30
Volts:
1. TURN OFF THE SCANNER.
2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AND THE ON/OFF
BUTTON (WHITE LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL) TO TURN OFF, AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS
TO VERIFY ISOLATION.
5. REMOVE THE BATTERY COVER AND DISCONNECT THE POWER CABLES J10 and J11 (black
and red) FROM THE BACKPLANE. See: 8-2-2 "Warnings" on page 8-3 and 8-11-15 "Rear I/O
replacement" on page 8-327.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, the Batteries, Power Module, ECB Shear Wave Capacitor Pack
may be energized, even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
1 - 28 Section 1-7 - Lockout/tagout (LOTO) requirements

1-7-1 Lockout/Tagout Procedure

Table 1-9 Lockout/Tagout Procedure
Lockout/Tagout Procedure
1. TURN OFF the LOGIQ E10 and UNPLUG IT. Maintain control of the mains power plug.
2. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge and the ON/OFF button (white light on the Op Panel) to
turn OFF, as there are no test points to verify isolation. Capacitors on Ultrasound systems with the Shear Wave
Option can take up to 5 minutes to discharge.
3. DISCONNECT the power J10 and J11.

It is NOT necessary to disconnect the signal/communication J14 and J13 connections to the Backplane.
J10
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
J10 J11
Signed Date
J11
J14
J13
Section 1-8
Returning/shipping probes and repair parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GE employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have
been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment
with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound
probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
For a LOGIQ E10 used in a veterinary environment the same restrictions apply.
NOTE: Return used/unused spare parts from a veterinary environment with the purple recycling label
(regardless of its actual condition) and add a description on the label stating that the items were
removed from a LOGIQ E10 Vet in a veterinary environment. This applies for probes and covers
labeled as Vet used.
NOTE: The USER/SERVICE staff should dispose of all the waste properly, per federal, state, and local
waste disposal regulations.
If the purple recycling label is not used in your region, use the local recycling label.
The LOGIQ E10 is not meant to be used for long-term storage of patient data or images. The user is
responsible for the data on the LOGIQ E10 and a regular backup is highly recommended.
If the LOGIQ E10 is sent for repair, please ensure that any patient information is backed up and erased
from the LOGIQ E10 before shipping. It is always possible during system failure and repair to lose
patient data. GE is not responsible for the loss of this data.
If PHI (Patient Healthcare Information) data needs to be sent to GE employees for service purposes,
GE will ascertain agreement from the customer. Patient information shall only be transferred by
approved service processes, tools and devices restricting access, protecting or encrypting data where
required, and providing traceability in the form of paper or electronic documents at each stage of the
procedure while maintaining compliance with cross-border restrictions of patient information transfers.
1 - 30 Section 1-8 - Returning/shipping probes and repair parts

Section 1-9
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
1-9-1 What is EMC?
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic
environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other
equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility
results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or
when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often
referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through
space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy,
EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and
disturbances in the electrical power supply.
1-9-2 Compliance
LOGIQ E10 conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from
electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient
requirements.
Applicable standards are: 47CFR Part 18, IEC60601-1-2:2007.
NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, and clamps
are in good condition and installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following
all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1-9-3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention

WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS:
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF. THE ESD WRIST STRAP SHOULD BE CONNECTED
TO ONE OF THE TWO RECEPTICALS INTEGRATED ON THE FRAME, SPECIFICALLY
FOR THAT PURPOSE.
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE
EQUIPMENT.
Table 1-10 ESD Receptacles
ESD Receptacles
Battery Box side Card Cage side
WARNING Risk of electrical shock. The LOGIQ E10 must be turned off. Avoid all contact with
electrical contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles
designed for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have
the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.
WARNING Risk of heat hazard. If the covers are removed from an operating LOGIQ E10 some
metal surfaces (for example, the GPU heat sink on the ECB) may be warm enough to
pose a potential heat hazard even while in shutdown mode.
1 - 32 Section 1-9 - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Section 1-10
Customer assistance
1-10-1 Contact information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the user manual, or if you
require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource as
listed in Table 1-11.
Before you call, identify the following information, and acquire an image (Alt+D) to send to the Customer
Care team:
1.) Ultrasound System ID serial number

2.) Software version
3.) Date and time of occurrence
4.) Sequence of events leading to issue
5.) Whether the issue is repeatable
6.) Imaging mode, probe, preset/application
7.) Media brand, speed, capacity, type
8.) Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop
9.) Detailed description of any problem encountered
10.)Where applicable, save the appropriate log files. Remember to save the log files for each day on a
separate media with labels.
NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.
1-10-1 Contact information (cont’d)

Table 1-11 Phone numbers for Customer Assistance
LOCATION NUMBER
Service TEL: 1-800-437-1171

USA
Service Parts TEL: 1-800-558-2040
GE Healthcare
Ultrasound Service Engineering Online Center TEL: 1-800-321-7937
TEL: 1-800-682-5327
Wauwatosa, WI 53226 Application Support
TEL: 1-262-524-5698
Service TEL: 1-800-668-0732

Canada
Application Support TEL: 1-262-524-5698
Service TEL: 1-262-524-5300

Latin America
Application Support TEL:1-262-524-5698
Europe TEL: +49 (0) 212-2802-652

GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH
Beethovenstrasse 239 Support
Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 Solingen FAX: +49 (0) 212-2802-431
Germany
Egypt Service Center TEL: 0020-2322-1252

EAGM
UAE Service Center TEL: 0097-1800-3646
Asia (Singapore) TEL:+65 6291-8528

GE Ultrasound Asia
Service Department - Ultrasound
Service Department
298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06 FAX: +65 6291-7006
Central Placa
Singapore 168730
TEL: +81 42-846-9011

Japan Online Center
FAX: +81 42-648-2905
TEL: +86 800-810 8188

China Technical Support
TEL: +86 400-812 8188
TEL: 1-800-425-8025
India Technical Support TEL: 1-800-425-7255
TEL: 1-800-102-7750
1 - 34 Section 1-10 - Customer assistance

1-10-2 Ultrasound system manufacturer
Table 1-12 Ultrasound system manufacturer
MANUFACTURER
GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC

9900 Innovation Drive
Wauwatosa, WI 53226
USA
Table 1-13 Authorized Representative
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
This product complies with the regulatory requirement of Council Directive 93/42/EEC
concerning medical devices:
• The CE label affixed to the product testifies compliance to the Directive.
• The location of the CE marking is shown in the Safety chapter of this manual.
Authorized EU Representative
European registered place of business:
GE Medical Systems SCS
283 rue de la Minière
78530 BUC, France
1 - 36 Section 1-10 - Customer assistance

Chapter 2
Site Preparations
Section 2-1
Overview
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the setup of a LOGIQ E10.
Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the
LOGIQ E10.

2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 General LOGIQ E10 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-3 Facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Chapter 2 Site Preparations 2-1

Section 2-2
General LOGIQ E10 requirements
2-2-1 LOGIQ E10 environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2-2-2 Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2-3 EMI limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-2-4 Probe environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-2-5 Time and manpower requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-2-1 LOGIQ E10 environmental requirements

If the LOGIQ E10 is very cold or hot
When unpacking the LOGIQ E10, allow the temperature to stabilize before powering up.’
CAUTION RISK OF DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.

IF THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM IS VERY COLD OR HOT, DO NOT TURN ON ITS POWER UNTIL
IT HAS HAD A CHANCE TO ACCLIMATE TO ITS OPERATING ENVIRONMENT.
Refer to Table 2-1 for guidelines on reaching operational temperatures from storage or transport
temperatures.
Table 2-1 LOGIQ E10 Acclimate Time

o 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
C
oF 140 131 122 113 104 95 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40
Hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Environmental specifications
The LOGIQ E10 should be operated, stored, and transported according to the listed environmental
requirements.
NOTE: Probe environmental specifications may be different than the LOGIQ E10.
Refer to Table 2-2 for environmental specifications
Table 2-2 Environmental Specifications for the LOGIQ E10

Operational Storage Transport (< 16 hrs.)
10º - 35º C -10º - 50º C -10º - 50º C
Temperature
(50º - 96º F) (14º - 122º F) (14º - 122º F)
30% - 80% 30% - 80% 30% - 80%
Humidity
non-condensing non-condensing non-condensing
Pressure 70 - 106 kPa 70 - 106 kPa 70 - 106 kPa
Heat Dissipation 3070 Btu/hour n/a n/a
2-2 Section 2-2 - General LOGIQ E10 requirements

Cooling
The cooling requirement for the LOGIQ E10 with monitor and onboard peripherals is up to 3070 Btu/hr.
This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each
person in the room places an additional 300 Btu/hr demand on the cooling system.
Lighting
Bright light is needed for LOGIQ E10 set up, updates, and repairs. However, operator and patient
comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting
system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source
of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible
interference.

2-2-2 Electrical requirements

General requirements
NOTE: GE requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its ultrasound equipment. This
dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the LOGIQ E10.
The LOGIQ E10 will function on voltages from 100-240 volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using 220
volt power, then a center tapped power source is required.
Sites with a mains power system with defined neutral and live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the LOGIQ E10 outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the LOGIQ E10 outlet.
NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the
main facility’s incoming power source to the Ultrasound system is only a conduit.
Electrical requirements for LOGIQ E10
In the table below, the electrical specifications for the LOGIQ E10 include monitor and on board
peripherals.
Table 2-3 Electrical specifications for the LOGIQ E10

POWER
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE TOLERANCES CONSUMPTION FREQUENCY
5935000E10 LOGIQ E10, 100-240 VAC 100-240 VAC +/-10% 0.9 KVA 50/60 Hz
Inrush current
During power on, an inrush circuit prevents the current from increasing above the stated values.
Table 2-4 Inrush current at different mains voltages

VOLTAGE 50 Hz 60 Hz
90 VAC 13 A 12 A
110 VAC 9A 11 A
220 VAC 5.5 A 6A
264 VAC 6A 5A
NOTE: These values are estimations.

Site circuit breaker
CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR.

THE LOGIQ E10 REQUIRES A DEDICATED SINGLE BRANCH CIRCUIT. TO AVOID CIRCUIT
OVERLOAD AND POSSIBLE LOSS OF CRITICAL CARE EQUIPMENT, MAKE SURE YOU DO NOT
HAVE ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OPERATING ON THE SAME CIRCUIT.
It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the LOGIQ E10 be readily accessible.
Site power outlets
A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the LOGIQ E10 without extension cords. Other
outlets adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this
LOGIQ E10 must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the LOGIQ E10. Electrical installation must meet
all current local, state, and national electrical codes.
LOGIQ E10 power plug
If the LOGIQ E10 arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer
or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required.
Power stability requirements
Voltage drop-out
Max 10 ms.
Power transients (all applications)
Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 ms for any type of transient, including line
frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.

2-2-3 EMI limitations

Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The
LOGIQ E10 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Possible EMI sources should be identified before the LOGIQ E10 is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These
sources include:
• medical lasers
• scanners
• cauterizing guns
• computers
• monitors
• fans
• gel warmers
• microwave ovens
• light dimmers
• mobile phones
• in-house wireless phones (DECT phones)
• wireless computer keyboard and mouse
• air conditioning system
• High Frequency (HF) surgery equipment
• general AC/DC adapters
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.

See Table 2-5 for EMI prevention and abatement tips.
Table 2-5 EMI prevention/abatement
EMI Rule Detail

• Keep the LOGIQ E10 at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources.
Be aware of RF sources • Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency,
high powered radio or video broadcast signals.
Poor grounding is the most likely reason a LOGIQ E10 will have noisy images. Check grounding
Ground the LOGIQ E10
of the power cord and power outlet.
• After you finish repairing or updating the LOGIQ E10, replace all covers and tighten all screws.
Replace all screws, RF • Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end.
gaskets, covers, cores • Install the card rack cover over the card rack. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio
frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals.
Replace broken RF If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not
gaskets turn on the LOGIQ E10 until any loose metallic part is removed.
Do not place labels where Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the LOGIQ E10. Otherwise, the gap created will
RF gaskets touch metal permit RF leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.
Use GE specified The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable
harnesses and peripherals length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.
Take care with cellular

phones Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card rack or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop
Properly dress peripheral
the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to
cables
the frame.

2-2-4 Probe environmental requirements

Probes should be operated, stored, and transported according to the listed environmental requirements.
For specific information on environmental requirements for the probes, see “Environmental
Requirements” in chapter 11 of the Basic User Manual.
NOTE: LOGIQ E10 environmental specifications may be different than the probes.
NOTICE STORAGE TEMPERATURES VARY DEPENDING ON THE TYPE OF PROBE. WHEN EXPOSED TO
LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE LOGIQ E10 AND PROBES SHOULD BE KEPT AT
ROOM TEMPERATURE BEFORE USE.
Refer to the table in "If the LOGIQ E10 is very cold or hot" on page 2-2 to determine the needed
settlement time.
2-2-5 Time and manpower requirements

Site preparation takes time. Begin pre-installation checks as soon as possible, if possible, six weeks
before delivery, to allow enough time to make any changes.
CAUTION RISK OF INJURY OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT

HAVE TWO PEOPLE AVAILABLE TO DELIVER AND UNPACK THE LOGIQ
E10. ATTEMPTS BY ONE PERSON TO MOVE THE LOGIQ E10
CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES, OR ON AN INCLINE, COULD RESULT IN
INJURY, DAMAGE, OR BOTH.

Section 2-3
Facility needs
2-3-1 Purchaser responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2-3-2 Required facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-3-3 Desirable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-3-4 Minimal floor plan suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-3-5 Networking setup requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-3-6 Privacy and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-3-7 Environmental Dangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-3-1 Purchaser responsibilities

The work and materials needed to prepare the site are the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay,
confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery.
Purchaser responsibility includes:
• Procuring the materials required.

• Completing the preparations before delivery of the LOGIQ E10.
• Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site
prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other
connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be
performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical
installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All
electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical
codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further
from the LOGIQ E10 than the interface kit allows, presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid
delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing
the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).
The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended
because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference)
should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact LOGIQ E10
reliability.

2-3-2 Required facility needs

NOTE: GE requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its ultrasound equipment. This
dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.
The LOGIQ E10 will function on voltages from 100-240 volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using 220
volt power, then a center tapped power source is required.
Sites with a mains power system with defined neutral and live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined neutral:

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the ultrasound outlet.
• Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage (see: Table 2-3 "Electrical
specifications for the LOGIQ E10" on page 2-4) meeting all local and national codes which is
located less than 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the LOGIQ E10’s proposed location
• Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide.
• Proposed location for LOGIQ E10 is at least 0.46 m (1.5 ft) from the wall or objects for cooling.
• Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft.) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the LOGIQ E10 to connect cables.
• Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer.
• Power outlets for test equipment within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the LOGIQ E10.
• Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack).
• Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal).
2 - 10 Section 2-3 - Facility needs

2-3-3 Desirable features

In addition to the floor plan suggestions shown in Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2, a nearby waiting room and
a receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths is suggested. Grid represents 30.5 x
30.5 cm (1 x 1 foot).
2-3-4 Minimal floor plan suggestions

Figure 2-1 Floor Plan Suggestion 4.27 x 5.18 m (14 x 17 foot)
10 11 15
12
9 1
PW
X Z
CW
M CF
Elasto
Body Pattern Zoom

Ellipse
B
3D/4D
Comment
Auto
L R
Clear
16
2 3 4 5 13 14
7
1
17
18
Floor Plan Suggestion 4.27 x 5.18 m (14 x 17 foot) Key
Item Description Item Description

1. 2. Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and
Secretary or doctors desk
proprietary manuals
3. Film viewer 4. Counter top
5. Counter top and sink with hot and cold water 6. Overhead light dimmer – dual level lighting (bright/dim)
7. Emergency oxygen 8. Suction line
9. 10. Dedicated power outlet – circuit breaker protected and

LOGIQ E10
easily accessible
11. 12. 45,7 cm (1.5 ft) distance of LOGIQ E10 from wall or
Network interface
objects
13. Stool 14. Footswitch
15. Storage for linens and equipment 16. Examination table – 193 x 61 cm (76 x 24 inches)
17. Lavatory and dressing room 18. Door – at least 76 cm (30 inches)
Chapter 2 Site Preparations 2 - 11

2-3-4 Minimal floor plan suggestions (cont’d)

Figure 2-2 Floor Plan Suggestion 2.44 x 3.05 m (8 x 10 foot)
4 5
2 3
11
10
9
Elasto
1
2
8 12
Comment
Clear
M
CW
X
Body Pattern
Ellipse
PW
Y
e
Zoom
3D/4D
13
CF
Z
L
B
R
7
Auto
6 14
1
Floor Plan Suggestion 2.44 x 3.05 m (8 x 10 foot) Key
Item Description Item Description

1. Door – at least 76 cm (30 inches) 2. Film viewer
3. Counter top, sink with hot and cold water, and supplies 4.
Linen supply
storage
5. Probes/supplies 6. Examination table – 193 x 61 cm (76 x 24 inches)
7. Footswitch 8. Stool
9. LOGIQ E10 10. External peripherals
11. Dedicated power outlet – circuit breaker protected and 12.

Network interface
easily accessible
13. 45,7 cm (1.5 ft) distance of LOGIQ E10 from wall or 14. Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and
objects proprietary manuals

2-3-5 Networking setup requirements

Stand alone scanner (without network connection)
None.
Scanner connected to hospital’s network
For supported networks, 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet/DICOM network connection is required.
InSite™ requirements
Need internet access on the outbound port to GE’s remote service platform (Insite), which is only
opened on request by the user and through a secure HTTPS connection on port 443.
Insite requires an Ethernet connection with a 10/100 Mbps or 10/100/1000 Mbps interface.
Purpose of the DICOM network function
DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient
information over a hospital network. Inbound and outbound connections through port 104 are for
DICOM connectivity. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for
viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this
manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning
continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower
cost.
DICOM option setup requirements
To configure the LOGIQ E10 to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator
must provide information to complete the form in Figure 2-3 "Worksheet for DICOM Network
Information" on page 2-14. Ensure that there are no spaces in any field of the form.
Entries must include:
• A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ E10.
• The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING
INFORMATION.
• The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the
LOGIQ E10 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and
the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for troubleshooting.
For connectivity setup information, refer to the current revision of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual.
See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page 1-26.

DICOM option setup requirements (cont’d)
Figure 2-3 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information
LOGIQ
E10
Host Name IP Address . . . Local Port
AE Title Net Mask . . .

Network
Speed Default Gateway . . .
DHCP
DICOM APPLICATION
OTHER
NAME MAKE/ AE TITLE IP PORT
CONFIGURATION
Store 1 __Raw Data

. . . __Allow Multiframe
__Structured
Reporting
Compression_______
Store 2
__Raw Data
__Structured
Reporting
Compression_______
Store 3
__Raw Data
__Structured
Reporting
Compression_______
DICOM
Print Vendor: ___________
. . . Print Size: _________
Medium: ___________
Copies: ___________
Orientation: ________
Color ______________
Worklist . . .
Storage Associated
. . .
Commit Storage AE
_____________
DICOM . . .
MPPS

2-3-6 Privacy and Security

Since the LOGIQ systems are integrated into your IT-network, GE wants to make sure that you are
aware of the proactive measures we are taking to secure the system.
For more information on privacy and security, refer to “Privacy and Security” in chapter 12 of the LOGIQ
E10 Basic User Manual.
2-3-7 Environmental Dangers

Commercial devices such as laser cameras, printers, VCRs and external monitors, usually exceed
allowable leakage current limits and, when plugged into separate AC outlets, are in violation of patient
safety standards. Suitable electrical isolation of such external AC outlets, or providing the device with
extra protective earth, will be required in order to meet UL60601-1 and IEC60601-1 / IEC60601-1-1
standards for electrical leakage.

Patient Vicinity UL60601-1 (USA)
2.12.20DV (UL60601-1:2003)
In area in which patients are normally cared for, the patient vicinity is the space with surfaces likely to
be contacted by the patient or attendant who can touch the patient. This encloses a space within the
room 1.83 m (6 ft.) beyond the perimeter of the bed (examination table, dental chair, treatment booth,
and the like) in its intended location, and extending vertically 2.29 m (7.5 ft.) above the floor.
Figure 2-4 Patient Vicinity
Item Description
1. Patient vicinity

Patient Environment IEC60601-1 (IEC60601-1-1) and ANSI AAMI ES60601-1
Sub Clause 2.202 and figure 201 (IEC60601-1-1:2000)
Sub Clause 3.79 and figure A.9 (IEC60601-1:2005 and ANSI AAMI ES60601-1:2005)
Such an area is an environment in which medical diagnosis, monitoring or treatment is carried out. It is
very difficult to attach unique dimensions to the PATIENT ENVIROMENT.
In practice, a distance of 2,5 m (8.2 ft.) above the floor on which the medical personnel stand and a
horizontal distance of 1,5 m (4.9 ft.) have justified themselves as indicative of the dimensions of the
Patient Environment.
The patient environment/vicinity will be depicted as a dashed line in this procedure. See example below.
Figure 2-5 Patient Environment
Item Description
1. Patient environment


Chapter 3
LOGIQ E10 Setup
Section 3-1
Overview
This chapter contains information needed to set up the LOGIQ E10. Also included in this section are
guidelines for transporting the unit to a new site.

3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 Setup reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-3 Receiving and unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-4 Completing the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-6 Setup paperwork. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Chapter 3 LOGIQ E10 Setup 3-1

Section 3-2
Setup reminders
3-2-1 Average setup time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3-2-2 Setup warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2-1 Average setup time

Table 3-1 Average setup time
AVERAGE SETUP
DESCRIPTION TIME COMMENTS
UNPACKING THE LOGIQ E10 0.5 HOUR
SET UP LOGIQ E10 WO/OPTIONS 4 HOURS DEPENDENT ON THE CONFIGURATION
DICOM NETWORK CONFIGURATION 2 HOURS OR MORE DEPENDENT ON THE CONFIGURATION

INSTALL INSITE 0.5 HOUR
3-2-2 Setup warnings

DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE
AC GROUND LINE (FOR EXAMPLE, THE METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN),
DO NOT TOUCH THE LOGIQ E10!
CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK, CONNECT THE LOGIQ E10 TO A PROPERLY GROUNDED
POWER OUTLET. DO NOT USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER. THIS DEFEATS SAFETY
GROUNDING.
CAUTION DO NOT WEAR THE ESD WRIST STRAP WHEN YOU WORK ON LIVE CIRCUITS AND MORE
THAN 30 V PEAK IS PRESENT.
CAUTION DO NOT OPERATE THE LOGIQ E10 UNLESS ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. LOGIQ E10 PERFORMANCE AND COOLING REQUIRE THIS.
NOTICE NEVER REVERSE POLARITY ON ANY METER THAT INTERCEPTS THE POWER CORD WITH
POWER CONNECTED TO THE LOGIQ E10.
EVEN IN THE OFF STATE, REVERSING POLARITY ON THE POWER CAN SERIOUSLY DAMAGE
THE POWER SUPPLY.
CAUTION IF THE LOGIQ E10 IS VERY HOT OR COLD, ALLOW THE TEMPERATURE TO STABILIZE
BEFORE POWERING UP. FOR GUIDELINES ON REACHING OPERATIONAL TEMPERATURES
FROM STORAGE OR TRANSPORT TEMPERATURES, SEE 2-2-1 "LOGIQ E10 environmental
requirements" on page 2-2
3-2 Section 3-2 - Setup reminders

3-2-2 Setup warnings (cont’d)
CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S)

THE USER MANUAL(S) SHOULD BE FULLY READ AND UNDERSTOOD BEFORE OPERATING
THE LOGIQ E10 AND KEPT NEAR THE LOGIQ E10 FOR QUICK REFERENCE.
CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD

ALTHOUGH THE ULTRASOUND ENERGY TRANSMITTED FROM THE LOGIQ E10 PROBE IS
WITHIN AIUM/NEMA STANDARDS, AVOID UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE. ULTRASOUND
ENERGY CAN PRODUCE HEAT AND MECHANICAL DAMAGE.

Section 3-3
Receiving and unpacking the equipment
3-3-1 Purpose of this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3-3-2 Receiving and unpacking warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3-3 Tilt indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3-4 Receiving the LOGIQ E10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-3-5 Unpacking the LOGIQ E10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3-3-1 Purpose of this section

This section describes how to receive and unpack LOGIQ E10.
3-3-2 Receiving and unpacking warnings
CAUTION TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED TO UNPACK THE LOGIQ E10 BECAUSE OF ITS WEIGHT.
ATTEMPTS TO MOVE THE LOGIQ E10 CONSIDERABLE DISTANCES OR ON AN INCLINE
BY ONE PERSON COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE OR BOTH.
TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED WHENEVER A PART WEIGHING 16 KG (35 LBS) OR
MORE MUST BE LIFTED.
CAUTION REMEMBER TO USE RELEVANT PERSONAL PROTECTING EQUIPMENT (PPE) DURING

PACKING/UNPACKING. CHECK WITH YOUR LOCAL EHS REPRESENTATIVE.
3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and unpacking the equipment

3-3-3 Tilt indicator

Overview
Improper handling during transportation may harm the equipment inside the package even if the
package itself is undamaged.
To make it easier to detect if the handling during transportation has been improper, a tilt indicator has
been attached to the transportation box.
Position of the tilt indicator
The tilt indicator is attached to the side of the transportation box.

Figure 3-1 Tilt indicators
NOTE: Before cutting the straps, check the tilt indicator to make sure it has not been triggered. If
triggered, report it to the carrier. If not, then cut the straps around the crate.

LOGIQ E10 Transportation Box Label
The LOGIQ E10 Transportation Box Label is located on the transportation box.
Table 3-2 LOGIQ E10 Transportation Box Labeling
SYMBOL DEFINITION/COMMENTS
RECYCLING
Recyclable Wood
or
RECYCLING
China Specific
TOP, UPRIGHT - Transportation and Storage
KEEP DRY
(protect from moisture)
FRAGILE, Handle with Care
DO NOT STACK

3-3-4 Receiving the LOGIQ E10

Overview
Improper handling during transportation may harm the equipment inside the package even if the
package itself is undamaged.
Examine package
Examine package closely at time of delivery.
Damage in transportation
Follow this procedure if damage is apparent:
Table 3-3 Damage in transportation

STEP TASK
1. Write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed
for“ by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent.
2. Report the damage to the carrier.

• Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in
any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier.
• A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day
period.

3-3-5 Unpacking the LOGIQ E10

The instruction manual describes the best method for unpacking the LOGIQ E10 Ultrasound scanning
System. Images are ONLY for reference; wear proper PPE when handling packaging (gloves, safety
shoes, etc.).
Table 3-4 Uncrating Instructions
Steps Corresponding Graphic

1. Check the tilt indicator to make sure it has
not been triggered. If damaged, report
the damage to the carrier. For more
information, see 3-3-4 "Receiving the
LOGIQ E10" on page 3-7.
2. If not, then cut the straps (2) around the

crate.
3. Remove the top cover (1).
4.
Look inside the outside shipping box (3)

and monitor foam (not pictured).
5. Remove the probes and accessory

boxes.
6. Using special care, remove the L-shaped

cardboard divider.
7.
Using two people, remove the

transportation box (3)
Procedure continues...

Table 3-4 Uncrating Instructions (Continued)

8. Remove the OP panel foam placed
between the monitor and probe holders.
9. Remove the lower OP panel brace
placed between the lower OP panel and
the wooden ramp, by moving upward and
back.
10. Remove the wooden ramp.
11.
Remove the plastic foil from around the

LOGIQ E10.
12.
On the front of the pallet, loosen the

ratchet (will be called out) and unhook the
strap from the LOGIQ E10.
Procedure continues...

Table 3-4 Uncrating Instructions (Continued)

13.
From the back of the pallet, unhook the

strap (will be called out) from the other
end of the LOGIQ E10.
14.
Attach the wooden ramp to the rear of the

pallet base and fasten the Velcro straps.
15.
Using two people, pull the unit down the

ramp on the back off the pallet.
Note: Remember to pull in the LOGIQ
E10 from the back for safer
transportation.
16. Check the empty pallet to see if the filter covers came off during shipping.
17. For future use, store all of the packing materials inside the box.
3 - 10 Section 3-3 - Receiving and unpacking the equipment

3-3-6 Packing materials - recycling information

The packing materials for the LOGIQ E10 are recyclable:
• The transportation box is made of cardboard.

• Lever lockings (hinges) are made of zinc plated steel.
• The inner reinforcements are made of Ethafoam (Polyethylene foam).
• The plastic foil is made of LDPE (Low Density Polyethylene).
Chapter 3 LOGIQ E10 Setup 3 - 11

3-3-7 Preparing for setup

3-3-8 Verify customer order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

3-3-9 Physical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-3-10 Volume Navigation stand (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-3-11 Rear cover label and rating label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-3-12 EMI protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-3-8 Verify customer order

Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items
that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.
3-3-9 Physical inspection

Verify that the LOGIQ E10 arrived intact (visual inspection). If the LOGIQ E10 has been damaged,
please refer to “Damage in Transportation “on page "Damage in transportation" on page 3-7 in the
beginning of this manual.
3-3-10 Volume Navigation stand (optional)

To assemble the Volume Navigation stand, see: 8-15-2 "Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand" on
page 8-397.

3-3-11 Rear cover label and rating label

For rating label location, see Figure 3-4 "Rear Cover Label and Rating Label Locations" on page 3-14.
Figure 3-2 Rear Cover Label with ETL Label
Figure 3-3 Rating Label - LOGIQ E10

Rear cover label (A) and rating label (B) locations
Figure 3-4 Rear Cover Label and Rating Label Locations

3-3-12 EMI protection

This LOGIQ E10 has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI).
Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the LOGIQ E10 from image
artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are
installed and secured before the LOGIQ E10 is put into operation.
See: 2-2-3 "EMI limitations" on page 2-6 for more information about EMI protection.

Section 3-4
Completing the setup

3-4-2 LOGIQ E10 specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-4-3 Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-4-4 Connections on the I/O Rear panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-4-5 Connections on the Patient I/O panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-4-6 Connecting Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-4-7 Power On/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
3-4-8 Password Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-4-9 Disc Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-4-10 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-4-11 Logoff/Power shut down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3-4-12 Complete power down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

This section describes how to complete the set up of LOGIQ E10.
3-4-2 LOGIQ E10 specifications

LOGIQ E10 requirements verification
• Verify that the site meets the requirements listed in (see: Section 2-3 "Facility needs" on page 2-9).
• Verify that the specifications below do not conflict with any on-site conditions.
Physical dimensions
The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ E10 are summarized in Table 3-5.
Table 3-5 Physical dimensions of LOGIQ E10 with monitor and peripherals
HEIGHT* WIDTH DEPTH UNIT

1300 585 990 mm
51 23 39 inches
* Dimensions given with floating keyboard stowed for transport and the Main Monitor down.
Mass with monitor and peripherals
Table 3-6 Mass with monitor and peripherals
MODEL NUMBER WEIGHT [KG] WEIGHT [LBS]

5935000E10 135 298
Acoustic noise output
Less than 48 dB(A) at 20 degrees Celsius at a distance of 1 meter at all four sides, 1 meter above the
floor.
3 - 16 Section 3-4 - Completing the setup

3-4-3 Electrical specifications
WARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ E10 TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY
DESTROY IT.
Verification of the LOGIQ E10 voltage setting
Verify that the mains voltage specified for the LOGIQ E10 is available on-site.
The voltage setting for the LOGIQ E10 is found on the rating label on the back of the LOGIQ E10 on
lower rear frame.
Figure 3-5 Rating Label - LOGIQ E10

3-4-4 Connections on the I/O Rear panel

NOTE: Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified according
to the respective IEC standards (e.g. IEC60950 for data processing equipment and IEC60601-
1 for medical equipment). Furthermore, all complete configurations shall comply with the valid
version of the system standard IEC60601-1-1. Everybody who connects additional equipment
to the signal input part or signal output part of LOGIQ E10, configures a medical system, and is
therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of the valid version of
IEC60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the technical service department or your local representative
for GE.
Connect Ethernet
Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector on the external I/O (rear side of LOGIQ E10).
Figure 3-6 I/O Rear Panel
Table 3-7 I/O Rear Panel
Item Connection
1 USB 3.0 port
2 RJ-45 modular, 8-pin Ethernet
3 S-Video
4 HDMI port
Connect USB Flash Drive
Refer to “USB Hard Disk Drive and USB Flash Drive” in Chapter 9 of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual
for more information.
3-4-5 Connections on the Patient I/O panel

Connect ECG
Refer to “Patient Cardiac and ECG Connections” in Chapter 3 of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual for
more information.
3-4-6 Connecting Probes

Probes can be connected at any time, whether the LOGIQ E10 is on or off.
LOGIQ E10s have one type of probe ports: four DLP probe ports (Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7 Probe connectors, four DLP probe ports
To connect a probe:
NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a probe. However, it is a good
idea to select a different probe or to freeze the image when removing a probe to avoid
disconnecting a live probe.
CAUTION DO NOT CONNECT A PROBE WHILE THE LOGIQ E10 IS POWERING UP.
1.) Before connecting the probe:

a.) Perform a visual check of the probe and LOGIQ E10 sockets.
b.) Remove any dust or foam rests from the probe.
c.) Verify the probe and the probe cable for any visual damage.
2.) Hold the probe connector vertically with the cable pointing upward.
3.) Turn the connector locking handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position.
4.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
5.) Turn the locking handle clockwise to the full vertical position to lock in place.
6.) Position the probe cable so that it is not resting on the floor.
CAUTION DO NOT ALLOW THE PROBE HEAD TO HANG FREELY. EXCESSIVE IMPACT TO THE PROBE
WILL RESULT IN IRREPARABLE DAMAGE.
CAUTION KEEP THE PROBE CABLES AWAY FROM THE WHEELS.

DO NOT BEND THE PROBE CABLES.
DO NOT CROSS CABLES BETWEEN PROBES.

To disconnect a probe:
1.) Select a different probe or freeze the image before removing a probe in order to avoid disconnecting
a live probe.
2.) Rotate the lock handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position to unlock the connector.
3.) Remove the connector from the port.
4.) Ensure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage case, see: 10-5-9
"Cleaning" on page 10-12 for cleaning instructions.

3-4-7 Power On/Boot Up

Warnings
DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE LOGIQ E10 TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS
THE PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE

SAFETY GROUND.
DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE
POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).
CAUTION LOGIQ E10 REQUIRES ALL COVERS.

ONLY OPERATE THE LOGIQ E10 WHEN ALL OF THE BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS
ARE SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.
NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables, and plugs provided by or designated by GE.
NOTE: Do not cycle the circuit breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five seconds. When turning OFF the
circuit breaker, WAIT until the ON/OFF button is no longer lit. The LOGIQ E10 should de-
energize completely before turning the circuit breaker ON.

Connect AC (mains) Power to the LOGIQ E10
Connecting AC Power to the LOGIQ E10 involves preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level
and compliance with electrical safety requirements.
NOTE: The LOGIQ E10 will function on voltages from 100-240 volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using
220 volt power, then a center tapped power source is required (North America Only).
1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the circuit breaker is turned off.
2.) Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the LOGIQ E10 can be moved slightly.
3.) Verify that the:
- power cable is without any visible scratches, any sign of damage or tangled.
- on-site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the circuit breaker
on the rear of the LOGIQ E10.
4.) Connect the female plug of the power cable to the power inlet at the rear of the LOGIQ E10.
5.) Lock the plug in position with the retaining clamp (ACC clamp).
6.) Verify that the mains power circuit breaker is in OFF position, If not, switch it to OFF.
Figure 3-8 Circuit Breaker
7.) Connect the other end (male plug) of the power cable to a hospital grade mains power outlet with
the proper rated voltage, and the LOGIQ E10 is ready for Power ON/Boot Up.

Switch ON the AC Power to LOGIQ E10
1.) Switch ON the mains power circuit breaker at the rear of the LOGIQ E10. The ON/OFF button turns
amber.
Figure 3-9 ON/OFF button
You should hear a click from the relays in the AC power and the LOGIQ E10 is ready to boot. This
indicates that there is power to the PS, but the LOGIQ E10 is OFF.
2.) Press once on the ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel to boot the LOGIQ E10. The ON/OFF
button turns green when it is pressed.
During a normal boot, you may observe that:
a.) The ventilation fans start on full speed, but slow down after a few seconds (listen to the fan).
b.) Power is distributed to the peripherals, operator panel, monitor, front end and back end.
c.) Back end and rest of the LOGIQ E10 starts with the sequence listed in the next steps:
1.) Back end is turned ON and starts to load the software.
2.) The Start screen is displayed on the monitor.
3.) A start-up bar indicating the time used for software loading, is displayed on the monitor.
4.) The software initiates and sets up the front end electronics and the rest of the instrument.
5.) The backlight in the keyboard is lit.
6.) As soon as the software has been loaded, either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen,
indicating that a probe has been connected, or a No Mode screen is displayed, indicating
that no probe has been connected.
NOTE: Total time used for start-up is typically less than 170 seconds.
After the 2D screen is displayed and any function is touched, the LOGIQ E10 will prompt a password
protected Login.

3-4-8 Password Policies

To create password policies:
1.) Navigate to Utility > Admin > Logon.

2.) Select Enable Password Policies. The system prompts the user for a password at logon.
Figure 3-10 Password Policies Window
3.) Under Password Policies, use the drop down selection beside each feature to set the rules for
passwords.
4.) Click Save.

To add users:
1.) Navigate to Utility > Admin > Users.

2.) Select Add and enter the user details.
NOTE: You will need to edit the ID field from NewUser default. Do not push “Add” again until adding
another user.
DO NOT include the following characters in a user ID: slash (/), dash (-), asterisk (*), question mark (?),
an underscore (_), ampersand (&), or blank spaces. Also, DO NOT set up Users with the same
initials/signifier.
3.) Enter password using the defined policies.

4.) If needed, select User Must Change Password. The user will be prompted to change the
password on the next logon.
5.) Under Group Membership, select the groups for the new user.
NOTE: The user password is system specific. If the user needs to access multiple systems the
password will need to be entered manually on each system.
Figure 3-11 Users
The system administrator can specify whether the users account is Active, Blocked or requires a
password change.
The system administrator may also remove a user. Highlight the user Id in the list, select Remove to
mark the user as inactive and then select Remove again to remove user from the list.

To use groups:
You can use predefined groups or create new groups. Assign groups to a user from Users and under
Group Memberships.
1.) Navigate to Utility > Admin > Groups.

Figure 3-12 Groups Window
2.) To use a pre-defined group:

a.) Under Group List, select from the list of groups with pre-determined access is available to
select for each new user.
b.) To view access rights for these groups, highlight a group and then, under Group Rights, view
the access rights.
3.) To create a new group and assign access rights:
a.) Select Add.
b.) Under Name and Description, type in the name and a description.
c.) Under Group Rights, select the boxes according to the users access needs.
d.) Select Exit and then select Admin before trying to assign new groups to a user.
NOTE: Admin has full system access rights.

To set lock out and log on:

Figure 3-13 Logon
2.) Under Policies, select Enable Session Timeout.

3.) Under Password Policies, in Session Lock Screen Timeout, select the system idle time for
timeout (lock screen) in minutes. The screen will appear completely black when locked (timeout).
4.) Click Save.
5.) Press or move any button/trackball on the operator panel to display Login window.
6.) On the Login window, enter the user ID, enter the password, and then select Ok.
The user will have access according to the rights in their assigned group.
To set auto logon:
Auto LOGON only works when password policies are disabled and if there is no password assigned to
the user.

2.) Select Auto Logon. The system will start by using the ID of the last operator.

3-4-9 Disc Encryption

Patient Data Disc Encryption
Bitlocker Drive Encryption uses Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) with configurable key lengths of
256 bits.
To enable disk encryption:
1.) Navigate to Utility > Admin > Disk Encryption.

Figure 3-14 Data Encryption Window
2.) Select Encryption On.

3.) Select Yes to continue.
4.) Create a password to use for each Logon after starting system. This is not the user password, this
is system access for all users.
5.) Recovery key is created, this can be saved to a USB flash drive.
6.) Insert a USB flash drive in the USB port on the operator panel or monitor to save the key.
7.) Select Save to store the recovery key to the USB flash drive.
8.) Select Print key to send the key to a print destination.
9.) Select Show key to write down the key.

10.)Select Change key if there is a need to create a new key.
NOTE: DO NOT use the USB media for ANY other storage. This should be used for recovery key
storage ONLY.
11.)Select Save and the recovery key will be displayed one more time.
Figure 3-15 Disk Encryption - Recovery Key Window
12.)If you have not already written the key down you can do so now before moving on.
NOTE: It is important to write down or take a print of the password and recovery key. Store these and
the USB key in a secure location.
The displayed recovery key string shown is an example and not a real recovery key. The
generated key will always be different.
13.)Select Ok to continue.
14.)Encryption of data will begin. This may take up to 90 minutes the first time. After the initial encryption
there is no long process for daily use.
Figure 3-16 Disk Encryption - Encrypting Window
15.)If the recovery key needs to be changed, the disk encryption can be performed again. Insert the
USB flash drive and select Change key.
Figure 3-17 Disk Encryption - Change key
After the disk is encrypted, you will be required to unlock the disk at each startup of the system.
The unlock dialog box will appear when the new patient or print button is pushed.
16.)Use one of the methods to access/unlock the system:

- Connect a USB Flash Drive to the system.
- Select Password and type the password in the field.
- Select Recovery key and then type in the recovery key in the field.
Figure 3-18 Disk Encryption - Change key
Secure the password and recovery key (including USB memory)
It is recommended the recovery key is stored in a USB flash drive and printed out.
If both password and recovery key are lost, you will not be able to access archived patient data (images
and measurements included) nor store new patient data on this system.
The only way to recover the system to allow storing patient data is to reset entire disk that deletes all
the archived patient data in the disk.
It is strongly recommended that all the patient data be stored in PACS or backup to external media.

3-4-10 Login
At login, you are notified that “You are accessing a diagnostic medical device that is provided by
authorized usage only. Data stored on this device may be subject to various regulations including but
not limited to regulations which govern disclosure and privacy of this data. By using this device you are
acknowledging that you are authorized to do so and are trained in appropriate use and regulatory
guidelines.”
NOTICE The System Administrator manages system groups, users, and permissions. After you have been
added as a valid user, the System Administrator assigns you a temporary password. When you log into
the system for the first time, you will be prompted to change your password.
Figure 3-19 Login Window
After you have established your password, follow these steps to login.
1.) Type your user name in the Operator field.

2.) Type your password in the Password field.
3.) Press OK to login, or Cancel to cancel login.

To change your password:
You can change your password when first logging onto the system.
1.) Type your name in the Operator field.

2.) Press the Change Password button. The Change Password pop-up displays.
Figure 3-20 Change Password Pop Up
3.) Type the following:

- Password: Type your current password.
- New Password: Type your new password.
- Confirm Password: Retype your new password.
4.) Press OK to confirm your changes, or Cancel to cancel your changes.

3-4-11 Logoff/Power shut down

You can use the SYSTEM - EXIT menu to log off, shut down, and exit
Figure 3-21 SYSTEM - EXIT menu
The SYSTEM - EXIT menu gives you these choices:
• Logoff
Use this button to log off the current user.
The LOGIQ E10 remains ON and ready for a new user to log on.
If this button is dimmed, it indicates that no user is logged on to the LOGIQ E10 at the moment.
• Shutdown
Use this button to shut down the LOGIQ E10. It is recommended to perform a full shutdown at least
once a week.
If this button is dimmed, press the ON/OFF button or Alt+F10 to shut down the LOGIQ E10.
• Cancel
Use this button to exit from the SYSTEM-EXIT menu and return to the previous operation.
• Exit
Select this button when you want to exit to the Windows Desktop.

3-4-12 Complete power down

To complete power down:
1.) Press once on the ON/OFF button on the operator panel to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
Figure 3-22 ON/OFF button
2.) Select Shutdown to do a complete power down of the LOGIQ E10.

The back end will first turn off the LOGIQ E10 activity and print the message “Please wait -
Shutdown in progress” in the display on the operator panel.
Next, it starts to shut down. The time to turn down the LOGIQ E10, including the back end, may vary
from 10 seconds up to approximately 1 minute.
The last thing that shuts down, is the light on the operator panel, indicating that you can continue
with the next step.
NOTICE Risk of losing data. Be sure to wait with the next step until the LOGIQ E10 has finished its shut-down.
Failing to do so may destroy data on the hard disk drive, making the LOGIQ E10 fail later.
3.) Switch off the Mains Power Circuit Breaker, located on the rear of the LOGIQ E10. This will cut
power distribution within the LOGIQ E10.

Section 3-5
Configuration

3-5-2 LOGIQ E10 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-5-3 Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-5-4 Software Options Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

This section describes how to configure the LOGIQ E10.
3-5-2 LOGIQ E10 configuration

For complete instructions, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual or
LOGIQ E10 Release Notes.
For more information, see: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page 1-26.

3-5-3 Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection

Approved Internal Peripherals (Optional)
This list covers the internal peripherals available for the LOGIQ E10.
• 4D Option USB Flash Drive

• Black and White Printer
• CW Option
• Patient I O ECG Option
• Power Assistant Option
• Shear Wave Option
• Software DVR
• V Nav Option
• WLAN
Approved External Peripherals (Optional)
The external printers are connected through Ethernet (TCP/IP Network) as DICOM devices.
• DICOM Printers. Connected through Ethernet (TCP/IP Network or WLAN) as DICOM devices.
• USB Printers, see: 9-14-1 "Printers" on page 9-31.
• USB Footswitch
• Rolling V Nav Stand
• Color Printer
• Report Printer
Additional Information
See: Section 9-14 "Peripherals" on page 9-31 for replacement units.
Printer Checks
Check to see if the printer works as described in Table 3-8.
Table 3-8 Peripheral Checks
Step Task Note

1. Press Freeze. Stops image acquisition.
2. Press (Print 1), (Print 2), (Print 3) or (Print 4) on Prints image displayed on the screen on a black and white or color
the control panel. printer, depending on the key assignment configuration.
3 - 36 Section 3-5 - Configuration

3-5-4 Software Options Configuration

Software Option Installation
A password (Software Option String) enables a software option or a combination of software options.
This password is specific for each LOGIQ E10.
Installing a Software Option
NOTE: Before you install a software option, you must login.
Figure 3-23 Login Window
After you have established your password, follow these steps to login.
1.) Type your user name in the Operator field.

2.) Type your password in the Password field.
3.) Press OK to login, or Cancel to cancel login.

Installing a Software Option (cont’d)
4.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility > Admin > System Admin.
5.) Enter the new option key code in the SW Option Key section.
Figure 3-24 System Admin Window - Add button
6.) Select the Add button.
CAUTION INCORRECT PASSWORD ENTRY WILL RESULT IN LOSS OF SYSTEM OPTIONS.

IF PASSWORD IS INCORRECT, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL GE SERVICE
REPRESENTATIVE OR THE ONLINE CENTER.
3 - 38 Section 3-5 - Configuration

Installing a Software Option (cont’d)
7.) Import the Option String from the media.
Figure 3-25 SW Option Import
Option keys file can be imported from Media (CD/DVD,

USB) or the Service Folder.
There is an Import button on the Utility > Admin >
System Admin menu.
8.) Press Save to save the new setting.

9.) Restart to save and activate the settings and adjustments you have done so far.

Section 3-6
Setup paperwork
NOTE: During and after setup, the documentation (for example, CDs with documentation, user
manuals, and installation manuals) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original
system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available
during the operation and service of the complete system.
3-6-1 User Manual(s)

Check that the correct User Manual(s) or CD with User Manuals, per software (SW) revision and
language, for the system is included.
3-6-2 Product Locator Card/UDI

NOTE: The Product Locator Card shown may not be the same as the provided Product Locator card.
The UDI of the medical device must be captured when any work is performed on that device. Refer to
your local procedures on the actual capturing of the UDI.
Figure 3-26 Product Locator Card (Example)
GIB, European Central Admin Product Locator Card
g
GEHC - Americas Product Locator Cards Asia Service Operation
Mailing Product Locator – W523 XEROX Office No. 1, Yongchang North Road
Address P.O. Box 414 VÀKUUMTECHNOLÒGIAI GÈPGYÀR Beijing Economic and
Milwaukee, WI 53201-0414 FÒTI ÙT 141 Technologic Development Area
1046 Budapest Hungary Beijing 100176 China
DESCRIPTION F DA MOD EL REV SERIAL
OCP BS ORD
DISTRICT CUSTOMER NO. DATE (MO – DA - YR)
DESTINATION
SHIPMENT
NAME AND
ADDRESS
ZIP CODE
46-303268P1 Rev 14
GIB, European Central Admin Product Locator Card
g
GEHC - Americas Product Locator Cards Asia Service Operation
Mailing Product Locator – W523 XEROX Office No. 1, Yongchang North Road
Address P.O. Box 414 VÀKUUMTECHNOLÒGIAI GÈPGYÀR Beijing Economic and
Milwaukee, WI 53201-0414 FÒTI ÙT 141 Technologic Development Area
1046 Budapest Hungary Beijing 100176 China
DESCRIPTION F DA MODEL REV SERIAL
SYSTEM LTD. OCP BS ORD EMPLOYEE NO.
DISTRICT RO O M DATE (MO – DA - YR)
CUSTOMER NO.
INSTALLATION
DESTINATION
NAME AND
ADDRESS
ZIP CODE
46-303268P1 Rev 14
3 - 40 Section 3-6 - Setup paperwork

Chapter 4
Functional Checks
Section 4-1
Overview
This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ E10 Ultrasound
system and diagnostics instructions using the built-in service software.

4-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 Functional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-3 Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4-1-3 Special Equipment required

• An empty (blank) DVD-R disk
• At least one probe (ideally you should check all the site probes used by the Ultrasound system.)
For available probes, see: Section 7-3 "Service desktop" on page 7-10.
• If option is present, ECG Harness:
- CABLE ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA, for P/N, see:
9-16-1 "LOGIQ E10 Cables" on page 9-35.
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-1

Section 4-2
Functional checks
4-2-1 General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-2-2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
4-2-4 Power SHUT DOWN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-2-5 Top Console checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-2-6 Brakes and Direction Lock Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-2-7 Operation checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-2 Section 4-2 - Functional checks

4-2-1 General procedures

NOTICE THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
Operate the LOGIQ E10 only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The
covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
Table 4-1 Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E10

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound System where there is exposure to voltage greater
than 30 volts:
J10 2. UNPLUG THE SYSTEM.
TAG
&
J11
LOCKOUT
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AND THE ON/
Signed Date
J10
OFF BUTTON (WHITE LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL) TO TURN OFF, AS THERE ARE NO
J11
TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION.

5. REMOVE THE BATTERY COVER AND DISCONNECT THE POWER CABLES J10 and
J11 (black and red) FROM THE BACKPLANE. See: 8-2-2 "Warnings" on page 8-3 and 8-11-
15 "Rear I/O replacement" on page 8-327.
Beware that the Main Power Supply, the Batteries, Power Module, ECB Shear Wave
Capacitor Pack may be energized, even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still plugged
into the AC Outlet.

4-2-2 Overview
General System Functional Checks
After setting up the Ultrasound system, performing an upgrade, or replacing hardware, perform all
appropriate functional checks before returning a system to the customer. Include the functional check
information in the service dispatch.
For a Service call with FRU replacement:
• Perform the functional checks and include the debrief script found at the end of the respective
replacement procedure in Chapter 8.
For a Service call with no FRU replacement or when installing the system:
• Perform the following basic functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided
below.
Some procedures are used more often than others. The intention with this section is to keep the most
used procedures in one place.
NOTE: NOT ALL functional checks will have to be repeated or performed if not all Options are present.
If ONLY a particular Option is present, perform the functional checks for that particular Option
and the Options installed.
Table 4-2 General System Functional Checks
See:
Section Functional Check Debrief Script
4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
4-2-7 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-7 Basic Measurements
10-7-4 Grounding continuity
10-7-5 Chassis leakage current test
Power SHUT DOWN
DO NOT POWER SHUT DOWN until
4-2-4
ALL functional checks have been
performed
LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction 5750007-1EN,
In addition: Perform the following Functional
Rev. 1. Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and
Checks if the Option was or Options were removed
meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required checks
during Backplane replacement.
and is ready for use.
4D
4-2-7 Probe/Connectors Checks
Perform a 4D sweep
CW
PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks
4-2-7
use pencil probes
Chassis Leakage Current Test
10-8-4 Perform a CW scan with P2D, P6D,
M5S-D probes (plug in and scan)

Table 4-2 General System Functional Checks
See:
ECG
4-2-7
use Pencil Probes
Isolated patient lead (source) leakage-
10-7-7
lead to ground
Isolated patient lead (source)
10-7-8
leakage–lead to lead
Isolated patient lead (sink) leakage-
10-7-9
isolation test
ECG Checks
Active ECG:
Utility -> Applications ->
Settings -> ECG -> Show ECG
Tools.
4-2-7 Connect cables. Press Display ECG
Tab on TP. Verify ECG signal
displayed on monitor.
Plug in the ECG cables with nothing
attached so they pick up noise.
LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction 5750007-1EN,
Diagnostics
Rev. 1. Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and
Diagnostics meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required checks
and is ready for use.
Shear Wave Elastography (Shear
4-2-7
Elasto) Functional Checks
Power Assistant
Verify Power Assistant Option
functions
Shear Wave
Shear Wave Elastography (Shear
4-2-7
Elasto) Functional Checks
Perform a 4D sweep, if 4D MC was
removed.
V Nav
3D/4D and Volume Navigation
4-2-7
Functional Checks
diags


Warnings
DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE ULTRASOUND SYSTEM TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET

WHICH HAS THE PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE
SAFETY GROUND.
DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE
POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
OPERATE THIS ULTRASOUND SYSTEM ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME
PANELS ARE SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION,
GOOD SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.
NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE.
NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five (5) seconds. When turning OFF
the Circuit Breaker, the Ultrasound system should de-energize completely before turning the
circuit breaker ON.

Connect AC (mains) Power to the LOGIQ E10
Connecting AC Power to the LOGIQ E10 Ultrasound system involves preliminary checks of the power
cord, voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.
NOTE: The LOGIQ E10 will function on Voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using
220 volt power, then a center tapped power source is required.
1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the Circuit Breaker is turned off.
2.) Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the Ultrasound system can be moved
slightly.
3.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage.
4.) Verify that the on-site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit
Breaker on the rear of the Ultrasound system.
5.) Connect the Power Cable’s female plug to the Power Inlet at the rear of the Ultrasound system.
6.) Lock the plug in position with the Retaining Clamp (ACC Clamp).
7.) Verify that the Mains Power Circuit Breaker is in OFF position, if not, switch it OFF.
Figure 4-1 The Circuit Breaker and ON/OFF button
8.) Connect the other end Power Cable (male plug) to a hospital grade mains power outlet with the
proper rated voltage, and the Ultrasound system is ready for Power ON/Boot Up.

Turn the LOGIQ E10 ON
1.) Switch ON the Mains Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the LOGIQ E10. The ON/OFF button will
become white.
You should hear a “click” from the relays in the AC Power and the LOGIQ E10 is ready to boot. The ON/
OFF button will remain white.
2.) Press once on the ON/OFF button on the Operator Panel to boot the LOGIQ E10. The ON/OFF
button will turn blue when it is pressed.
During a normal boot, you may observe that:
a.) The ventilation fan starts on full speed, but slows down after a few seconds (listen to the fan
sound).
b.) Power is distributed to the peripherals, Operator Panel (Console), Monitor, Front End and Back
End.
c.) Back End and rest of scanner starts with the sequence listed in the next steps:
d.) Back End is turned ON and starts to load the software.
e.) The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor.
f.) A start-up bar indicating the time used for software loading, is displayed on the monitor.
g.) The software initiates and sets up the Front End electronics and the rest of the instrument.
h.) The backlight in the keyboard is lit.
i.) As soon as the software has been loaded, either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen,
indicating that a probe has been connected, or a No Mode screen is displayed, indicating that
no probe has been connected.
Figure 4-2 2D Screen on the display
NOTE: Total time used for start-up is typically one and a half minutes or less. If starting after a power
loss or a lock-up, the start-up time may be up to four minutes.

4-2-4 Power SHUT DOWN

When you switch OFF the LOGIQ E10, the Ultrasound system performs an automatic Shutdown
sequence.
Table 4-3 SYSTEM - EXIT menu

1. The SYSTEM - EXIT menu, used when
switching OFF the LOGIQ E10, gives you
these choices:
Logoff:
Use this button to log off the current user.
The Ultrasound system remains ON and
ready for a new user to log on.
If the Logoff button is dimmed, it indicates
that no user is logged on to the LOGIQ E10
at the moment.
Shutdown:
Use this button to Shut Down the
Ultrasound system. The entire system will
shut down. It is recommended to perform a
full Shutdown at least once a week.
If the Shutdown button is dimmed, press
the ON/OFF button or Atl F10 to shut down
the LOGIQ E10.
Cancel:
Use this button to exit from the SYSTEM -
EXIT menu and return to the previous
operation.
Exit (Only available when logged in as GE
Service with Service Dongle):
Select this button when you want to exit to
the Windows Desktop.

4-2-5 Top Console checks

Alphanumeric Keyboard Checks
Select comments and type different A/N keys to confirm keyboard functionality.
Footswitch
1.) Plug in the footswitch.

2.) Select Utility -> Application.
You should see the footswitch programming options for Left, Middle and Right switches.
3.) Program them all for Freeze.

4.) Then Scan and use each pedal to freeze and unfreeze to be sure each works.
Figure 4-3 Footswitch Functional Checks
4 - 10 Section 4-2 - Functional checks

Top Console adjustment controls
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the
Top Console. This includes both objects and people.
The system Top Console can be freely moved in any horizontal direction (if the power is on or if the
mechanism is not locked in position prior to powering down the system). The vertical displacement of
the Top Console is motor driven. The control buttons are located between the handles.
Power ON the LOGIQ E10 before performing the following steps.
Table 4-4 Top Console adjustment controls: Lock (1), Up/Down (2)

1. CAUTION
To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving
the Top Console. This includes both objects and people.
Lock/Release button (1): unparking and

sideways displacement of the console.
Up/Down button (2): raising/lowering the
console.
To LOCK the Top Console:

Press and hold down the Lock/Release button (1), while pushing the Top Console in the locked
position.
Release the button.
To RAISE/LOWER the Top Console:

Press and hold the Up/Down button (2) accordingly to raise or lower the Top Console.
Release the button when the Top Console is at the desired height.
To move the floating Top Console:

The unlocked Top Console can be easily moved by pressing and holding the Lock/Release
button (1) and moving the Top Console in any horizontal (XY) direction.
Release the button when the Top Console is at the desired direction.
To move the Top Console if Power is OFF
To manually release the console’s XY-mechanism (frogleg) if the power is OFF, see: Section 6-4
"Operator Panel movement" on page 6-13.
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4 - 11

Main Monitor Positions and Lock

Figure 4-4 Main Monitor Positions - Ergotron Arm
3
2
2
3
6 4b
4a
5 4c
6
Tilt
a. No Collision
1. Vertical Travel = 150mm 4. b. Approximately 20º
(based on Pan Arm Off-set)
c. 85º-90º
2. Rotation at Mount = 90º (180º 5. Monitor Translation = 350mm

total) (both sides)
Lift Arm Rotation = 135º (270º 6. Pan Arm Rotation = 45º (90º
3.
total) total)
When the Monitor Arm Lock is unlocked. verify the Monitor can move up/down (vertically) and left/right
(horizontally).
NOTE: The Monitor can move approximately 100 mm (3.94 inches) vertically and
250 mm (9.84 inches) horizontally.

Operator I/O Movement - Main Monitor
Check that the monitor functions as described below
Table 4-5 Main Monitor Platform Maneuverability Checks
Step Task Note(s)
1. Use both hands, one at the top of the Main Monitor and
Tilt Forward/Back one at the bottom, to rotate the screen forward and
back.
2. Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the
Move Left/Right Main Monitor and one at the lower right handle hold, to
adjust the screen left and right.
See: "Main Monitor Positions and Lock" on page 4-12.
To unlock the Monitor
- Turn the knob counter clockwise to unlock the Monitor.

The Monitor can be moved freely in all directions.
To lock the Monitor
- Turn the knob clockwise to raise the lock and move the Monitor into the parked position.
Monitor position for Transport

Figure 4-5 Monitor transport Position
Lock Arm and tilt Monitor down.

4-2-6 Brakes and Direction Lock Functional Checks

Table 4-6 Brakes and Direction Lock Functional Checks

Front Brakes and Direction Locks
Check that the Front brakes and direction locks function.
Only the Front Casters and brakes are controlled with these pedals.
1. Press the left pedal (1) to engage the
direction LOCK.
Press both pedals (1+2) to UNLOCK active
lock(s).
3. Front wheels.
You may need to move the Ultrasound
system around a little to get the wheels to
lock into the locked direction.
2. Press the right pedal (2) to engage the
Parking brakes.
Press both pedals (1+2) to release
(UNLOCK) active lock(s).
Front wheels (3).
Rear Brakes (brakes only)
Only the Rear Casters and brakes are controlled with these pedals.
1. Press DOWN on the brake lever to LOCK.
Press UP on the lever to UNLOCK.
The Rear Caster only brake and can still
swivel. If both Rear Casters are LOCKED,
this will limit how much they can swivel.

4-2-7 Operation checks

Basic Controls
Figure 4-6 LOGIQ E10 Trackball Area
Different functions can be assigned to the Trackball depending of the current active mode. The Trackball
area consist of:
• The Trackball: used as a cursor control in acquisition mode, scrolling control in freeze and as a
selection tool (like a mouse cursor) in post-processing mode.
• Three SELECT keys (identical): Perform the selected control or highlighted menu item.
• The TRACKBALL key: Toggles between the available Trackball function assignments displayed in
the Status bar.
• The update menu key: enables quick access to image related functions from a pop-up menu.
Other Controls
Other controls are located on separate keys (knobs and buttons) or groups of keys on the Operator
Panel.

Recommended Test Phantoms
GE recommends the RMI 430GS phantom is preferred, but it is not required. It is the most current
phantom recommended to our field service personnel and provides the necessary targets and extended
life necessary for consistent Ultrasound system testing.
Figure 4-7 Performance tests
Lateral Distance
Measurement
Penetration
2
4
Axial Distance
Contrast Measurement
Resolution
& 6
Gray Scale
Photography 4 3 2 1
8 Functional
Resolution
10
Lateral
Resolution 12
14
Axial 16
Resolution
RMI 403GS

Probe/Connectors Checks
NOTE: Probes can be connected at any time, whether the LOGIQ E10 is ON or OFF.
To connect a probe
1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.
2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.
3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable
damage.
4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise.
5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector.
7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not
resting on the floor.
CAUTION TAKE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS WITH THE PROBE CABLES:

- KEEP AWAY FROM THE WHEELS
- DO NOT BEND
- DO NOT CROSS CABLES BETWEEN PROBES
Table 4-7 Probe and Connectors Checks

Step Task Expected Result(s)
1. Select the appropriate connected probe The probe activates in the currently-selected
from the probe indicators on the Touch operating mode. The probe's default settings
Panel. for the mode and selected exam are used
automatically.
2. Launch the application.
To change application without changing the The selected application starts.
current probe, press THE DESIRED MODE
on the Operator Panel.
3. Verify no missing channels All channels is functioning.
4. Verify there's no EMI/RFI or artifacts specific
No EMI/RFI or artifacts.
to the probe.
5. Test the probe in each active connector slot.,
see: Section 3-4-6 "Connecting Probes" on It will display pictorial data each time
page 3-19.
6. Repeat this procedure for all available probes.
Probes Requiring a Leakage Test
If the probe requires a Leakage Test, see: Section 10-7 "Electrical Safety Tests" on page 10-12.

B-Mode Checks
For information on the Ultrasound system’s different modes as well as expected results, refer to the
appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5, or the appropriate LOGIQ E10
Release Notes. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page 1-26.
Introduction
The B-mode is the Ultrasound system’s default mode.

Figure 4-8 B-mode Screen Example
Depending on probe availability, choose the preset application shown below. The LOGIQ E10
probes are ONLY approved for use in the applications listed in the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual,
Chapter 11, or the appropriate LOGIQ E10 Release Notes. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on
page 1-26.
IQC preset for Service is available.
Image Quality Check (IQC) is intended to facilitate Image Quality checks during Quality Assurance
Evaluations. Quality Assurance tests are used to determine whether a scanner is providing the same
level of performance year after year.
By using the same settings year after year, this ensures that the data collection is consistent,
independently of who performs the test.
This preset only includes fundamental settings for B-Mode.
Processing modes like SRI, Harmonics, etc., are turned off.
To do an Image Quality Check (IQC):
1.) Activate IQC via Utility -> Imaging Preset Manager -> Category (select the Category first).
2.) Click on the plus sign in front of IQC for Service.
3.) Assign IQC to a Touch Panel key by using the right arrow key.
4.) Map the IQC to the location you want it to appear on the Touch Panel.
5.) Select Model -> IQC.

B-Mode Checks (cont’d)
Probe Indications for Use
See On-line Help or refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual, Chapter 11.
See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page 1-26.
Preparations
You may use a phantom (optional) when doing these tests.
1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanner’s active probe connector.
- see: Section 3-4-6 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-19 for info about connecting the probes.
- For available probes, see: Section 9-17 "Probes" on page 9-39.
2.) Turn ON the scanner.
The B-Mode window is displayed (default mode).
3.) If needed, adjust the Display’s Brightness and Contrast setting (see: Section 6-2 "Monitor
adjustments" on page 6-2).
WARNING ALWAYS USE THE MINIMUM POWER REQUIRED TO OBTAIN ACCEPTABLE IMAGES
IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE GUIDELINES AND POLICIES.
1.) Press B-MODE on the Operator Panel to access B-Mode.
2.) These Image Controls are used to optimize the B-Mode picture:
- Use Gain and TGC controls to optimize the overall image together with the Power control.
- Use Depth to adjust the range to be imaged.
- Use Focus to center the focal point(s) around the region of interest.
- Use Frequency (move to higher frequencies) or Frame rate (move to lower frame rate) to
increase resolution in image.
- Use Frequency (move to lower frequency) to increase penetration.
- Use the control to optimize imaging in the blood flow regions and make a cleaner, less noisy
image.
- Use Reject controls to reduce noise in the image.
Checks
• Check Width, Focus, Frame rate, Frequency

The results of these adjustments must be verified on the B-Mode sector on the screen.
• Check Up/Down, Left/Right, B Color Maps and Cineloop

The results of these adjustments must be verified on the B-Mode sector on the screen.
• Check Gain, TGC and Depth

• Check B-Mode Soft Menu Controls
• Check Compress, Contour, Reject and Tilt
• Check Power and Dynamic Range

M-Mode Checks
For information on the Ultrasound system’s different modes as well as expected results, the Basic User
Manual or User Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow,
and Doppler.
Table 4-8 B/M-Mode Functions
Control Description
Power Output (Acoustic Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 10% increments between
Power) 0-100%. Values greater than 0.1 are displayed
Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the
Dynamic Range
adjustable range of contrast.
Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can
Focus Number and
tighten up the beam for a specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone
Position
position(s) appears on the right edge of the image.
Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain
Rejection
minimum amplitude before it will be processed).
Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the effect of presenting a smoother,
Frame Average
softer image.
Colorize Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect a Gray Map.
Gray Map Determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.
Rotation (Up/Down) Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu.
Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to probe's next lower frequency or shift up to a
Frequency
higher frequency.
Frame Rate/Resolution Optimizes B-Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image.
Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept.
Preparations
- For available probes, see: On-line Help or refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10
Basic User Manual. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page 1-26.
Checks
• Check Horizontal Sweep, Frequency, and Focus

• Check Compress, Reject, Power and Dynamic Range

System CFM and PWD Checks
Introduction
For information on the Ultrasound system’s different modes as well as expected results, the Basic
User Manual or User Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color
Flow, and Doppler.
For complete information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual,
Chapter 5, or the appropriate LOGIQ E10 Release Notes. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on
page 1-26.
Preparations
- For available probes, see: Section 9-17 "Probes" on page 9-39.
Color Mode Checks
Color Flow screens are B or M-Mode screens with colors representing blood or tissue movement.
Color Flow may be selected both from B-Mode, or from M mode, or a combination of these.
For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5,
or the appropriate LOGIQ E10 Release Notes.
Color B-Mode Checks
Color M-Mode Checks
- Check Horizontal Sweep, PRF, Baseline, and Invert

- Check Variance, Color Maps and Cineloop
- Check Sample Volume
- Check Frequency and Acoustic Power
- Adjust ROI

For information on the Ultrasound system’s different modes, the Basic User Manual or User Guide
will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.
Doppler is used to measure velocity (most often in blood). Doppler mode can be done with a special
pencil probe or with an ordinary probe. By using an ordinary probe, you can first bring up a B-Mode
picture for navigation purpose and then add Doppler.
Preparations
1.) Connect one of the probes to the scanner.

- See: Section 3-4-6 "Connecting Probes" on page 3-19 for info about connecting the probes.
- For available probes, see: Section 9, Probes.
2.) Turn ON the scanner
3.) The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode).
4.) If needed, adjust the Display’s Brightness and Contrast setting.
5.) Press PW or CW to start Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW) or Continuous Wave Doppler (CW).
6.) Use the Trackball to select the Area of Interest (Sample Volume) in PW or direction of interest
in CW.
Adjust the PW/CW Doppler Mode controls
Adjust the Active mode gain to set the gain in the spectral Doppler area.
- Adjust Low velocity reject to reduce unwanted low velocity blood flow and tissue movement.
- In PW mode, adjust Sample volume to low setting for better resolution, or higher setting to
more easily locate the disturbed flows.
- Adjust the Compress setting to balance the effect of stronger and weaker echoes and obtain
the desired intensity display.
- Adjust Frequency to optimize flow display. Higher setting will improve resolution and the
lower setting will increase the depth penetration.
- Adjust Frame rate to a higher setting to improve motion detection, or to a lower setting to
improve resolution.
NOTE: Frequency and Frame rate settings may affect the Low Velocity Reject.
- Adjust Power to obtain an acceptable image using the lowest setting possible. This is
particularly important in CW mode, as the energy duty cycle is 100% (constant).
NOTE: The Doppler Power setting affects only Doppler operating modes.
- Adjust the following settings to further optimize the display of the image.
- Use the Horizontal sweep to optimize the sweep speed.
- To view signal detail, adjust Scale to enlarge the vertical spectral Doppler trace.
- Use Invert to reverse the vertical component of the spectral Doppler area of the display.
- Use Angle correction to steer the ultrasound beam to the blood flow to be measured.

Cineloop Checks
Chapter 5, or the appropriate LOGIQ E10 Release Notes. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page
1-26.
To Activate CINE
1.) Press Freeze, then roll the Trackball to activate CINE.

2.) To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop.
To Omit Images
- Roll the Trackball to the frame you want to delete and press Omit Image.
To Restore Images
- To undo deleting an image from the CINE Loop, press Restore Image.
To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame
1.) Press First to move to the first CINE frame.

2.) Press Last to move to the last CINE frame.
To Start Frame/End Frame
1.) Turn the Start Frame dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial
to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop.
2.) Turn the End Frame dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the
left to move backward through the CINE Loop.
To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed
- Turn the Loop Speed dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed.
To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame
- Turn Frame by Frame to move through CINE memory one frame at a time.
Checks
- Check Left Marker, Right Marker, Cycle Select and Number of Cycles
- Check First, Last Cycle, Select all
- Adjust Scroll and Cine Speed

Removable Media
Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual, or the appropriate LOGIQ E10
Release Notes. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page 1-26 to perform the following tasks:
• Using Removable Media

• Labeling Removable Media
• Formatting Removable Media
• Verifying Removable Media
Types of removable media - CD/DVD, USB - thumb drive and HDD
Archiving and Loading Presets
Loading Presets from removable media
For information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual, or the
appropriate LOGIQ E10 Release Notes. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page 1-26.
Installation and Setup Procedures for Peripherals
Refer to 3-5-3 "Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection" on page 3-36.
Table 4-9 Printer Functional Check
See
Section Functional Test Debrief Script
LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
7-4-4 Test of printers 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all
required tests and is ready for use.

Basic Measurements
NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze.
Check Distance and Tissue Depth Measurement
1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.

2.) Move the TRACKBALL to position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most anterior
point (tissue depth).
3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
4.) The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
5.) Move the TRACKBALL to position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most
posterior point (tissue depth).
6.) Press Set to complete the measurement.
The Ultrasound system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement
results window.
NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:

• To toggle between active calipers, press MEASURE.
• To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press
CLEAR once.
To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn Cursor Select.
After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point, but not
data entered onto worksheets, press Clear.
Check Circumference/Area (Ellipse) Measurement
1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.

2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper.
3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
4.) The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
5.) Move the Trackball to position the second caliper.
6.) Turn the Ellipse control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears.
NOTE: Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern.
7.) Move the Trackball to position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (the calipers).
8.) To increase the size, turn the Ellipse control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size, turn
the Ellipse control in a counterclockwise direction.
9.) To toggle between active calipers, press Measure.
10.)Press Set to complete the measurement.
11.)The Ultrasound system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results
window.
Before you complete a measurement:
- To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press Clear once. The original caliper is
displayed to restart the measurement.
- To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press Clear again.

Worksheets
Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and

calculations. There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The
worksheets are selected from the Measurement Touch Panel.
Report Pages
Measurements/Calculations that are included on the worksheet can also be displayed on Report
Pages. Report Pages can be customized to meet the appropriate needs of the user.
Multi Image Checks
For information on the Ultrasound system’s different modes as well as expected results, refer to the
appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual, Chapter 5, or the appropriate LOGIQ E10
Release Notes. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page 1-26.

ECG Checks
Introduction
The ECG capability on this LOGIQ E10 is intended as a trigger for measurements, but can also be
viewed on the screen.
Parts needed
- ECG Harness, for P/Ns, see: Section, Options.

- ECG Pads, (3 pc)
or
- ECG simulator
Preparations
None
ECG Checks
Table 4-10 ECG Checks
Step Task Expected Result(s)

1. Select Preset, Select Cardiac, Select Scan.
2. If you do not see the ECG line, select the
ECG tab, you should see selection on touch You should then see the line.
screen for DISPLAY ECG. Select and press.
3. Plug in the ECG cables with nothing
The line should display noise.
attached so you pick up noise.
4. The LOGIQ E10 displays a straight curve along
Connect the ECG harness to the connector
the bottom edge of the image sector on the
on the front of the Ultrasound system.
screen.
5. Connect the three leads to a ECG simulator,
When connecting, the signal on the screen will be
or fasten the three ECG Pads to your body
noisy. When the connection is completed, a
and connect the three leads to respective
typical clean ECG signal is displayed.
ECG Pad.
3D/4D and Volume Navigation Functional Checks
Chapters 5 and 6, or the appropriate LOGIQ E10 Release Notes. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on
page 1-26.
Shear Wave Elastography (Shear Elasto) Functional Checks
If the Capacitor Pack is not present or the Power Supply to Capacitor Pack Cable is not connected, or
connected properly, the option to select the “Shear Elasto” soft button after pressing the Elasto button,
the Touch Panel key “Shear Elasto/strain Elasto” button WILL NOT be present.
• Select a probe - L2-9-D, C1-6-D or ML4-16-D.

• Select ELASTO button.
• In the Touch Panel, select Shear Wave button if not already selected.
• Verify that the Shear Wave button is available.

Section 4-3
Site Log
Table 4-11 Site Log
DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS
4 - 28 Section 4-3 - Site Log

Chapter 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Section 5-1
Overview
This chapter explains LOGIQ E10’s Ultrasound system concepts, component arrangement, and
subsystem functions. It also describes the Power Distribution System. Refer to the Basic User Manual
for more information.

5-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 LOGIQ E10 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-3 LOGIQ E10 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-4 Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-5 Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-6 Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-7 Back End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-8 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-9 Top Console with Main Monitor and Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-10 Power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-11 Air Flow control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-12 Casters and Brakes description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5-13 Options and Peripherals descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-14 Product manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-1

Section 5-2
LOGIQ E10 models
Table 5-1 LOGIQ E10 Models
MODEL SOFTWARE
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER VERSION
LOGIQ E10,
5935000E10 R1.x.x
100-240 VAC
5-2 Section 5-2 - LOGIQ E10 models

Section 5-3
LOGIQ E10 description
The purpose of this section is to give you an overview of LOGIQ E10 and how it functions.

5-3-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-3-3 LOGIQ E10 general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3-2 Introduction
The LOGIQ E10 Ultrasound system is a high performance digital Ultrasound imaging System with total
data management.
The LOGIQ E10 provides image generation in B-Mode, Color Doppler, Power Doppler, M-Mode, PW,
4D, Harmonic Imaging, and Contrast imaging applications. The fully digital architecture of the
LOGIQ E10 Ultrasound system allows optimal usage of all scanning modes and probe types throughout
the full spectrum of operating frequencies.

5-3-3 LOGIQ E10 general description

LOGIQ E10 is a digital beamforming Ultrasound system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector
Panel to the Front End Electronics, then to the ECB (LOGIQ E10 Carrier Board), and finally, the results
are displayed on the monitor
System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive
on power up.
The LOGIQ E10 is comprised of the following major components:
• Front End
• Back End
• OP Panel
• Peripherals
• Options
• Power Distribution
• Mechanical Parts
• Software
5-4 Section 5-3 - LOGIQ E10 description

Section 5-4
Software overview
The intention with this section is to give you a brief overview of the software used on LOGIQ E10. You
can also refer to the Basic User Manual for more information.

5-4-2 LOGIQ E10 Base Load Image and Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-4-3 Electronic media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-4-4 Log File Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-4-5 Smart Devices Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

5-4-2 LOGIQ E10 Base Load Image and Application Software

• LOGIQ E10 Software consist of:
- Base Image
* Windows 10 Embedded
* Contains all necessary drivers to support devices and peripherals approved for this
product
- Application Software
* Contains customized Software to perform all functions and features for the LOGIQ E10
• Software Location:
- Software resides in the internal hard drive
Hard Drive Partitions
Table 5-2 LOGIQ E10 Partition Layout
Partition GB
Drive Type Usage
Letter (approximately)
C: Windows 10/application 79
SSD
Z: Software Repository 31
D: User settings/configuration 42
HDD E: Database/data 879
V: Future Use 10
• Software Installation:
- Software can be loaded/reloaded with USB media.
- C partition (Base+Application) can be reloaded from the Z partition.
- C partition (Base+Application) can be updated through a remote connection to the Service
Back Office.
• Network Capabilities:
- LAN is IPv6 ready.
- System can only be setup for IPv4 or IPv6. They cannot be mixed.
5-6 Section 5-4 - Software overview

5-4-3 Electronic media

Accessing Documentation Via a Windows PC To view user documentation on a Windows PC:
1.) Insert the media into the media drive.

2.) Open the media drive on your desktop.
3.) Double click on the ‘gedocumentation.html’ document.
4.) Select the item you want to view (click on the blue, underlined link in the File Name column).
To close the window, click on the ‘X’ in the upper, right-hand corner of the browser window.
NOTE: If your PC does not have Adobe Reader, a free download is available on the Adobe website at
http://www.adobe.com.

5-4-4 Log File Content

Uncompressing the log files provides a subdirectory with the results.
1.) SysConfig.csv – Contains serial number, hardware info, software version, etc.
2.) log/ExceptionTrace – subdirectory contains text file with call stack of system crashes
3.) log/DL – (Deep Learning) subdirectory contains anonymized low resolution jpg images. Can be
used for troubleshooting. Every time you press the print key. Very low resolution images, may be
useful to get examples of image issues visible in low resolution. Used for data analytics. User can
disable them via UI.
4.) log/Diag – subdirectory contains diagnostics results
5.) log/Crashes – subdirectory may contain Windows/application crash info
6.) log/CrashDump – subdirectory may contain Windows/application crash info
7.) Log/ScLogsDatabase – subdirectory containing tab-separated text files (Data Logging)
8.) Log/ScLogsDatabase_PI – subdirectory with Patient Proprietary Info (keyboard shadow)
9.) WinEvt – subdirectory with Windows Event logs
Logs are text files and can be open in Excel. Fields are separated by tabs in order to make it easier to
be opened in Excel.
Logs will not be present there until they are collected through Alt+D or Gather Logs.
5-8 Section 5-4 - Software overview

5-4-5 Smart Devices Applications

The Smart Devices Applications are available for Android and iPad devices via Bluetooth:
• Remote Control App

• Camera App
To link to the device:
1.) Connect the device to the LOGIQ E10 via dongle.

2.) Scan for devices.
3.) Connect to the device.
Remote Control App
Via the Remote Control App, you will be able to adjust the following controls:
• Depth
• PW Gain
• CF Gain
• B-Mode Gain
• Left/Right
• Measure
• Comment
• Clear
• Trackball
• Freeze
• Store
• Color Flow Scale
• Cursor
Camera App
You can use the camera to capture images that will go to the patient’s exam.

Section 5-5
Service Desktop
The Service Desktop is an interface that provides access to system information, status and diagnostics.
The Service Desktop has different content or views depending on the access level. The access level is
determined by the user profile as well as the service options enabled on the LOGIQ E10.
• Basic view is the standard view, restricted only by the user through the user profile settings.
Administrator default user has access to the Service Desktop. Any user with "local Service access"
in their user profile can have access to this view.
• Class C view is the view enabled by the service options purchased.
- Service Advanced
- Service Expert (requires Service Advanced)
- Service Pro (requires Service Advanced)
5-5-1 User Level of the Service Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-5-1 User Level of the Service Desktop

Table 5-3 shows Service Desktop widgets available for local service user without an SSA Key and
without service options.
Table 5-3 User Level of the Service Desktop
Basic View Class C View Levels

Main Main Sub-
Menus menus Service Service Service
Simple
Advanced Expert Pro
Home X X X X
Diags X X X
Run Diags X X X
e-PAT
X
diagnostic
Diag History X X X
DICOM X X X
DICOM
X X X
Service Status
DICOM
X X X
Spooler
Utilities X X X X
Change
X X X X
Password
Disk
X X X
Defragment
Gather Logs X X X X
Delete Files X X X X
5 - 10 Section 5-5 - Service Desktop

Table 5-3 User Level of the Service Desktop
Basic View Class C View Levels

Main Main Sub-
Menus menus Service Service Service
Simple
Advanced Expert Pro
Software
X X
Reload
Reset Patient
X X
Database
Clean
X X
Userdefs
Network
X X X X
Capture
Third Party
X X X X
Licences
Checkpoints X X X
Disruptive
X X X
Mode Utility
Data Transfer X X X X
SSA License X X X X
Options X X X X
Agent
X X X X
Configuration
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 11

Section 5-6
Front End
The intention with this section is to give you a brief overview of the Front End configuration used on
LOGIQ E10.

5-6-2 Card Rack General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5 - 12 Section 5-6 - Front End

5-6-2 Card Rack General description

The “Card Rack” houses all the transmit, receive and processing circuit boards.

Section 5-7
Back End

The intention with this section is to give you a brief overview of the Back End configuration used on
LOGIQ E10.

5-7-2 ECB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-7-3 SSD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5 - 14 Section 5-7 - Back End

5-7-2 ECB
General Description
The LOGIQ E10 Carrier Board (ECB) is a single board computer built from a COM Express module fitted
into customized rack. Its main function is to be the central processing unit of the Ultrasound system,
controlling all the functionality, user interface and connectivity of the scanner.
Backplane connectors give the connectivity to the rack Backplane to interface to the other components/
boards installed in the rack/system.
Front connectors give the connectivity to interface to user-IO and components installed in the system.
The ECB also host a single slot GPU card, a standard SATA Solid State Drive (SSD) and a mini-PCI
Express module.
Figure 5-1 ECB/Back End Block Diagram
GPU card FPGA

(power good,
reset, etc)
SMA
mini PCI-e Ant.
module
(WiFi) SMA
Ant.
Optional HDD
USB USB 2.0 ECG
On- board COMe USB 2.0
2.0
Skylake USB 2.0 VGU
USB 2.0 hub
USB 2.0
Main
CP U Memory USB 2.0
USB USB 3.0
GPIO QPI USB 3.0 3.0 USB 3.0

hub
USB 3.0
PCIe
GEN3 CP U
USB 3.0 USB 3.0 Color printer
SATA HDD
USB 3.0 USB 3.0 BW printer
On- board
AMP Ethernet Ethernet

Codec HD- Audio
HDMI HDMI
PCIe S - VIDEO
HDMI Monitor
USB 3.0
SATA
SATA
USB HDMI OPIO

On- Board
REAR PANEL
RESET
pushbutton
ECB
w/ Power
On- Board
SATA
SATA
USB
InterConnection
FPANEL
OPIO
/ Fan
SATA Power
Location in the LOGIQ E10
The ECB is located on the right side of the Card Cage, behind the I/O Board and is shielded from the
other Cards.

ECB LEDs
Figure 5-2 ECB LEDs
J5
J6
J7
A) J8
B)
C)
D)
J9
J10
Table 5-4 LOGIQ E10 ECB LEDs
Mark Definition Color - Normal Color: Cause
- OFF: AC power off or Main PS 5Volt standby power failure

- Yellow/amber: STANDBY mode
A POWER_ON - Green: Working; Computer is running
- this LED also shows the various stages of the POWER-ON
sequence (different colors and blink patterns)

B P5V_STD
Light Green - Green: 5Volt standby power is good

C PWR_OK - Red: 48Volt from Main PSU fault or Main PS is turned off- -
- Green: 48Volt from Main PSU good

D PS_ON - Red: Main PSU turned off
- Green: Main PSU turned on
5 - 16 Section 5-7 - Back End

5-7-3 SSD
The SSD (Solid State Drive) is connected to the ECB to further host the C (Windows 10 operating
system and application and utilities) and Z (Software Repository and additional files for Software
Reload) partitions of the HDD. No patient data is stored on the SSD.
Location of the SSD in the LOGIQ E10

Figure 5-3 SSD location

Section 5-8
Backplane

The intention with this section is to give you a brief overview of the Backplane used on LOGIQ E10.

5-8-2 Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5 - 18 Section 5-8 - Backplane

5-8-2 Backplane
The LOGIQ E10 Backplane is part of an Ultrasound system, capable of processing 192 ultrasound
channels concurrently. It functions as interconnect for the different boards and Options in the
LOGIQ E10 Hard Ware platform.

Section 5-9
Top Console with Main Monitor and Operator Panel
The purpose of this section is to give you an overview of the top console and to tell you how it functions.

5-9-2 Transporting LOGIQ E10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-9-3 Operator Panel XY movement - principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-9-2 Transporting LOGIQ E10

The top console must be locked into the lower, center (X/Y) position before transporting the LOGIQ E10.
The Main Monitor must be in its flipped down position. And the rear wheel brake must be set. Refer to
the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual, or the appropriate LOGIQ E10 Release
Notes. See Table 1-7 "Basic User Manual and Release Notes for the LOGIQ E10" on page 1-26.
5-9-3 Operator Panel XY movement - principle of operation

When the OP is in the locked position, press the left button ”lock” of the Frogleg Controls, which causes
the motorized park lock to release and releases the brakes, momentarily in the froglegs. This allows the
OP to move in the XY direction.
When the console is not locked (floating), press the lock button, this will only release the brakes in the
froglegs, to allow easy movement. When the lock button is pressed and the console is pushed back into
the locked position, the U-bolt mechanically engages the park lock (similar to a car door). Pushing the
lock button does not affect the locking action of the park lock, it only releases the brakes, to allow the
OP to get pushed into the park lock easier. But, the lock button must be pushed to get the OP to the
locked position. Once the OP is in the lock position and the lock button is released, you can hear the
sound of the park lock rotating to engage the U-bolt.
At shutdown, a message will appear ONLY if the Operator Panel is not parked. This message tells the
user that the Operator Panel is not parked.
The user can proceed to park the Operator Panel or to leave it un-parked.
Notice that ONCE the user selects shutdown in the Monitor, the 2 buttons (Z-motion and XY-motion)
are disabled. The brakes on the XY mechanism are released the XY movement is free but the Z-motion
is disabled. If the user wants to adjust the Z-Mechanism after shutdown, they will need to use the handle
in the back of the Ultrasound system.
NOTE: Remember, if the device brakes are not locked when trying to lock the OP, this can act as a
“shock absorber” and make it more difficult for the park lock to lock.
5 - 20 Section 5-9 - Top Console with Main Monitor and Operator Panel
Section 5-10
Power distribution
The power distribution within the LOGIQ E10 is described in this section.

5-10-2 Main Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5-10-2 Main Power Supply

General description
The Main Power Supply’s main task is to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on-site Mains Power
System and to supply the various internal subsystems with DC power.
Power from the wall outlet (100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz) is connected to the Main Power Supply. The
Main Power Supply delivers the needed voltages to the rest of the LOGIQ E10:
• Printer (24 VDC)

• Front End Rack (DC power with several voltages)
• Front End Rack (TSV1 and TSV2 for the transmitters)
• Front End Rack (PMXVOUT for the probe channel multiplexers)
• Back End
An inrush current limiter reduces the peak input current when the LOGIQ E10 is switched on. An EMI
filter helps to reduce EMI to acceptable levels.
The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the
wall outlet.
Fuses are located inside the power supply (only to be replaced by the manufacturer).
5 - 22 Section 5-10 - Power distribution

General description
Figure 5-4 Main Power Supply location (rear of LOGIQ E10)

Temperature Control
The Main Power Supply is equipped with an internal fan with variable speed for temperature control.
Both the temperature of the air entering the power supply and leaving the power supply are measured.
Fan speed is controlled by the power supply.
Input
Mains Power, 100 VAC or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Figure 5-5 L1 - Mains IN connector
5 - 24 Section 5-10 - Power distribution

Section 5-11
Air Flow control
5-11-1 General description
The Air Flow Control includes the following components: Air cooling fans located at the bottom of the
LOGIQ E10 Card Cage and air cooling fans in the power supply that are self-managed by the power
supply itself.
5-11-2 Location in the LOGIQ E10

There are three air strainers/filters: One located on the rear of the LOGIQ E10 and one located on each
side panel, near the bottom in a recessed feature. Refer to Chapter 8 for more information.
Figure 5-6 Air Flow Path of the LOGIQ E10
Cooling air is drawn in, evenly into the filters located in the bottom of the Side Covers/Air Intake and the
Rear Bumper/Air Intake. The warmed air is exhausted from the Rear Cover/Air Exhaust.

Section 5-12
Casters and Brakes description
The front brake is used for everyday use; the back brake is ONLY used to transport the LOGIQ E10.
Table 5-5 Casters and Brakes direction

Front Brakes and Direction Locks
Check that the Front brakes and direction locks function.
Only the Front Casters and brakes are controlled with these pedals.
1. Press the left pedal (1) to engage the
direction LOCK.
lock(s).
3. Front wheels.
system around a little to get the wheels to
2. Press the right pedal (2) to engage the
Parking brakes.
Front wheels (3).
Rear Brakes (brakes only)
Only the Rear Casters and brakes are controlled with these pedals.
1. Press DOWN on the brake lever to LOCK.
Press UP on the lever to UNLOCK.
The Rear Caster only brake and can still
swivel. If both Rear Casters are LOCKED,
this will limit how much they can swivel.
5 - 26 Section 5-12 - Casters and Brakes description

Section 5-13
Options and Peripherals descriptions
The Options and Peripherals within the LOGIQ E10 is described in this section.

5-13-2 Internal Hardware Options and Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-13-3 External peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5-13-2 Internal Hardware Options and Peripherals

(See: 3-5-3 "Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection" on page 3-36)
• DVD drive available on the front right of the scanner
NOTE: Only CD-R and DVD-R (write and read) are supported. CD-R/W and DVD R/W disks are not
supported.
• 4D Option
• CW Option
• Power Assistant Option
• Printer (Digital Graphic) Option
• Probe Holder Option
• Shear Wave Option
• EGG (Patient I/O) Option
• S-Video Option
• Volume Navigation Option
• Wireless LAN Option Option

5-13-3 External peripherals

(See: 3-5-3 "Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection" on page 3-36)
• Bin(s) Option
• USB Flash Drives
• Color Inkjet Printer
• USB Hard Disk Drives
• Footswitch
• Dicom Printers
• Rolling V Nav Stand
• Service Options
5 - 28 Section 5-13 - Options and Peripherals descriptions

Section 5-14
Product manuals
The information needed to use and service the LOGIQ E10 scanner is collected in the documents
described in this section.
NOTE: Dates on screenshots are represented in MM/DD/YYYY format throughout the manual.
Information on how to change the LOGIQ E10’s date can be found in Customizing Your System,
Chapter 10 in the LOGIQ E10 User Manual/User Guide.
5-14-1 User documentation

• LOGIQ E10 User Manual
• LOGIQ E10 Advanced Reference Manual
• LOGIQ E10 Release Notes
• LOGIQ E10 eLabeling Kit (contains LOGIQ E10 eDOCs USB Flash Drive, which contains all User
Manuals and translations, and the Basic Service Manual)
5-14-2 Basic Service documentation

• LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual
• LOGIQ E10 Unpacking/Packing Procedure

5 - 30 Section 5-14 - Product manuals

Chapter 6
Service Adjustments
Section 6-1
Overview
This section describes how to adjust the LOGIQ E10.
Contents in this chapter
6-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-2 Monitor adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-3 Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion Adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-4 Operator Panel movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-5 Adjust time-out for DICOM servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-6 Volume Navigation Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-1

Section 6-2
Monitor adjustments
This section describes how to adjust the Monitor for optimal performance.

6-2-2 Access to Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2-3 Monitor Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-2-4 Advanced Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-2 Section 6-2 - Monitor adjustments

6-2-2 Access to Adjustments

Brightness and Contrast adjustments can be done through touch panel encoders under the Utilities
screen.
All Monitor settings have been optimized at the factory, so normally, there should be no need for any
further adjustments.
Under special lighting conditions, you may want to adjust the Monitor screen’s backlight intensity.
Factory default settings are:
• Brightness 50%
• Contrast 40%
• Room Setting: Dark
For complete information, refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual
Chapter 3, or the appropriate LOGIQ E10 Release Notes. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page
1-26.

6-2-3 Monitor Adjustment Procedure

Table 6-1 Room Profile Table
Brightness/Contrast
Room Profile 22 inch OLED
Dark 50/40
Semi-Dark 50/65
Light 50/100
User Defined User-adjustable Brightness/Contrast

Brightness
Touch panel encoder labeled as Touch Panel Light, rotate for brightness.
Push the mode button once to display the popup and select Unlock or wait for the timeout.
Touch Panel can be adjusted 10% to 100%.
Chapter 3 or the appropriate LOGIQ E10 Release Notes. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page 1-
26.
Figure 6-1 Touch Panel Adjustment Button

6-2-4 Advanced Monitor Adjustments

Review Gamma Setting
Gamma settings can be adjusted in two ways, with or without DICOM Gray Scale Standard Display
Function (GSDF) enabled.GSDF-compliant with all contrast settings, but not all brightness settings.
Because of differences in display technology, the 22-inch OLED monitor is GSDF-compliant with all
contrast settings, but not compliant with all brightness settings.
To enable the GSDF mode, in the touch panel, go to Utilities > System > System Display tab and
select Enable DICOM grayscale display mode (GSDF).
Figure 6-2 Check to enable GSDF Mode
If a site’s PACS workstations are calibrated to the GSDF, this setting may help to make the image
appearance more uniform between the Ultrasound system and PACS.
• With GSDF disabled, the monitor still uses a gamma curve that may be selected on the Touch Panel
(for backwards compatibility with sites that are happy with their PACS or may have a mix of older
systems).
• With GSDF enabled on Widescreen Monitors, the gamma button on the touch panel affects the
image, emulating the appearance of that gamma, but does not affect the monitor.
Set Use Wide Screen for… > Single Image to Off.

Test patterns are available to aid in evaluating the display visually and quantitatively.
Table 6-2 Test Patterns
Test
Pattern Description Corresponding Graphic
Confirm that you can clearly see all of the
different gradations of the grayscale in
each gray cell.
Gray Bars
Confirm that you can clearly see all of the

different colors in each colored cell.
Color Bars
Confirm that this image is clear and crisp,

without jagged edges or lines.
Resolution
Before making any adjustments, record the

settings for contrast and brightness. In a
dimly lit room, adjust the monitor to
Brightness 50 & Contrast 40. Increase the
contrast until the left most block in the
Brightness second row from the bottom is just
visible.All the remaining blocks in the last 2
Contrast
rows of the image should now be
visible.Reset the contrast and brightness to
the recorded levels.

Test
Luminance for different grayscale levels. LN-1
Usually, the facility’s Biomed Engineer
tests each gray level map on the monitor
from LN-1 to LN-18 with a light meter and
then graphs these on a scale to ensure that
the curve falls within the GSDF’s standard.
This can be performed with all three
LOGIQ E9 monitors with GSDF enabled.
Generally, this is performed yearly.
LN1 to LN18
LN-18
Quality Control. Confirm that this image is

clear and crisp, without jagged edges or
lines.
QC

Test
Contrast. Confirm that you can detect the
circles within the square grayscale boxes.
CT
Used for
Luminance
response
For complete information, Refer to the appropriate version of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual,
Chapter 3. See: Section 1-5 "Label locations" on page 1-26.

Section 6-3
Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion Adjustment procedure

6-3-2 Cautions and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-3-3 Main Monitor Arm and Monitor Friction Adjustment - Ergotron Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

This section describes how to adjust the Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion for optimal
performance.
Table 6-3 LOGIQ E10 Monitor Arm
Ergotron Arm
Adjustments available
Monitor Range of motion and
Monitor Arm vertical adjustment.
6-3-2 Cautions and Warnings

Table 6-4 Be aware of pinch points at hinges when adjusting Monitor Arm and Monitor
6 - 10 Section 6-3 - Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion Adjustment procedure
6-3-3 Main Monitor Arm and Monitor Friction Adjustment - Ergotron Arm
Monitor Arm Vertical adjustment
If the Monitor rises or falls when it is released, perform a Vertical adjustment.
Table 6-5 Monitor Arm Vertical adjustment
1. Tilt the Monitor down to access the Monitor Arm Vertical Adjustment Screw
Vertical Adjustment Screw.
If the Monitor was rising, turn the

Adjustment Screw clockwise to
increase the friction, using a 4 mm
hex wrench.
If the Monitor was falling, turn the

Adjustment Screw
counterclockwise to decrease the
friction.
The Monitor should stay in the

position it is released at.
NOTE: The heavier the Monitor, the

more friction will be required.
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6 - 11

Monitor Arm Vertical adjustment - Ergotron Arm
If the Monitor is too loose or too tight when it is tilted, perform a Tilt adjustment.
Table 6-6 Monitor Tilt adjustment - Ergotron Arm
1. Tilt the Monitor down and remove

the Monitor Rear Cover.
If you have a thick wrench, it is
easier to reach the nuts by using the
boxed end of the wrench.
If the Monitor is too loose, turn the

Adjustment Nut (A) towards the
back and Nut (B) towards the front
to increase the friction, using a
13 mm wrench.
Turn the Nuts the opposite direction
to decrease the friction. The Monitor
should stay in the position it is
released at.
NOTE: Be sure to tighten or loosen
both sides equally. Start with 1/4
turn and test full 90 degree
movement before tightening or
loosening more.
Reinstall the Monitor Rear Cover.
6 - 12 Section 6-3 - Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion Adjustment procedure
Section 6-4
Operator Panel movement
The Operator Panel movement within the LOGIQ E10 is described in this section.

6-4-2 Adjusting the Z-Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-4-3 Adjusting the XY Locking Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-4-4 Using the Park Lock Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Adjustment Locations and Manual Releases
Table 6-7 Adjustment Locations and Manual Releases
Items / Corresponding Graphic

Z-Mech Adjustment (A)
XY Locking Mechanism Adjustment (B)
XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism and Adjustment (C)

6-4-2 Adjusting the Z-Mechanism

Table 6-8 Adjusting the Z-Mechanism

1. There are no adjustments for the OP Z-Mechanism Manual adjustment lever
vertical movement.
The Z-Mechanism can be manually
repositioned in the event the drive gear is
disconnected or has failed.
Push and hold the lever toward the center
of the device, and the OP can be adjusted
vertically.
WARNING
Operator console can drop unexpectedly when the mechanism is released.
WARNING If the Operator Control Panel gas spring is not functioning correctly, there is a chance
that the operator panel could drop down suddenly when you use the manual release
handle. To avoid injury, take care that you are not positioned below the operator panel
when using the manual release handle.
6 - 14 Section 6-4 - Operator Panel movement

6-4-3 Adjusting the XY Locking Mechanism

Table 6-9 Adjusting the XY Locking Mechanism

1. This procedure is intended to adjust the XY Adjustment for Operator Panel
locking mechanism for the XY Assembly.
Locate hex screw behind the XY Assembly

to adjust it correctly.
Use a 3 mm hex wrench to adjust. Rotating

the screw clockwise will tighten and
rotating the screw counterclockwise will
loosen the lock.
Too tight will reduce the slack and make it

harder to engage the lock. Make the
adjustments in 1/4 turn increments and test
the lock until the optimum adjustment is
achieved.
NOTE: When turning the hex screw, do not

exceed half turn increments.
Overtightening will prevent the console
from locking into place and too loose will
make the console loose. You may try 1/2
turn adjustments, but the console may be
too tight or have too much slack.

6-4-4 Using the Park Lock Properly

It is important to inform a customer of the following if they are experiencing problems with the XY park
lock function. Be sure to:
Table 6-10 Using the Park Lock Properly

1. Apply the Caster Brakes. The locking mechanism will not engage if the device can move when
trying to park the console.
Press the left pedal (1) to engage the

direction LOCK.
lock(s).
3. Front wheels.
System around a little to get the wheels to
Press the right pedal (2) to engage the

Parking brakes.
Front wheels (3).
2. CAUTION
To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving
the Top Console. This includes both objects and people.
Lock/Release button (4): unparking and

sideways displacement of the console.
Up/Down button (5): raising/lowering the
console.
To LOCK the Top Console:

Press and hold down the Lock/Release button (4), while pushing the Top Console in the locked
position.
Release the button.
To move the floating Top Console:

The unlocked Top Console can be easily moved by pressing and holding the Lock/Release
button (4) and moving the Top Console in any XY direction.
Release the button when the Top Console is at the desired direction.
DO NOT apply any weight on the console or lean on it. If the console is not in the normal resting
position, the lock will not engage when trying to park it.
6 - 16 Section 6-4 - Operator Panel movement

Section 6-5
Adjust time-out for DICOM servers
If you are experiencing problems with slow responses from DICOM servers, increase the time-out in the
DICOM server properties dialog. (Utility -> Connectivity -> Service -> Properties -> Maximum
Retries and Timeout.)
Problems with slow responses may result in images being re-sent automatically and low transfer rates.
The retry settings can be used to make jobs retry on bad networks.
When portable (off-line), use minimum time-out and no retries or it will affect shutdown speed.
Section 6-6
Volume Navigation Calibration Procedure
There is no calibration available in the field. If the registration seems to be out of calibration, reloading
the software will restore the factory settings. If still out of calibration, replace hardware.

6 - 18 Section 6-6 - Volume Navigation Calibration Procedure

Chapter 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Section 7-1
Overview
This chapter describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and
system operation. Basic host-, system-, and board-level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied.
Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.

7-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2 Gathering troubleshooting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3 Service desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-1

Section 7-2
Gathering troubleshooting data

7-2-2 Collecting vital system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2-3 Collecting a screen capture with logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-2-4 Capturing network logs to use for troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Problem images and system data (logs) can be acquired at the LOGIQ E10 or through service remote
connectivity. Use this data to perform service at the LOGIQ E10 or to send it back to the manufacturer
for analysis.
For more information, see:
• "Troubleshooting" on page 7-34
7-2 Section 7-2 - Gathering troubleshooting data

7-2-2 Collecting vital system information

The following information is necessary to properly analyze data or images being reported as a
malfunction or a LOGIQ E10 being returned to the manufacturer:
NOTE: This information is normally collected with Alt+D or Gather Logs.
Product Name = LOGIQ E10
Navigate to Utility > System > About.
Under Software, record:
- Software Version
- Software Revision
- Software Part Number
- Build Name
- Build View
- Build Date
Under System Image, record:
- Image Part Number

- Image Date

7-2-3 Collecting a screen capture with logs

If the LOGIQ E10 malfunctions, simultaneously press the Alt+D keys. Alt+D is available at all times and
collects a screen capture of the image monitor, user-defined presets, and these logs:
• Keyboard Shadow Log (protected information)

• Error Logs
• Crash Log (protected information)
• Vital Product Data
• DICOM Logs
• Windows Event Logs
• Windows Modem Log
• Diagnostic Logs
• Service Logs
For a detailed list of Service Logs captured,
see: 7-2-4 "Capturing network logs to use for troubleshooting" on page 7-8.
Figure 7-1 ALT+D Dialog Box

7-2-3 Collecting a screen capture with logs (cont’d)

When Alt+D is pressed, a dialog box opens. Enter the following information:
• System ID serial number

• Software version
• System date and time of occurrence
• Sequence of events leading to issue
• Whether the issue is repeatable
• Imaging mode, probe, preset/application
• Media brand, speed, capacity, and type
• To authorize the collection of protected information, check Include Protected Information,
requires Admin privileges. If this box is checked, the system creates two log files with the
following format name:
- log_<SN>_<DATE>_<TIME>_DB.zip
- log_<SN>_<DATE>_<TIME>_ProtectedInfo_DB.zip
Where <SN> is the serial number, <DATE> is the date in format YYMMDD and <TIME> is the time
in format HHMMSS.
• To include a duration, check Time Duration and select a duration from the dropdown.
• Under Destination, select a storage media or Service directory for remote viewing.
• Click the Store button.
NOTE: To save to a CD/DVD or USB Flash Drive, you MUST select CD/DVD Recordable or USB drive
as the destination device, otherwise the data is written to the default Export/Service directory
on the hard drive. The Export/Service directory is only used for remote service and is not
intended for images or report storage use.
For a CD/DVD, the LOGIQ E10 automatically formats an un formatted disk, gathers logs and writes it
out to the disk.
The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates
the possibility of artifacts from compression.


Double check the media that you made to ensure it contains the file. An example is
shown in Figure 7-2 "Example of Zipped Trouble Image and Logs File" on page 7-6.
Figure 7-2 Example of Zipped Trouble Image and Logs File
Figure 7-3 Contents of the Zipped Trouble Image and Logs File
Mark log files
If a customer is experiencing issues during operation, mark the issue by pressing Alt+1 or Alt+2 when
the event occurs. When Alt+1 or Alt+2 is pressed, a marker is placed in the log to aid analysis.


Trouble image without patient information
To collect a trouble image you need to enable Transfer Images (captured without patient information)
to GE under ADMIN > System Admin.
To collect the image, press the P1 key (copy to hard drive). This places an unidentified .jpeg image in
the D:\Log \DL folder. This folder will be transferred to the back office if a transfer is scheduled.
Figure 7-4 Example of a Trouble Image Collected with P1
To collect logs using Gather Logs, the image or images will be captured in the log collection Zip file and
will be deleted from the D:\Log \DL folder.
Figure 7-5 Example of a Trouble Image Collected with Gather Logs

7-2-4 Capturing network logs to use for troubleshooting

Use the Network Capture utility to capture network logs. Once the logs are captured and extracted from
the system, use Microsoft Message Analyzer to convert the output, and then Wireshark (or some other
network sniffer) to analyze it.
To troubleshoot network capture logs:
1.) On the LOGIQ E10, run the Network Capture utility to generate .etl and .cab files for analysis. For
more information, see "Network Capture" on page 7-29.
2.) Locate the .etl file at D:\Service.
3.) Transfer these files to a laptop.
4.) On the laptop, download Microsoft Message Analyzer (if not already done).
5.) In Microsoft Message Analyzer, open the .etl file.
If the DICOM connection is encrypted, you will not be able to see the contents of the packets.
Microsoft Message Analyzer does not have a plug-in to decode DICOM packets.

6.) To export the .etl file to .cab, select File > Save As and then select Save As or Export.
If the network capture was of a wireless connection, Microsoft Message Analyzer creates a .pcap
file that does not have any of the packets and is probably useless.
7.) Use Wireshark or some other third-party network sniffer to examine the .cab file.

Section 7-3
Service desktop

7-3-2 Disruptive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-3-3 Color statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-3-4 Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-3-5 Home. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-3-6 Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-3-7 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7-3-8 Agent Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

This section describes the features of the Service desktop. These are the different levels of access to
the Service desktop:
• Service Basic access (Class A) – a user locally logged into the machine with Local Service Access
privilege. This level provides limited access to Service desktop widgets and utilities.
• Service Expert, Pro, and Advanced access (Class C) Local – Depending on the purchase level,
includes an option string to control access.
• GE Service access (Class M) and an SSA key. For users with local Service Access privileges, this
level provides unrestricted access to all Service desktop widgets and utilities.
• Remote access – a user remotely accessing the LOGIQ E10. This level provides unrestricted
access to all Service desktop widgets and utilities. Disruptive mode is limited to the user access
privileges to Remote Service Access.
7 - 10 Section 7-3 - Service desktop

7-3-2 Disruptive mode

Disruptive mode is a way to control interruptions to operation of the LOGIQ E10. Disruptive mode is
required whenever service performs a function that may disrupt a normal scan. Activating Disruptive
mode results in a red message displayed on the task bar. This message indicates that the LOGIQ E10
needs to be restarted once the service activity is complete. The message remains until the LOGIQ E10
is restarted. This prevents patient scanning while the LOGIQ E10 is not operating at an optimal status.
For example, running a diagnostic may leave the LOGIQ E10 in a state that is not good for imaging.
Specifically, Disruptive mode is required to run diagnostics, clean presets, and reset the patient
database, and turn on Virtual Console Observation (VCO).
• When Disruptive mode is On, all service functionality on the Service desktop is allowed but user
operation of the LOGIQ E10 may be limited.
• When Disruptive mode is Off, some service functionality on the Service desktop is not available and
user operation of the LOGIQ E10 is normal.
Additionally, the ability to enable Disruptive mode depends on the logged in user.
• Local user – a user locally logged into the machine will be able to set the LOGIQ E10 to Disruptive
mode or allow a Disruptive mode request from a remote user through the Service desktop. The local
user must have Authorize Remote Service Access to allow Disruptive mode. If the local user does
not have this right, the remote user’s request will be automatically denied.
• Remote user – a user remotely accessing the LOGIQ E10 will not be able to automatically switch
Disruptive mode to On. The logged in user (user actually logged on to the LOGIQ E10) needs to
have the ability to grant remote access. The logged in user will be notified through a dialog box and
asked to allow Disruptive mode.
NOTE: Change Password and Disk Defragment are not available for the remote user whether
Disruptive mode is On or Off.
7-3-3 Color statuses

Throughout the Service desktop, colors indicate the following:
• Green – Status is normal

• Orange – Status is a warning
• Red – Status is an error
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 11
7-3-4 Licenses
With Service Basic Access (Class A), these are the available options:
• HOME
• Utilities
- Change Password
- Data Transfer
- Delete Files
- Gather Logs
- Network Capture
- SSA License
- Third Party Licenses
• Options
• Agent Configuration
With Service Advanced (Class C), these are the available options:
NOTE: With a Class C license, options display according to these purchased level of access.
• HOME
• Diags
• DICOM
• Utilities
- Change Password
- Checkpoints
- Data Transfer
- Delete Files
- Disk Defragment
- Disruptive Mode Utility
- Gather Logs
- Network Capture
- SSA License
- System Shutdown
- Virtual Console Observation
• Options
With Service Advanced plus Service Expert (Class C), the Clean Userdefs, Reset Patient Database,
and Software Reload utilities are added to the Service Advanced options listed.
With Service Advanced and Service Expert plus Service PRO (Class C), the probe assessment tool (e-
PAT) diagnostic is added to the Service Advanced and Service Expert options listed.

With GE Service access (Class M) and an SSA key, these are the available options:
• HOME
• Diags
• DICOM
• Utilities
- Change Password (not available through a remote connection)
- Checkpoints
- Clean Userdefs
- Data Transfer
- Delete Files
- Disk Defragment (not available through a remote connection)
- Disruptive Mode Utility
- Gather Logs
- Network Capture
- Reset Patient Database
- Software Reload
- SSA License
- SSH
- System Shutdown
- Virtual Console Observation
• Options
For more information, see Section 5-5 "Service Desktop" on page 5-10.
7-3-5 Home
Home configurations vary depending upon the purchased service level.
Figure 7-6 Home with Class C and Class M Access
Figure 7-7 Home with Class A Access
• "System Information" on page 7-15

• "Software Status" on page 7-17
• "Connected Probes" on page 7-18

System Information
System Information displays general information about the LOGIQ E10. When the LOGIQ E10 has
been successfully configured with the back office, these elements will have the corresponding values:
• Agent Registered will be Yes

• Agent Quarantine will be No
• Agent CRM Verified will be Yes
The information on System Information is available to all service class licenses.
To access System Information, navigate to Utility > Service > Home.
Figure 7-8 System Information
This table shows all the elements available on System Information with descriptions.
Table 7-1 System Information
Element DESCRIPTION
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) number. System identifier assigned to

CRM Number
the customer unit by the service region.
Registered status of the agent. Valid values are:

• Yes – The agent is registered in the back office.
Agent Registered
• No – The agent is not registered in the back office.
• Not Available – The agent is not running or has not been configured.
Quarantine status of the agent. Valid values are:

• Yes – The agent has more than one device registered with the same CRM Number
in the back office.
Agent Quarantine
• No – The agent has one device registered with the listed CRM Number in the back
office.
CRM verified status of the agent. Valid values are:

• Yes – The agent is verified in the back office.
Agent CRM Verified
• No – The agent is not verified in the back office.
Model Number GE part number for the LOGIQ E10. The same number as listed on the rating plate.
Serial Number Serial number of the LOGIQ E10. The same number as listed on the rating plate.
System Type Product name of the LOGIQ E10.
Facility Name of the hospital or facility where the LOGIQ E10 is installed.
• "Home" on page 7-14

Software Status
Use Software Status to view general information about the software installed on the LOGIQ E10.
The information on Software Status is available to all service class licenses.
To access Software Status, navigate to Utility > Service > Home.
Figure 7-9 Software Status
This table shows all the elements available on Software Status with descriptions.
Table 7-2 Software Status
Element DESCRIPTION
System Date Current date in the format <day>, <month> <date> <year>.
Local time based on the last time the system desktop was refreshed in the format
System Time
<hh:mm:ss>.
Date the application software was installed. The application software includes the
Application Installation Date
LOGIQ E10 product-specific software.
Date the base image software was installed. The base image software includes the
Base Image Installation Date
Windows operating system and other supporting software.
Base Image Version Version number of the base image software.
Application Software Version Version number of the application software.
Status of the application. Valid values are:

Application Status • Running
• Stopped
Connected Probes
Connected Probes shows probes connected to the LOGIQ E10. The order on the user interface is top
down matching the left-to-right order on the LOGIQ E10.
The information on Connected Probes is available to all service class licenses.
To access Connected Probes, navigate to Utility > Service > Home.
Figure 7-10 Connected Probes
This table shows all the elements available on Connected Probes with descriptions.
Table 7-3 Connected Probes
Element DESCRIPTION
When available, temperature of the active probe.

Active Probe Temperature
Not all probes report temperature. The most common probe to report temperature is
(Celsius)
the TEE probe.
Probe Name Name of the probe connected to the LOGIQ E10.
Probe ID Identifier of the probe connected to the LOGIQ E10.
Serial number of the probe connected to the LOGIQ E10. If the serial number of the
Serial Number
probe is not available, then N/A displays.
Statuses of the probe connected to the LOGIQ E10. Valid values are:
Status • Active
• Non Active

7-3-6 Utilities
Utilities configurations vary depending upon the service class.
• "Change Password" on page 7-22

• "Data Transfer" on page 7-27
• "Delete Files" on page 7-21
• "Gather Logs" on page 7-20
• "Network Capture" on page 7-29
• "SSA License" on page 7-25
• "Third Party Software Licenses" on page 7-24
Gather Logs
Gather Logs provides a way to collect system logs and place the log files in the D:\Service directory for
retrieval by the online center. These log files do not include protected data such as crash dumps and
keyboard shadow logs. The customer can collect logs (including protected data) using Alt+D when
Protected Data is checked. Log files are compressed into a .zip file and the file path and name display.
If the application software is not running, use the Gather Logs shortcut on the Windows desktop.
The information on Gather Logs is available to all service class licenses.
To access Gather Logs, select Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > Gather Logs.
Figure 7-11 Gather Logs
This table shows all the elements available on Gather Logs with descriptions.
Table 7-4 Gather Logs
Element DESCRIPTION
1 Day Logs When selected, gathers log files for one day.
1 Week Logs When selected, gathers log files for one week.
All Logs When selected, gathers all available log files.
Gather Logs Select to gather the log files for the selected time period.
To gather log files:
1.) Navigate to Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > Gather Logs.
2.) Select one of the following:
- 1 Day Logs
- 1 Week Logs
- All Logs
3.) Click Gather Logs. In the resulting dialog box, record the location of the log files and click OK.
4.) When the gather log operation is complete, click the notification icon in the banner to view the
location of the log files.
• "Utilities" on page 7-19

Delete Files
Delete Files displays all the files and folders present in the D:\Service folder and allows for their
deletion. Deleting unneeded files improves performance and reduces the need to defragment the disk
drive.
The information on Delete Files is available to all service class licenses.
To access Delete Files, select Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > Delete Files.
Figure 7-12 Delete Files
This table shows all the elements available on Delete Files with descriptions.
Table 7-5 Delete Files
Element DESCRIPTION
Delete Files Displays the files that are available for deletion.
Delete Deletes the selected files.
To delete files:
1.) Navigate to select Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > Delete Files.
2.) Under Delete Files, select the available folders and files that you want to delete.
3.) Click Delete.
4.) In the resulting dialog box, click Delete and then click OK.
Change Password
Change Password allows you to change the password for a specified user type.
CAUTION RISK OF LOSING DATA.

IF THE PASSWORD IS LOST, GE WILL NOT BE ABLE TO RECOVER OR RESET IT.
LOSS OF A PASSWORD MAY RESULT IN THE LOSS OF PATIENT DATA.
The information on Change Password is available to all service class licenses. Change Password is
not available through a remote connection.
To access Change Password, select Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > Change
Password.
Figure 7-13 Change Password
This table shows all the elements available on Change Password with descriptions.
Table 7-6 Change Password
Element DESCRIPTION
User Type Type of user for the password reset.
New Password Password
Confirm Password Password
Update Password Select to update the password.
Reset Select to reset the information.

To change the password:
1.) Navigate to Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > Change Password.
2.) Under User Type, select the user.
NOTE: Before changing the GEService password (the default is SvcForward123$), make sure the
LOGIQ E10 is connected to the network and the agent is configured. The GEService password
is used to perform portions of remote service. If the password is changed and the system
information is not updated, it may slow down remote service. Both file transfer and SSH depend
on the GEService password.
3.) In New Password and Confirm Password, enter the new password.
CAUTION RISK OF LOSING DATA.

GE WILL NOT BE ABLE TO RECOVER OR RESET CHANGED PASSWORDS.
SECURELY RECORD THE NEW PASSWORD.
4.) Click Update Password.
5.) When a SVCService user password has been changed, reboot the LOGIQ E10 to reflect the
password change.
Third Party Software Licenses
Third Party Software Licenses displays the third-party software licenses used as part of the service
platform.
The information on Third Party Software Licenses is available to all service class licenses.
To access Third Party Software Licenses, select Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > Third
Party Software Licenses.
Figure 7-14 Third Party Software Licenses

SSA License
SSA License provides a way to do the following:
• When inserted, view the details of an SSA key.

• View the status of the service class options.
• Restore an SSA license when the SSA key is not validating or when a remote log in shows as a
Class A user.
The information on SSA License is available to all service class licenses.
To access SSA License, select Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > SSA License.
Figure 7-15 SSA License
This table shows all the elements available on SSA License with descriptions.
Table 7-7 SSA License
Element DESCRIPTION
Class M Key Details
Status of the SSA key. Valid values are:

Class M Key Status • Not Plugged In
• Plugged In
Drive Letter Drive where the SSA key is plugged into the LOGIQ E10.
Expire Date Date the SSA key is set to expire.
SSO ID Identifier for the user assigned to the SSA key.
Key Counter Value Number of times the SSA key has been used.
Max Key Counter Value Number of remaining times the SSA key can be used.
Service Option Keys
Name Name of the service class option.
Status of the access to the associated service class option. Valid values are:
Status • True
• False
Restore SSA Restores the SSA license to the SSA key.
To view the Class M license information:
1.) Insert the SSA key.

2.) Navigate to Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > SSA License.
3.) Under Class M key Details, view the values. For example, the SSO ID for the user assigned to the
SSA key.
If Not Available displays for all of these values, the SSA key is not validating.
To restore an SSA key that is not validating:
1.) Remove the SSA key from the LOGIQ E10.

2.) If open, close the Service desktop.
3.) Restart the LOGIQ E10.
4.) Once the LOGIQ E10 has restarted, plug in the SSA key.
5.) Navigate to Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > SSA License.
6.) Click Restore SSA.
7.) Check to see if the SSA key validates.

Data Transfer
Data Transfer provides a way to do the following:
• View information about past transfers of (APM) information.

• Set up automatic/scheduled transfer of allowed data files from the LOGIQ E10 to the server.
• Manually transfer data files allowed data files from the LOGIQ E10 to the server.
The information on Data Transfer is available to all service class licenses.
To access Data Transfer, select Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > Data Transfer.
Figure 7-16 Data Transfer
This table shows all the elements available on Data Transfer with descriptions.
Table 7-8 Data Transfer
Element DESCRIPTION
Type of log file. For example, Incremental Logs or Full Logs. Monitoring Logs,
System Logs, and Windows Logs are incrementally transferred when automatic
Type of Upload
transfer is enabled. To enable automatic transfer, navigate to System Admin and,
under Service, check Enable Automatic Request for Service.
Upload Permission Whether the permission to upload the log file is allowed or not.
Last Upload Status Whether the last log file upload was successful or not.
Last Upload Attempt Date and time the last log file upload was attempted.
Last Successful Upload Date and time the last log file was successfully uploaded.
When selected, enables the related day selections. For example, All Days,
Scheduler
Monday, and Tuesday.
Save Settings Saves the information.
Send All Manually send the selected log files to the server.
To configure automatic data transfers:
1.) Navigate to ADMIN > System Admin.
2.) On System Admin, configure these settings:

- Transfer Machine Logs to GE – Default is checked
- Transfer Operator Information to GE
- Transfer Images (captured without patient information) to GE – Default is checked.
3.) Click Save.
4.) Navigate to Utility (second page) > Service > Utilities > Data Transfer.
5.) On Data Transfer, select Scheduler, and then select the days to perform the data transfer.
6.) Click Save Settings.
7.) To manually perform a data transfer, click Send All.
For more information:

Network Capture
Network Capture displays network traffic between the LOGIQ E10 and configured devices. A network
capture outputs two log files: one for main logging with no protected information and another including
protected information. These log files are useful when debugging connectivity issues. Because these
log files can be large, they are only kept for one week.
The information on Network Capture is available to all service class licenses.
To access Network Capture, select Utility > Service > Utilities > Network Capture.
Figure 7-17 Network Capture
This table shows all the elements available on Network Capture with descriptions.
Table 7-9 Network Capture
Element DESCRIPTION
Network Capture Parameters
Allowed size of the generated log file. Valid value are:

• 256MB
Maximum Size
• 512MB
• 1024MB
DICOM-configured devices for which you want to capture information. If no

Devices
additional devices are configured, only All will be available.
Select to start the process. This causes the network capture to start, enables the
Start Network Capture Stop button, and updates the Network Capture Status pane and changes the
Status to Running.
Stop Network Capture Select to stop the process.
Network Capture Status
Displays information about the status of the network capture. The language setting
for this information is set in Windows and not through the Service desktop or LOGIQ
E10 application software.
Displays the current status of the network capture. Valid values are:
• Not Running
• Running
To perform a network capture:
1.) Navigate to Utility > Service > Utilities > Network Capture.
2.) From Network Capture, do the following:

- Under Maximum Size, select the allowed size of the generated log file.
- Under Devices, select the DICOM-configured device for which you want to capture
information. If no additional devices are configured, only All will be available.
3.) Select Start Network Capture to start the process. This causes the network capture to start,
enables the Stop button, and updates the Network Capture Status pane and changes the Status
to Running.
4.) Click the Stop button to end data collection. Stopping is a two-step process:
- Stops the data collection and immediately closes the .etl file.
- Collects additional diagnostic data that may help diagnose network issues. When the file is
closed, you see “There is no trace session currently in progress”. When the remaining data is
collected and the .cab file is closed, you are notified in the banner.

7-3-7 Options
Use Options to:
• View software options.

• View software option details.
• Add (or delete) a valid option key, add a duplicate option key, not add an invalid option key, and ask
for confirmation before deleting an option key.
• View software option key details. Key details are a list of options that are enabled by a particular
key. Under Available Keys, highlight the option string, select Details and then view the options on
the left side of the screen. Press Show All to view all of the activated options.
The information on Options is available to all service class licenses.
To access Options, navigate to Utility > Service > Options.
Figure 7-18 Options
This table shows all the elements available on Options with descriptions.
Table 7-10 Options
Element DESCRIPTION
Software Options
Option Software options on the LOGIQ E10.
Status Status of the options on the LOGIQ E10.
Software Option Details
Product Name of the product.
Number for the hardware. The hardware number is the hash of the serial number
Hardware Number
that is used to generate the option key.
Serial Number Serial number of the LOGIQ E10.
Software Option Keys
Available Keys List of the option keys installed on the LOGIQ E10.
7-3-8 Agent Configuration

Use Agent Configuration to:
• Edit and configure the following:

- Enterprise host name in the agent
- Enterprise port number in the agent
- Proxy server in the agent
- Proxy port in the agent
- CRM number in the agent
- Display name in the agent
• Set the serial number in the agent
• Enter the username and password for the proxy
• Reset the edited unsaved value
• Update contact details
The information on Agent Configuration is available to all service class licenses.
To access Agent Configuration, navigate to Utility > Service > Agent Configuration.
Figure 7-19 Agent Configuration
This table shows all the elements available on Agent Configuration with descriptions.
Table 7-11 Agent Configuration
Element DESCRIPTION
Agent Configuration
Phone number for the person at the customer site a GE remote service engineer
Contact Details would contact. The phone number is entered during installation and reviewed at
every service call to make sure the information is correct.
Status for the agent. Valid values are:

Agent Status • Running
• Not Running

Table 7-11 Agent Configuration
Element DESCRIPTION
Registered status of the agent. Valid values are:

• Yes – The agent is registered in the back office.
Agent Registered
• No – The agent is not registered in the back office.
• Not Available – The agent is not configured or running.
Quarantine status of the agent. Valid values are:

• Yes – The agent has more than one device registered with the same CRM Number
in the back office. This scanner cannot send data back to GE or be remotely
Agent Quarantine accessed.
• No – The agent has one device registered with the listed CRM Number in the back
office.
CRM verified status of the agent. Valid values are:

• Yes – The agent is verified in the back office.
Agent CRM Verified
• No – The agent is not verified in the back office.
Agent Model Number GE part number for the LOGIQ E10. The same number as listed on the rating plate.
Serial number of the agent (read-only). If the agent is not registered with a serial
Serial Number number, this field is populated with the serial number of the LOGIQ E10. The serial
number of the agent is tied to the serial number of the LOGIQ E10.
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) number. System identifier assigned to

CRM No the customer unit by the service region. CRM is pre-populated by adding LE10 to the
CRM number. The CRM number of the LOGIQ E10 is editable.
Display Name Displayed name of the agent.
Advanced Configuration
Enterprise Server Name of the enterprise server.
Enterprise Host Number of the enterprise host.
Enterprise Port Number of the enterprise port.
Proxy Configuration
Enable Proxy Enables the proxy server.
Proxy Server When Enable Proxy is selected, name of the proxy server IP.
Proxy Port When Enable Proxy is selected, number of the proxy server port.
Credentials
Enable Proxy Credentials Enables the proxy credentials.
Username When Enable Proxy Credentials is selected, name of the user.
Password When Enable Proxy Credentials is selected, password for the user.
Section 7-4
Troubleshooting
7-4-1 EMI prevention/abatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

7-4-2 Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
7-4-3 Shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-4-4 Test of printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7 - 34 Section 7-4 - Troubleshooting

7-4-1 EMI prevention/abatement

For EMI rules and details, see 2-2-3 "EMI limitations" on page 2-6.
Different power outlet
Connect the LOGIQ E10 to another power outlet and check to see if the noise changes or disappears.
NOTE: Image artifacts can occur if, at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming
power source to the LOGIQ E10 is only a conduit. See: 2-3-4 "Minimal floor plan suggestions" on page
2-11.
Different system
Try another LOGIQ E10 at the same location and look for the same noise. If the noise is present on the
new system too, the noise is most likely from an external source/equipment.
Different location
Move the LOGIQ E10 to another location and check to see if the noise changes or disappears. This may
help to locate an external noise source.
Try to move the LOGIQ E10 to:
• another location inside the room

• another room
• another floor
Disconnect external cables
Disconnect all external cables (network, all unused probes, ECG leads, etc.) and check to see if the
noise disappears.
7-4-2 Noise
Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. They also generate EMI. Possible EMI sources
should be identified before the unit is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. Some of
these sources include:
• medical lasers
• scanners
• cauterizing guns
• computers
• monitors
• fans
• gel warmers
• microwave ovens
• light dimmers
• portable phones
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.
When talking to the customer, try to gather as much information as possible about the conditions when
the noise appears.
Table 7-12 Noise Conditions
The noise is present Determine If the test fails...

See "Noise picked up from the air" on page 7-37 and "Noise
All the time n/a
received through the external cables" on page 7-37.
The amount of time

between initial use of
After some time of use See "Noise picked up from the air" on page 7-37.
the and when the noise
begins.
The time of day or night See "Noise picked up from the air" on page 7-37 and "Noise
CertaIn times of the day or night
along with the duration. received through the external cables" on page 7-37.
At all locations in the hospital n/a See "Noise picked up from the air" on page 7-37.
See "Noise picked up from the air" on page 7-37 and "Noise
Only in one room or area The room or area
received through the external cables" on page 7-37.
From time to time with no special See "Noise picked up from the air" on page 7-37 and "Noise
n/a
pattern of time is observed received through the external cables" on page 7-37.

Noise picked up from the air
Table 7-13 Noise Conditions
Symptom Cause Solution

Noise is coherent -“penlight noise”
pointing down in the picture due to the
Electromagnetic The noise is picked up by a probe cable.
fact that the noise is received on all
Interference (EMI) from
channels.
radio frequencies,
Noise is a problem on a single probe. magnetic fields, and Test with another probe.
transients in the air.
Noise is a problem on a single probe Move the LOGIQ E10 to another location to see if the noise
port. persists.
Noise received through the external cables
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the wiring.
The noise can enter the system through the mains power cable, probe cable(s) or any other external
connected cable(s).
Disconnect cables that are not needed for the basic use of the LOGIQ E10:
• Network cable
• Cables to any external peripherals
• ECG cables and other cables connected to the Patient I/O
Verify whether the noise changed or disappeared when the cables were removed.
Often, this type of noise is due to grounding problems in the mains power system or when the LOGIQ
E10 is sharing a power line with other equipment.
Doppler noise
Doppler noise symptoms can be horizontal stripes or spikes.
Table 7-14 Noise Conditions for Doppler
Symptom Cause Solution
Typically an analog Determine if one of these boards is the cause:

Horizontal stripes problem caused by the • Transmitter board (ETX)
ETX or CRX2 • Receiver board (CRX2)
Typically a digital Determine if one of these boards is the cause:

problem caused by
Spikes • CRX2
either the CRX2 or
front end interface • Front End Interface board
Intermittent noise
Intermittent noise can be caused by other equipment.
Table 7-15 Noise Conditions for Intermittent
Symptom Solution
Intermittent noise Check equipment that is turned on and off near the scanner.
Intermittent noise present around the clock Check the clock.
Check equipment that is turned on and off near the scanner at

Intermittent noise present at certain times
certain times.
Noise on a board
Table 7-16 Noise on a board
Symptom Solution
Isolate the board to see if you can determine the specific board
where the noise originates.
There is noise on a board
For example, unplug the receive area of the board and see if
the noise persists.

7-4-3 Shortcut keys

There are several shortcut keys on the LOGIQ E10 that can be useful during troubleshooting:
Table 7-17 Shortcut Keys
Key Description
Alt+1 or Alt+2 Marks events in the log file. Used for the flagging issues during operation.
Displays SW Shut Down. If the LOGIQ E10 can be shut-down by using
Alt+F10 these keys, it means that SW is working and the problem could be the
ON/OFF switch or the wire that carries the shut-down signal.
For the echo simulator (keyboard simulation), brings up or removes the
Alt+F5 or F11 front panel simulator. It may be used with VCO to press buttons on the
front panel that are not standard keys on your PC.
Alt+A Displays a cursor (Alt+A stands for arrow).
Alt+D Captures scanner logs.
With the SSA key connected, displays the Debug command window to
Alt+Ctrl+D
run Sclogs.
With the SSA key connected, switches between screens. Access
Alt+Tab
Windows and relaunch the application to use this functionality.
7-4-4 Test of printers

Print Test Page tests that the printer is correctly installed and hooked up at the Windows level.
1.) Open the Printers folder, either from Start > Settings > Printers or Utilities > System > Printers.
2.) Right click on a printer and select Preferences.
3.) Select Print Test Page (this sends a print to the printer bypassing all of the scanner software).
4.) Observe the page. If the page prints out, the problem is probably a Windows configuration issue or
a configuration issue with Connectivity. If the page does not print out, there probably is a cabling
issue or a printer configuration issue in Windows.
NOTE: For the Sony small format printers you will see the test page clipped. This is normal.

Chapter 8
Replacement Procedures
Section 8-1
Overview
This chapter describes how to remove and install, or replace, modules and subsystems in the
LOGIQ E10. It also includes instructions for installing and re-installing the software.

8-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8-2 Warnings and important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-3 Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-4 Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-5 Cable Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8-6 Replacing Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8-7 Replacing Top Console Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
8-8 Replacing XYZ Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-185
8-9 Main Console parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-217
8-10 Casters and Brakes replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-228
8-11 Front End Acquisition / Card Cage parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-253
8-12 MPS (Main Power Supply) replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-368
8-13 Peripherals replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-373
8-14 Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-385
8-15 V Nav Roll Stand Assembling or Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-394
8-16 Options replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-406
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-1

Section 8-2
Warnings and important information
This section includes important information. Read it before doing any of the procedures in this chapter.

8-2-2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2-3 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-2-4 Manpower - When two persons are needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-2-5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-2-6 PPE Required During Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-2 Section 8-2 - Warnings and important information

8-2-2 Warnings
Table 8-1 Preparations and Preparation Links
Preparations - you must perform the following steps

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10 TO VERIFY ISOLATION.
TAG
&
J11 and red) FROM THE BACKPLANE. See: 8-2-2 "Warnings" on page 8-3 and 8-11-15 "Rear I/O
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11
J10
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
J10 J11
Signed Date
J11
J14
J13

8-2-2 Warnings (cont’d)

WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD,
PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS, WE HAVE LIMITED THE LIFTING
WEIGHT FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELD TO 16 KG (35 LBS). ANYTHING OVER 16 KG
(35 LBS) REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE.
WARNING AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE NEEDED WHEN REPLACING CASTERS (WHEELS) OR
ADJUSTING BRAKES.
NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS.
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF. THE ESD WRIST STRAP SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO
ONE OF THE TWO RECEPTACLES INTEGRATED ON THE FRAME, SPECIFICALLY FOR
THAT PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.
Table 8-2 ESD Receptacles
ESD Receptacles
Battery Box side Card Cage side
WARNING THE WASTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT MUST NOT BE

DISPOSED AS UNSORTED MUNICIPAL WASTE AND MUST BE COLLECTED
SEPARATELY.
CONTACT THE MANUFACTURER OR OTHER AUTHORIZED DISPOSAL COMPANY TO
DECOMMISSION YOUR EQUIPMENT.

8-2-3 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GE employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have
been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment
with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound
Probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as
the people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
8-2-4 Manpower - When two persons are needed

These replacement procedures require two persons:
• Casters Replacement
• Z-Mechanism replacement
The rest of the replacement procedures can be carried out by one person.

8-2-5 Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10

The following tools are needed to service the LOGIQ E10. If the torque is not indicated with the
procedure, hand tighten the screws/nuts.
Table 8-3 Tools used for servicing LOGIQ E10

TOOL TYPE TOOL SIZE
BIT # TX-2.8
BIT # TX-10
BIT # TX-15
TORX BIT # TX-20
BIT # TX-25
BIT # TX-30*
BIT # TX-45*
FLAT BLADE
1/4 inch or 6 mm
SCREWDRIVER
PH1
PHILLIPS SCREWDRIVER PH2 and PH2 “Stubby"
PH3
NUT DRIVER 7 mm, 10 inches long
3 mm
4 mm
5 mm
HEX WRENCH
6 mm
8 mm
10 mm
5 mm
10 mm
OPEN END WRENCH
13 mm
TORQUE WRE
3/16 inch
Up to 81 Nm (59.7 lbf-ft)**
ADJUSTABLE WRENCH 152 mm (6 inches) long
PRY BAR approximately 18 inches overall (457 mm)
* 90 degree “L“ is suggested. A full set of 90 degree “L“ Torx wrenches are recommended.
** Heavy mechanical parts may need a specific torque. Each procedure will indicate the torque needed.
8-2-6 PPE Required During Service

The following PPE are required during service tasks, per EHS Policy:
PPE Required During Service

• Safety Glasses
• Safety Shoes
• Cut Resistant Gloves
• Kneel pad (if kneeling is required)
• An ESD - mat and wrist strap

Section 8-3
Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front
Figure 8-1 illustrates what is the Left Side (A), Rear / Back (B), Right Side (C), and Front (D) of the
LOGIQ E10.
Figure 8-1 Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front

Section 8-4
Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software
This section describes how to install and/or re-install software on LOGIQ E10.

8-4-2 LOGIQ E10 Model Software Configuration and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-4-3 Software provided with the LOGIQ E10: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-4-4 Space management - moving all images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-4-5 Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-4-6 Loading the Base Image and Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-4-7 Loading the Application Software Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8-8 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

8-4-2 LOGIQ E10 Model Software Configuration and Hardware

Table 8-4 LOGIQ E10 Software Configuration and
Hardware
MODEL SOFTWARE
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER VERSION
LOGIQ E10,
5935000E10 R1.x.x
100-240 VAC
8-4-3 Software provided with the LOGIQ E10:

• Software Thumb Drive with LOGIQ E10 Base Load Image and Application Software.
If a patch software Thumb Drive has been included:
• Thumb Drive with a Patch for LOGIQ E10.

Verify that the software is current. Updated software may be available. Check for any available
FMIs.

8-4-4 Space management - moving all images

NOTICE In order to complete a successful restore of the Patient Database, if needed, the images must be
moved away from LOGIQ E10 before doing backup of the Patient Database. Depending on the location
set-up, either move the images to a remote server or to removable media like DVD or CD discs.
As the images are moved, the database will point to the new location.
If the backup procedure is not completed correctly, the images and database information could be lost.
Refer to the latest revision of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual, Chapter 9 Recording Images.
Speak with the personnel at the site to determine which patient images need to be backed up prior to
starting.
CAUTION Before loading Software, CONFIRM WITH THE CUSTOMER OR SITE ADMINISTRATOR, if the
patient archive has been encrypted and if the customer has the password or the Key to unlock the data.
Failure to obtain those items, will cause permanent DATA LOSS!
8 - 10 Section 8-4 - Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software

8-4-5 Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations

For information, refer to the latest revision of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual, Chapter 9.
NOTICE An error, or a power loss may occur during the software loading.
Always backup the Patient Images, Patient Archive and the System Configurations before starting a
software loading!
In order to complete a successful restore of the Patient Database, if needed, the images must be
moved away from the LOGIQ E10 before doing backup of Patient Database. Depending on the location
set-up, either move the images to a remote server or to removable media like DVD or CD discs.
If the backup procedure is not completed correctly, the images and database information could be lost.
8-4-6 Loading the Base Image and Application Software

Loading Base Image Software
NOTE: LOTO is not required during this procedure.
Follow this procedure to load the Base Image Software:
NOTE: A Service Key is not required to run this procedure.
Table 8-5 Manpower / Time and Tools
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Software Thumb Drive.
2 Hours
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8 - 11

Overview
The Hard Disk Drive on LOGIQ E10 is divided into five partitions.
NOTE: The Hard Disk Drive on LOGIQ E10 has three visible partitions (two partitions are hidden).
Table 8-6 Use of the Partitions
DRIVE LETTER LABEL
C: SYSTEM
D: USER
E: ARCHIVE
When installing (and re-installing) software, you get the choice to either replace all the contents on the
Hard Disk Drive, or only install the software on the C: partition. If you chose to replace all the contents
on the Hard Disk Drive, all stored data, including all set-up data will be lost. It is considered to be the
best practice to always move images away from the Hard Disk Drive, do backup of databases etc. and
record important configuration data on paper before starting a software load or reload, as described
earlier in this section.
The software is delivered on one Thumb Drive with the Base Load Image and LOGIQ E10 Application
Software. In some cases, a second Thumb Drive with a software patch, may also be included. A
software patch is used when a few new files should be installed or changed, but the changes do not
require a complete software load.
When installing the software, start with the system software, then the application software and if
included, install the patch software at the end. This is described in detail over the next pages.
NOTE: System Software may also be referred to as the Base Image or Ghost.
WARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA,

YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS AND
CUSTOMER PRESETS TO CD, DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE
UPGRADE
Before the System Software Load, you must perform the following steps:
• contact the customer to allow enough lead time to back up the system.
• be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams.
• review troubleshooting section to collect information for future analysis if you are troubleshooting
loss of image or patient data.
• disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.
• be sure all USB devices (printers only) are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash Drives).
If a printer is plugged in at this time, it is automatically installed.
• save all Service Presets to restore remote connectivity after software installation is completed.
• save all User Presets.
NOTE: After a full or partial system software load, confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving
Time feature is turned off (Utility -> System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab ->
Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox). Be sure the system and DVR date, time and time zone
are set correctly.
NOTE: System and Application software disables the Run window normally accessed from Start ->
Run, and the mouse right-click (left set key) feature.

Loading Software All Partitions
Table 8-7 Loading Software all Partitions

1. With the system off, insert the Base Image
and Application Software Installation
Thumb Drive into the USB port on the back
of the LOGIQ E10.
Turn ON the system.
2. Press any key to confirm you want to load

the software.
3. Type FULL. To load all Partitions

Press the Enter key.
4. Let the Load process. It will take several

minutes. DO NOT disturb the process.

Table 8-7 Loading Software all Partitions

5. Once the Base Software Load is complete,
the system will display the following
message.
Please press any key to shutdown.
Remove media prior to system restart.
6. You will see several screens as the

Application Software is being loaded; let it
run.
At this point, the load time will be
approximately 20 minutes.
7. Once the Application Software installation

is complete the LOGIQ E10 will restart
twice.
When the LOGIQ E10 restarts, it will be
active and ready for testing and set-up.

Verifying the Software Versions
1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> System -> About.
2.) If upgrading the Software, verify software version matches the version in the software used during
installation, version received with Kit.
Verifying the Software Option Key Settings
NOTE: Software Option Keys are software version dependent. If a new software version has been
installed, please follow installation instructions for that software. Usually, with new software
Option Strings are needed. When re-installing the same software, the Software Option Strings
should be reused.
1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Admin -> System Admin.
2.) Verify that the options previously installed in the system are still activated after the software
installation.
3.) If any option is missing, request new Option Strings from the On Line Support. Enter any new or
missing option key string(s) in S/W Option Key field and select Add, or by importing it from USB or
DVD drive.
Verifying the TCP/IP settings
1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCP/IP.
2.) Verify TCP/IP settings.
3.) Select “Save settings.”
4.) Select OK to continue.
5.) Reboot system.
Verifying the AE Title and Port settings
1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> Connectivity -> Device.
2.) Verify Device settings.
Restoring Patient Archive
Restore the Patient Archive or Report archive using the Utility -> System -> Backup/Restore Function
or import the Patient Data if previously exported. If the patient archive is encrypted, you will need the
Encryption Key or password to unlock.

Restoring System Configurations
1.) From the Touch Panel, select Utility -> System -> Backup/Restore.
2.) On the Restore screen, select System configuration to restore System settings/User Defined
Configuration.
3.) Select the appropriate Source Device.
CAUTION The Restore procedure will OVERWRITE the existing data on the local harddrive. Make sure to select
the correct source device.
4.) If restore is done from a backup on a removable media, insert the media in the drive.
5.) Select Restore Now.
Depending on the selection, one or two Restore confirmation windows are displayed.
6.) Ensure that the correct source is selected, and select OK.
The selected items are copied to the LOGIQ E10. If items from the System Configuration are
restored, the LOGIQ E10 needs to be rebooted. The Reboot system window is displayed.
7.) Select OK to reboot the system, and verify the Customer Presets are working properly.
8.) Import scan assistant programs previously exported.

Functional Checks
Perform the following functional checks to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.
Table 8-8 Loading Software all Partitions Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all
4-2-7 System CFM and PWD Checks required checks and is ready for use.

Loading C Partition Only Software
Table 8-9 Loading C Partition Only Software

1. With the system off, insert the Base Image
and Application Software Installation
Thumb Drive into the USB port on the back
of the LOGIQ E10.
Turn ON the system.
2. Press any key to confirm you want to load

the software.
3. Type C_Only. To load C Partition

Press the Enter key.
4. Let the Load process continue. It will take

several minutes. DO NOT disturb the
process.

Table 8-9 Loading C Partition Only Software

5. Once the C Partition Software Load is
complete, the system will display the
following message.
Please press any key to shutdown.
Remove media prior to system restart.

run.

twice.
active and ready for testing and set-up.

2.) Verify software version matches the version in the software used during installation, version
received with Kit.
5.) Reboot system.
Check Patient Archive
Confirm that the Patient Archive is available. If the patient archive is encrypted, you will need the
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-10 Loading C Partition Only Software Functional Checks
See:

8-4-7 Loading the Application Software Only

Use this procedure to update application software only.
NOTE: A Service Key is not required to run this procedure.
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
Software Thumb Drive.
1 Hour

Loading Application Only Software
Table 8-12 Loading Application Only Software

1. Turn on the system and wait until Windows
has booted and is loading. Watch carefully
for the screen swirling circles, as shown.
2. Promptly insert the Image and Application

Software Installation Thumb Drive into the
USB port on the back of the LOGIQ E10.
This action will trigger the Application only
installation. If you wait too long, the
Application will start without detecting the
Thumb Drive and you will have start the
process again.
3. At the Start Application dialog, select

“Install SW...” .

Table 8-12 Loading Application Only Software

4. At the StartLoader dialog, select “OK.”
5. Select “OK” to continue with the Application

Software Load process.
6. Let the Load process continue. It will take

several minutes. DO NOT disturb the
process.

is complete this screen will display, remove
the Thumb Drive before the system re-
starts.
The system will boot up.

received with Kit.
5.) Reboot system.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-13 Loading Application Software Functional Checks
See:

Loading from Internal Partition Software
A Service Key is not required to run this procedure, if run remotely.
Manpower /
Tools
Time
One person /
No tools required.
1 Hour
Use this procedure to reload Base Load and Application Software from the repository partition in the
harddrive.
Table 8-15 Loading from Internal Partition Software

1. Log into Service Desktop (if FE is reloading locally, SSA key is required. IF Reload is triggered
remotely by the OLC, no SSA key is required)
Enter Utility tab and select Disruptive mode to enable it
Under Utility tab select software reload
2. Before proceeding you need to check for
encryption. System asks to confirm if
encryption key is available, if confirm select
second bullet.
If Agree, check box and hit continue reload
3. System message will appear on the screen

stating that Reload is configured and
system will automatically restart in 10
seconds.
4. Wait until the system goes through the

whole loading process. System will boot up
to applications automatically after about 30
minutes.

Table 8-15 Loading from Internal Partition Software

run.

twice.
active and ready for testing.
received with Kit.

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-16 Loading from Internal Partition Software Functional Checks
See:

Section 8-5
Cable Replacement
When replacing cables, see the Section in which the cable or cables are used. When replacing the Main
Cable Harness, see:8-8-4 "Z-Mechanism replacement" on page 8-199.
8 - 28 Section 8-5 - Cable Replacement

Section 8-6
Replacing Covers and Bumpers
This section describes how to replace the Covers and Bumpers on the LOGIQ E10.

8-6-2 Covers and Bumpers overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
8-6-3 Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8-6-4 Front Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
8-6-5 Foot Rest Bumper replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
8-6-6 Mains Cable Hook replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
8-6-7 Rear Cover/Air Exhaust replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
8-6-8 Rear Bumper/Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
8-6-9 Rear Trim Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8-6-10 Top Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
8-6-11 Filter cleaning / inspection / replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
8-6-12 Rear Handle replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
8-6-13 Main Monitor Arm Assembly Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
8-6-14 Printer Filler Storage replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
8-6-15 Column Cover Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
8-6-16 Main Cable Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
8-6-17 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
8-6-18 Bulkhead Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79

8-6-2 Covers and Bumpers overview

When replacing Side Covers and/or Rear Cover for a LOGIQ E10 used in a veterinary environment, the
LOGIQ E10 Spare Parts Handling for Veterinary Systems MUST BE re-installed before the LOGIQ E10
is returned for use. See: "Label Placement for the LOGIQ E10 used in a Veterinary Environment" on
page 8-58 and Section 9-19 "Product Labels on LOGIQ E10 and Consoles used in a Veterinary
Environment" on page 9-48.
The Main Console has a Front Cover, two Side Covers with a Foot Rest (front), Bumper (rear), a Rear
Cover with a top trim and a Top Cover.
The Side and Front Covers, Foot Rest, Rear Bumper and Rear Cover Trim are positioned and secured
to the LOGIQ E10 with custom designed, self-clinching studs (A) and a catch (B). The catch (B) is
mounted loosely to help guide the stud into place, to ease removal/attaching and provide a better fit for
the covers.
Table 8-17 Self-clinching Stud and Catch
Self-clinching Stud and Catch
B
A
In addition to the self-clinching studs and catch, the Side Covers are positioned and secured with a
series of tabs (C) at the top, inside of the Cover and slots (D) in the Top Cover. The Front Cover is
positioned and secured with guides (tabs E) to the Top Front Cover.
Table 8-18 Cover Tabs and Slots
Cover Tabs and Slots
D E
8 - 30 Section 8-6 - Replacing Covers and Bumpers

8-6-2 Covers and Bumpers overview (cont’d)

Table shows the cover retention configuration of the LOGIQ E10
Table 8-19 LOGIQ E10 Cover Retention configuration
LOGIQ E10 Cover Retention configuration

8-6-2 Covers and Bumpers overview (cont’d)

Table 8-20 Covers and Bumpers for LOGIQ E10
PART NAME ILLUSTRATION QTY PART NAME ILLUSTRATION QTY PART NAME ILLUSTRATION QTY
Left Side Cover
Assembly/Air Rear Bumper/Air
Intake Intake Bulkhead Cover
See: 8-6-3 "Side See: 8-6-8 "Rear See: 8-6-18
Cover(s)/Side Air 1 Bumper/Air Intake 1 "Bulkhead Cover 1
Intake (Filter) (Filter) inspection / replacement" on
inspection / replacement" on page 8-79.
page 8-33.
Contains:
1. Pan Arm Down
Cover
Main Monitor Arm 2. Lift Arm Cover -
Right Side Cover Right
Plastic
Assembly/Air 3. Lift Arm Cover -
Covers (for,
Intake Top Cover Left
Ergotron Arm
See: 8-6-3 "Side See: 8-6-10 "Top
1 1 Assembly). See: 4. Joint Cover
Cover(s)/Side Air Cover 5. Extension Arm 1
8-6-13 "Main
Intake (Filter) replacement" on Cover
Monitor Arm
inspection / page 8-55.
Assembly Covers 6. Rotation Limit
replacement" on
replacement" on Screw
page 8-33. 3
page 8-64. 1
4
2
6
5
Caster Hubcap
Foot Rest Bumper Rear Handle
(cover)
See: 8-6-5 "Foot See: 8-6-12 "Rear
See: 8-10-4
Rest Bumper 1 Handle 1 4
"Caster Hubcap
replacement" on replacement" on
replacement" on
page 8-41. page 8-62.
page 8-236.
Pedal Mechanism
Printer Filler Covers:
Storage Parking Brake (1) 1
Front Cover
Swivel Lock (2)
See: 8-6-4 "Front See: 8-6-14
See: 8-10-7
Cover 1 "Printer Filler 1 1
"Pedal
replacement" on Storage 2
Mechanism
page 8-38. replacement" on Covers
page 8-66. replacement" on
page 8-250.
Rear Cover/Air Cover, Main

Exhaust Cable
See: 8-6-7 "Rear See: 8-6-16 "Main
1 1
Cover/Air Exhaust Cable Cover
replacement" on replacement" on
page 8-45. page 8-73.
Column Cover Kit

Rear Cover Trim
See: 8-6-15
See: 8-6-9 "Rear
"Column Cover
Trim Cover 1 1
Assembly
replacement" on
replacement" on
page 8-52.
page 8-69.

8-6-3 Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement

NOTE: When replacing Side Covers for a LOGIQ E10 used in veterinary environment, the LOGIQ E10
Spare Parts Handling for Veterinary Systems MUST BE re-installed before the LOGIQ E10
returned for use. See: "Label Placement for the LOGIQ E10 used in a Veterinary Environment"
on page 8-58.
The Side Covers must be removed before any lower console cover(s) can be removed.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person /
Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6 /
5 minutes per
8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.
Side Cover
Table 8-22 Preparations and Preparation Link
1. Power down the system.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet.
Preparation Link (if you need more information):

4-2-4 "Power SHUT DOWN" on page 4-9.

Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) removal
The Side Covers are attached to the LOGIQ E10 with tabs at the top, inside of the Cover and slots in
the Top Cover, and three self-clinching studs. One is located at the front, center and two are located at
the bottom of the cover. An M4 screw, is also located at the bottom, center of the cover.
NOTE: When the Side Cover(s) are removed, always inspect the filter for debris, blockage or damage.
If the Filter is blocked, clean it. If the Filter is damaged, replace it. If the Side Covers are
replaced, the Filters must be transferred to the replacement cover.
Table 8-23 Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) inspection / removal

1. Activate the caster brakes.
Remove the Side Cover screw, using a 3
mm hex wrench.
2. With both hands at the bottom, outer edge

of the cover, gently and evenly, pull the
cover out and lift up.
Repeat steps for the opposite side.
Set cover(s) in a safe place.

Table 8-23 Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) inspection / removal
3. If the Side Covers are replaced, the Air Filter

must be transferred to the replacement.
Remove the Air Filter and transfer it to the
replacement.
Release the tab by pressing inward on the
outer edge of the Filter (either side) and
gently slide the Filter out of the LOGIQ E10.
Always clean the Filter when it is removed.
Inspect the Filter. Always replace the Filter,
if it is damaged or you suspect damage.
4. Re-install or replace Filter.
5. When replacing Side Covers for a LOGIQ E10 used in veterinary environment, the LOGIQ E10 Spare Parts
Handling for Veterinary Systems MUST BE re-installed before the LOGIQ E10 returned for use.
See: "Label Placement for the LOGIQ E10 used in a Veterinary Environment" on page 8-58.

Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) installation
Table 8-24 Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) installation

1. Center the Side Cover on the
LOGIQ E10 and align the tabs at the top, in-
side of the Cover, with the slots in the Top
Cover. It should rest evenly.
2. Position one hand at the front center of the

cover and press in, to install the front center
self-clinching stud.
This will guide the lower self-clinching studs
into position.
With both hands, firmly press in, evenly at
the bottom, outer edge to complete installa-
tion.
Re-install the M4 screw(s).
NOTE: If a cover is replaced, transfer the
Air Filter.

Calibration and adjustments
No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this part replacement.
Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement:
1.) Verify that all screws removed earlier have been installed.
2.) Connect cables removed earlier.
3.) Power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-25 Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement

Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all
required checks and is ready for use.

8-6-4 Front Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person / Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6 /
15 minutes 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Side Covers.
Preparation Links (if you need more information):

• 4-2-4 "Power SHUT DOWN" on page 4-9.
• 8-6-3 "Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement" on page 8-33.
Front Cover removal
The Front Cover is attached to the LOGIQ E10 with tabs at the top, inside of the Cover and slots in the
Top Cover, and four self-clinching studs. Two studs are located above the probe connectors and two
are located at the bottom of the cover.
Table 8-28 Front Cover removal

1. Raise the Upper OP to the highest position.
With both hands at the lower sides of the
cover, gently and evenly, pull the cover out
and tilt up.
Set cover in a safe place.

Front Cover installation
Table 8-29 Front Cover installation

1. With one hand, support the Column Cover
up.
Center the Front Cover on the
LOGIQ E10 and align the tabs at the top, in-
side of the Top Cover into the slots in the
Front Cover and tilt inward.
2. With both hands, firmly press in, evenly in the center, above the probe connections, to place the
top two self-clinching studs. Then, with both hands, firmly press in, evenly at the bottom to com-
plete installation.
3. Re-install Side Covers.

Verification
2.) Connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-30 Front Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-6-5 Foot Rest Bumper replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person /
No tools are required.
15 minutes

3. Remove the Side Covers and Front Cover.

• 8-6-4 "Front Cover replacement" on page 8-38.
Foot Rest Bumper removal
The Foot Rest Bumper is attached to the LOGIQ E10 with two self-clinching studs.
Table 8-33 Foot Rest Bumper removal

1. With both hands at the bottom, gently and
evenly, pull the Bumper straight up.
Set bumper in a safe place.

Foot Rest Bumper installation
Table 8-34 Foot Rest Bumper installation

1. Position bumper into place and with both hands, firmly press in, evenly to install.
2. Re-install all Covers removed.
Verification

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-35 Foot Rest Bumper replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 System CFM and PWD Checks 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all
Brakes and Direction Lock Functional
4-2-6
Checks

8-6-6 Mains Cable Hook replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time


Mains Cable Hook replacement
Table 8-38 Mains Cable Hook replacement

1. Using a 5mm hex wrench, remove the two
screws securing the Hook to the handle.
2. Install replacement hook and re-install screws. Torque: 9.0 Nm (6.6 lbf-ft {79.2 lbf-in}).

Verification
1.) Connect mains power cable removed earlier.

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-39 Mains Cable Hook replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-6-7 Rear Cover/Air Exhaust replacement

NOTE: When replacing the Rear Cover Assembly for a LOGIQ E10 used in a veterinary environment,
the LOGIQ E10 Spare Parts Handling for Veterinary Systems MUST BE re-installed before the
LOGIQ E10 is returned for use. See: "Label Placement for the LOGIQ E10 used in a Veterinary
Environment" on page 8-58.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Side Covers and Mains Cable Hook.

• 8-6-6 "Mains Cable Hook replacement" on page 8-43.

Rear Cover/Air Exhaust removal
The Rear Cover is attached to the LOGIQ E10 with four self-tapping screws, two on each side. These
mounting screws are screwed into plastic. Use care during installation, DO NOT overtighten.
Table 8-42 Rear Cover/Air Exhaust removal

1. Remove the two Phillips screws on each
side of the Rear Cover that secure the rear
cover to the Frame.
Lift the Rear Cover away.

Rear Cover/Air Exhaust installation
NOTE: When installing the Rear Cover place the Mains Power Cable clamp in so it will clear the cover
installation. The cover should be flush with the Circuit breaker and ON/OFF panel and Rear
I/O panel when installed.
Table 8-43 Rear Cover/Air Exhaust installation

1. Position the lower edge of the Rear Cover
into place on the rear of the Rear Bumper/
Air Intake. Make sure the Z-Mech manual
release lever is accessible when position-
ing the cover.
Align the Cover mounting holes with the
Frame and install screws on each side, al-
ternately.
NOTE: These mounting screws are self-
tapping screws into plastic. Hand tighten
and use care during installation, DO NOT
overtighten. MAKE SURE there is no gaps
between the screws, cover or mounting sur-
face.
2. Re-install all Covers removed and Mains Cable Hook.

Verification
1.) Connect cables removed earlier

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-44 Rear Cover/Air Exhaust replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-4 Power SHUT DOWN 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all
Make sure the Z-Mech manual release
lever is accessible and functions.

8-6-8 Rear Bumper/Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement

NOTE: When the Rear Bumper is removed, always inspect the Filter for debris, blockage or damage.
If the Filter is blocked, clean it. If the Filter is damaged, replace it. If the Rear Bumper is
replaced, the Air Filter must be transferred to the replacement bumper.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

3. Remove the Side Covers, Mains Cable Hook and Rear Cover.

• 8-6-7 "Rear Cover/Air Exhaust replacement" on page 8-45.
Rear Bumper/Air Intake (Filter) inspection / removal
The Rear Bumper is attached to the LOGIQ E10 with two self-clinching studs.
Table 8-47 Rear Bumper/Air Intake (Filter) inspection / removal

1. With both hands at the bottom, gently and
evenly, pull the Bumper straight up.
Set Bumper in a safe place.

Table 8-47 Rear Bumper/Air Intake (Filter) inspection / removal
2. If the Rear Bumper is replaced, the Air Filter

must be transferred to the replacement.
Remove the Air Filter and transfer it to the
replacement.
Release the tab by pressing inward on the
Rear Bumper/Air Intake (Filter) installation
Table 8-48 Rear Bumper/Air Intake (Filter) installation

1. Position bumper into place and with both hands, firmly press in, evenly to install.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-49 Rear Bumper/Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement Functional

Checks
See:

8-6-9 Rear Trim Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

3. Remove the Side Covers, Mains Cable Hook and Rear Cover.


Rear Trim Cover removal
The Rear Trim Cover is attached to the LOGIQ E10 with two self-clinching studs.
Table 8-52 Rear Trim Cover removal

1. Rear Trim Cover installed
With both hands at the bottom, gently and

evenly, pull the trim cover out and tilt up.
Set trim cover in a safe place.

Rear Trim Cover installation
Table 8-53 Rear Trim Cover installation

1. Position trim cover into place, with the upper edge under the Top Cover and with both hands,
firmly press in, evenly to install.
Verification

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-54 Rear Trim Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-6-10 Top Cover replacement
Top Cover support

The Top Cover is supported by two Sup-
ports, one on each side.
This Cover Support is factory installed and
DOES NOT need to be adjusted or re-
moved. DO NOT loosen or remove the Cov-
er Support mounting hardware.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

3. Remove the Bin(s) Option, if present, Side Covers and the Front Cover.


Top Cover removal
The Top Cover is attached to the LOGIQ E10 with two Bin Pivot Brackets, at the rear. One Pivot Bracket
on each side. The Pivot Brackets are secured to the Cover Supports.
Table 8-57 Top Cover removal

1. Remove the Bin(s) Option by lifting the
Bin(s) straight up. Place in a safe location.
Remove the two screws that secure the Bin
Pivot Brackets and the Top Cover, using a
5 mm hex wrench.
Remove the Bin Pivot Brackets.
Gently lift up and away to remove the cover.
NOTE: If the Bin Pivots are not present, the
Top Cover retainers are removed in the
same manner, except a 4 mm hex wrench
is required.
Top Cover installation
Table 8-58 Top Cover Installation

1. Position Top Cover onto the Cover Supports.
Re-install the two screws to secure the Bin Pivot Brackets or No-Bin Plugs and the Top Cover.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-59 Top Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

Label Placement for the LOGIQ E10 used in a Veterinary Environment
Table 8-60 LOGIQ E10 used in a Veterinary Environment Label Placement

1. If the Side Cover Assemblies are replaced,
re-install the “VET“ Label as shown.
2. If the Rear Cover Assembly is replaced,

re-install the “For Veterinary use only“ Label
for the Rear Cover Assembly as shown.
NOTE: The Back Cover Label with ETL

Label is not a Spare Part.external
3. If a Probe is replaced, re-install ALL the

“For Veterinary use only“ Label(s) for
Probes as shown. This label is shown on
the Probe Cable, near the connector.

8-6-11 Filter cleaning / inspection / replacement

The Filter; Rear and Sides are removed and installed in the same manner. The difference are; the rear
is grey and the sides are black.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person /
15 minutes



Filter inspection / replacement
Table 8-63 Filter inspection / replacement

1. Release the tab by pressing inward on the
The Filter can be cleaned with mild soap
and water. MAKE SURE to dry the Filter
before it is re-installed.

Verification
1.) Connect mains power cable removed earlier.

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-64 Filter replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-6-12 Rear Handle replacement

If the Cable Hook is not being replaced, transfer it to the replacement handle. See: 8-6-12 "Rear Handle
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

3. Remove the Side Covers, Mains Cable Hook, Rear Cover and Rear Trim Cover.

• 8-6-9 "Rear Trim Cover replacement" on page 8-52.
Rear Handle replacement
Table 8-67 Rear Handle removal

1. Loosen all six socket flat head screws
securing the Handle to the LOGIQ E10,
using a 4 mm hex wrench, but DO NOT
remove the screws.
2. Remove the outer four screws to maintain control of the handle.

3. With one hand, maintain control of the handle so it DOES NOT fall. Remove the remaining
screws.

Rear Handle installation
Table 8-68 Rear Handle installation

1. With one hand, maintain control of the replacement handle so it DOES NOT fall and install center
screws.
2. Re-install remaining screws. Torque to 4.3 Nm (38 lbf-in), alternately. Re-check torque.
After screws are torqued, the screws must be marked with a sharp, permanent marker or paint
marker.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-69 Rear Handle replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
4-2-4 Power SHUT DOWN Required torque was applied.

8-6-13 Main Monitor Arm Assembly Covers replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

2. Move the User Interface (Top Console) to its lower position.

Table 8-72 Main Monitor Arm Assembly Covers removal and installation

1. Pan Arm Down Cover (1), remove two
Phillips screws and lift the cover off.
Lift Arm Cover - Right (2) and Lift Arm
Cover - Left (3), remove the 3 mm screws 2 4
and slide the Cover toward the Monitor. 1
Joint Cover (4), slightly push the bottom of
the Cover forward to “bow“ the cover and
pry at the leading, forward edge of the
3
Cover to remove.
Extension Arm Cover (5), remove the
3 mm screw and lower cover.
Install covers in the reverse motion. To 5
install the Joint Cover, place top of Cover
into position and snap into place.

Verification

3.) Monitor Arm and Main Monitor movement functions in all directions without the covers loosening.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-73 Main Monitor Arm Assembly Covers replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-6-14 Printer Filler Storage replacement

NOTE: The Printer Filler Storage is used in the printer compartment on LOGIQ E10 without an on-
board printer.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet, all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover and Front Cover.


Printer Filler Storage removal
Table 8-76 Printer Filler Storage removal

2. Note the location of the Filler (1) in the
fixing bracket of the Tray. When the
replacement Filler is installed, it should be
in this same position.
Remove the flange nut (2), using a 7 mm
driver and release the fixing bracket.
3. Slide the Filler out of the Tray.
Printer Filler Storage installation
Table 8-77 Printer Filler Storage installation

1. Slide the Filler into the Tray as noted in removal.
2. Re-install flange nut and apply slight pressure, down on the fixing bracket while tightening the
nut.

Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this Printer Filler
Storage replacement:
1.) Verify that all screws that removed earlier has been installed.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-78 Printer Filler Storage replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 Probe/Connectors Checks LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks required checks and is ready for use.

8-6-15 Column Cover Assembly replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time Total
One person /
8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6,
15 minutes
Flexible shaft bit driver extension (optional).

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound System where there is exposure to voltage greater than
30 volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

4. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, Front Cover and Top Cover.

• 8-6-10 "Top Cover replacement" on page 8-55.

Column Cover Assembly removal
Table 8-81 Column Cover Assembly removal

1. Lower the console to lowest possible level.
2. Remove the lower screw on the right side,
that is visible near the rear of the DVD
drive.
3. Raise the console to full height.

4. Remove the remaining screw on the right
side that secures the Column Cover
Assembly.
5. Remove the two screws on the left side that

secure the Column Cover Assembly.
Remove Column Cover Assembly.
NOTE: The Main Cable Cover will also be
released.

Column Cover Assembly installation
Table 8-82 Column Cover Assembly installation

1. Install the Main Cable Cover so the Column Cover Assembly overlaps Main Cable Cover edges.
Install screws to Column Cover Assembly (tighten by hand).
2. Position the lower Column Cover tab inside
the Front Cover.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-83 Column Cover Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
Operator I/O Movement - XY and Z- required checks and is ready for use.
Mechanism

8-6-16 Main Cable Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time Total

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

4. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, the Top Cover and the Column Cover Assembly.

• 8-6-15 "Column Cover Assembly replacement" on page 8-69.

Main Cable Cover removal
Table 8-86 Main Cable Cover removal

1. Remove the Main Cable Cover (Column
Cover overlaps Main Cable Cover).
Main Cable Cover installation
Table 8-87 Main Cable Cover installation

1. Install the Main Cable Cover so the Column Cover Assembly overlaps Main Cable Cover edges.
2. With the console raised to its full height, install the 3 screws to secure the Main Cable Cover and
Column Cover Assembly.
3. Lower the console and install the lower right side screw.
4. Position the lower Column Cover tab inside
the Front Cover.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-88 Main Cable Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:
Operator I/O Movement - XY and Z-
Mechanism

8-6-17 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time Total
One person /
15 minutes

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover and the Battery Cover.


Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal
Table 8-91 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors removal

1. At the rear of the Ultrasound System, XY / Frogleg mechanism release
release the LOGIQ E10 frogleg mechanism
by inserting a screwdriver into the release
point and pressing until release. Pull the
console out to its extended position to gain
access to the screws in the next step.
2. Under the XY / Frogleg mechanism, Right side frog leg, from underneath
identify the four separate covers. There are
two types of covers, one type has two
screws (1) and the other type has one
screw (2).
Remove the screws from the cover(s) to
replace.
3. Pull down and slide the cover(s) away from

the XY / Frogleg mechanism. Be sure to
flex the plastic slightly so the plastic clears
the XY.
4. Disconnect the cable.

5. Remove the screw securing the ground.
6. Thread the cover(s) off the cable.

Covers under XY / Frogleg motors installation
Table 8-92 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors installation

1. Thread the cover(s) on the cable.
2. Perform a dry fit of the covers (confirm the covers face the correct way) before connecting the
cable and ground.
3. Install the screw securing the ground.
4. Connect the cable.
5. Slide cover(s) into place.
6. Re-install screws to the cover(s).
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-93 Covers under XY / Frogleg motors Functional Checks
See:

8-6-18 Bulkhead Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time Total
One person /
15 minutes



Bulkhead Cover removal
Table 8-96 Bulkhead Cover removal

1. At the rear, release the LOGIQ E10 frogleg XY / Frogleg mechanism release
mechanism by inserting a 1.5 mm (1/16
inch) hex wrench into the release point and
pressing until release. Pull the console out
to its extended position to gain access to
the screws in the next step.
Bulkhead Cover
2. Use thumbs to press upper lock tabs Upper lock tabs (placement on Bulkhead Cover)
toward the front of the Ultrasound System
to release the top of the Bulkhead Cover.

Table 8-96 Bulkhead Cover removal

3. Pull the Bulkhead Cover away from the Bulkhead Cover Tabs (cover removed)
system.
Bulkhead Cover installation
Table 8-97 Bulkhead Cover installation

1. Position Bulkhead Cover, tucking any cables within the cover to avoid pinching the cables.
2. Install lower tab locks first, and then upper tab locks.
3. Replace Bulkhead Cover.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-98 Bulkhead Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

Section 8-7
Replacing Top Console Parts
This section describes how to replace the Top Console parts.

8-7-2 Main Monitor assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
8-7-3 Main Monitor Arm assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
8-7-4 Main Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
8-7-5 Probe Holder Insert replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106
8-7-6 OP (Operator Panel) Knobs replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109
8-7-7 Silicone Keyboard Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-111
8-7-8 A/N Keyboard Mechanics replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
8-7-9 Upper OP (Operator Panel)/Touch Panel Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117
8-7-10 Lower OP (Operator Panel) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122
8-7-11 Bulkhead Board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127
8-7-12 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-133
8-7-13 Cover, UI Upper Assembly (Speakers) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-137
8-7-14 Trackball Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-141
8-7-15 Lower Bezel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-144
8-7-16 Upper Op Encoders/Joysticks and Lower Op Encoders and Encoders/Joysticks replacement
8-148
8-7-17 Upper OP Frame Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-152
8-7-18 Lower OP Frame Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-156
8-7-19 Palm Rest Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-160
8-7-20 Left Handle Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-163
8-7-21 Right Handle Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-166
8-7-22 Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-169
8-7-23 Gel Warmer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-173
8-7-24 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-177
8-7-25 Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV/TR Probe Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-179
8-7-26 XYZ Buttons replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-180
8-7-27 Probe Cable Hooks replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-183

8-7-2 Main Monitor assembly replacement

NOTE: Before removing the Monitor, record old monitor settings or user settings if possible.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time Total

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

8 - 84 Section 8-7 - Replacing Top Console Parts

Main Monitor assembly replacement
Table 8-101 Main Monitor assembly replacement

1. NOTE: If the Monitor is a replacement, this
menu may display in the lower, right side of
the Monitor when it is powered up for the
very first time. DO NOT touch these
settings.
This menu will not display after the
LOGIQ E10 reboots and Monitor defaults
are set by the Application Software. In
some cases it may take an additional
reboot to clear this menu.

Main Monitor removal
Table 8-102 Main Monitor removal

1. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING THE MONITOR
FROM THE ARM, KEEP THE MONITOR
ARM ASSEMBLY IN THE LOCKED
POSITION. THE SPRINGS TO SUPPORT
THE MONITOR CAN CAUSE THE ARM
TO SPRING OPEN CAUSING SEVERE
PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
2. Remove the Monitor Cable Cover fixing

screws.
DO NOT discard the Cable Cover of the
Monitor, transfer it to the replacement
Monitor. The Cover IS NOT included in the
Monitor FRU.
3. Lay the Monitor flat. Cable connectors

Disconnect the HDMI (4), the USB (5) and
the Power (6) Cables from the Monitor.
If the LOGIQ E10 has the Optional USB
Microphone, remove it to transfer to the
replacement Monitor.

Table 8-102 Main Monitor removal

4. Remove the two lower Phillips screws (1). Monitor mounting screws and holes
Loosen the upper Phillips screws (2). The
Monitor will be supported by the two upper
screws.
Slide the Monitor off of the Arm Assembly.
Remove the upper Phillips screws to
re-install into the replacement Monitor.

Main Monitor installation
Table 8-103 Main Monitor installation

1. WARNING
WHEN INSTALLING THE MONITOR TO
THE ARM, KEEP THE MONITOR ARM
ASSEMBLY IN THE LOCKED POSITION.
THE SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE
MONITOR CAN CAUSE THE ARM TO
SPRING OPEN CAUSING SEVERE
PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY
DAMAGE.
2. Re-install the upper two Phillips screws into Monitor

the Monitor. Leave enough clearance to
slide the Monitor onto the Arm.
With the Monitor flat, slide the Monitor onto
the Arm Assembly and support the lower
portion of the Monitor while the installing
the two lower Phillips screws (1).
Tighten the upper Phillips screws (2). Make
sure the Monitor is level before tightening
the screws securely.
3. Re-connect the HDMI (4), the USB (5) and Cable connectors
the Power (6) Cables from the Monitor.

Table 8-103 Main Monitor installation

4. NOTE: To ensure the Monitor is installed
level with the system and before
e- installing the Cable Cover:
MAKE SURE:
- the LOGIQ E10 is on a level surface,
- the wheels are in-line,
- the Monitor Arm Lock is LOCKED.
Check that the LOGIQ E10 is level.
Place a level on the monitor (as shown).
If any adjustment is required, loosen the
four mounting screws and make the
adjustment. Re-tighten the four screws
after the adjustment.
NOTE: If a level is not available, make sure
the Monitor is as square as possible with
the LOGIQ E10, visually.
5. Re-install the Cable Cover and fixing
screws.
Re-install the Cable Cover from the
replaced Monitor. The Cover IS NOT a
FRU.

See: Section 6-2 "Monitor adjustments" on page 6-2 for Main Monitor calibration instructions and/or
Monitor Arm and Monitor Friction Adjustment.
Verification
NOTE: The Wide Screen Monitor may need a second reboot for the system to fully identify the
monitor’s USB device. To confirm, verify that the Monitor Controls for the Wide Screen Monitors
are available on the Touch Panel Utility pages.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-104 Main Monitor assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 System CFM and PWD Checks 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Leakage Current
measured at (record the value) and meets
10-7-4 Grounding continuity allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
10-7-5 Chassis leakage current test checks and is ready for use.

8-7-3 Main Monitor Arm assembly replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Total Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

NOTE: If you are also replacing the Main Monitor, you do not need to remove the monitor from the arm.
3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the Main Monitor assembly and the Bulkhead Cover.

• 8-7-2 "Main Monitor assembly replacement" on page 8-84.
• 8-6-18 "Bulkhead Cover replacement" on page 8-79.

Monitor Arm assembly removal
This procedure assumes that the Monitor and Bulkhead Cover have been removed.
Table 8-107 Monitor Arm assembly removal

1. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING THE MONITOR ARM,
KEEP THE ARM LOCKED, AS SHOWN
TO ENSURE THE MONITOR ARM
ASSEMBLY IS IN THE LOCKED
POSITION UNTILL THE ARM AND
MONITOR ARE INSTALLED. THE
SPRINGS TO SUPPORT THE MONITOR
CAN CAUSE THE ARM TO SPRING
OPEN CAUSING SEVERE PERSONAL
INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
2. Disconnect the Power Cable (P3) and the

HDMI (P10) from the Bulkhead Board.

Table 8-107 Monitor Arm assembly removal

3. Remove the Set Screw using a 5 mm hex
wrench.
Carefully lift the Arm Assembly up and
retrieve the cables and connectors out, one
at a time from the LOGIQ E10.

Monitor Arm assembly installation
Table 8-108 Monitor Arm assembly installation

1. WARNING
WHEN INSTALLING THE MONITOR
ARM, KEEP THE ARM LOCKED, AS
SHOWN TO ENSURE THE MONITOR
ARM ASSEMBLY IS IN THE LOCKED
POSITION UNTILL THE ARM AND
MONITOR ARE INSTALLED. THE
2. Make sure the Bushing is installed and

positioned in the orientation shown. The
larger hole in the Bushing is to
accommodate the pin.


3. Remove the Rotation Limit Set Screw from
the Arm Assembly using a 5 mm hex
wrench.
4. Take the Monitor Arm and Cables and feed

the Power Cable into the Adapter first.
Position the Video Cable Connector as

shown and continue to feed the cables into
the Adapter.
Install the Arm Assembly.
Route the Cables into the Adapter one at a
time.


5. Position the Arm Assembly so the Set
Screw mounting hole faces the left side of
the LOGIQ E10.
Install the Set Screw. Torque: 9.8 Nm
(7.2 lbf-ft {86.4 lbf-in}).
NOTICE
DO NOT connect the Monitor power cable to the power (P3) connector on the Bulkhead when
the LOGIQ E10 is powered up. Damage to the Monitor Power Cable and/or the Bulkhead Board
can occur. See images below of damage that can occur.
48VDC pin in the P3 connector (center pin), shows damage.
The outside two pins are Ground. Cable left, Bulkhead Connector right.


6. Connect the Monitor cables; the Power
Cable (P3) and the HDMI (P10).
7. Re-install Monitor and all Covers removed.
See: Section 6-2 "Monitor adjustments" on page 6-2 for Monitor calibration instructions and/or Monitor
Arm and Monitor Friction Adjustment.
Verification
4.) Move the Monitor Arm from side to side and ensure that it moves as intended.

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-109 Main Monitor Arm assembly replacement Functional Checks
See
4-2-5 Main Monitor Positions and Lock
4-2-5 Operator I/O Movement - Main Monitor LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Leakage Current
4-2-7 System CFM and PWD Checks allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
10-7-4 Grounding continuity checks and is ready for use.


8-7-4 Main Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes.
3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the Bulkhead cover, the Monitor and Arm Assembly.


Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter replacement
1. WARNING
WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING THE
MONITOR ARM, KEEP THE ARM
LOCKED, AS SHOWN TO ENSURE THE
MONITOR ARM ASSEMBLY IS IN THE
LOCKED POSITION UNTILL THE ARM
AND MONITOR ARE INSTALLED. THE

Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter removal
Table 8-112 Arm Adapter removal

1. Remove the Bulkhead Cover.
2. Disconnect the Power Cable (P1), the
HDMI (P10), the USB (P3) and the Ground
Cable (circled) from the Adapter ONLY.
The grounding screw is located inside the
adapter.
3. Remove the Set Screw using a 5 mm hex

wrench.
Carefully lift the Arm Assembly up from the
LOGIQ E10.

Table 8-112 Arm Adapter removal

4. Remove the Bearing. The plate is captured
by the two retaining pins that protrude from
the Adapter.
NOTE: A pin or pick can be used to lift the
plate slightly to remove.
5. Remove the two screws securing the

Adapter, using a 4 mm hex wrench.

Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter installation
Table 8-113 Arm Adapter installation

1. NOTE: Note the shape of the REAR (rear of LOGIQ E10)
mounting hole, this is important for when
the UI Boss Bearing is installed.
(OP, front of LOGIQ E10)

2. Insert the Adapter into the Upper UI Frame
with the rear mounting hole at the rear.
Align the mounting holes and install the two
M5 x 50 screws using a 4 mm hex wrench
to secure the Adapter. Torque 2.5 Nm (1.8
lbf-ft {21.6 lbf-in}).
NOTE: Note the four bosses on the
Adapter Bearing surface, these capture
and position the Bearing when it is
installed.
3. NOTE: MAKE SURE the REAR mounting

hole for the Arm Neck Lock Pin, in the
Bearing is aligned with the REAR mounting
hole and the four bosses of the Adapter
capture and position the Bearing.
The Bearing should seat firmly on the
Adapter. If the Bearing “rocks“, it is NOT
installed correctly.

Table 8-113 Arm Adapter installation

4. Install the Ground Cable to the Adapter
inside the Adapter, using the screw and
lock washer removed. Torque 1.3 Nm (0.96
lbf-ft {11.5 lbf-in}).
NOTICE
DO NOT connect the Monitor power cable to the power (P2) or (P3) connector on the Bulkhead
when the LOGIQ E10 is powered up. Damage to the Monitor Power Cable and/or the Bulkhead
Board can occur. See: images below of damage that can occur.
5. Re-install Monitor and Arm Assembly and connect the Monitor Cables.

See: Section 6-2 "Monitor adjustments" on page 6-2 for Main Monitor calibration instructions.
Verification
3.) Power up the LOGIQ E10 to verify that it operates as intended.
Functional Checks
Perform the following functional tests to confirm the LOGIQ E10 is operational before returning the
LOGIQ E10 to the customer.
Table 8-114 Main Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter replacement

Functional Checks
See:
Section Functional Checks Debrief Script
10-7-5 Chassis leakage current test checks and is ready for use.

8-7-5 Probe Holder Insert replacement

Table 8-115 Probe Holder Insert replacement Introduction
Introduction
The Probe Holder Inserts are soft rubber inserts, used to protect the Probes from scratches,
when stored on the LOGIQ E10. You can place the Probe Holder Inserts in any of the desired
places on the edge of the Operator Panel. The following types of inserts are available:
• Probe Holder Insert STD,
• Probe Holder Insert 3D,
• Probe Holder Softinsert Doppler.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person /
15 minutes
Table 8-117 Preparations
1. Disconnect and remove all Probes.

2. Store Probes in a safe place.

Probe Holder Insert removal
Table 8-118 Probe Holder Insert removal
1. Carefully pull the flexible Probe Holder Probe Holder placement

Insert out of the Lower UI Frame. Large (1)
and small (2) soft, Probe Holder Inserts.
Probe Holder Insert installation
Table 8-119 Probe Holder Insert installation
1. Install the flexible Probe Holder Insert into Probe Holder placement
the Lower UI Frame. Be sure the hooks (1)
and tabs (2) fit properly and the Probe
Holder fits snugly.

No calibrations or adjustments are needed.
Verification

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-120 Probe Holder Insert replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 Basic Measurements required checks and is ready for use.

8-7-6 OP (Operator Panel) Knobs replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person /
15 minutes
Table 8-122 Preparations
Preparations
No preparations needed for this procedure.
OP Knobs removal
Table 8-123 OP Knobs removal
Step
1. Carefully pull the knobs, one by one, to remove them.
OP Knobs installation
Table 8-124 OP Knobs installation
1. NOTE: The OP knobs are concentric

knobs, the center shaft has a D shape.
Replace the outer knobs first then the inner
ones.
Install the knobs, one by one in their
respective positions.
Y TVI
PW
X Z
CW PDI
M CF
3D/4D Elasto V Nav LOGIQ Contrast
View
B
Flow
Esc
~ ?
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
1
F8 F9 F10
CHI
Set Home 2 Word Prt Sc
` Help Arrow Eject Spooler Macro Macro Home Copy Move Delete
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = Abc
Auto
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } |
[ ] \
A S D F G H J K L : L R
"
; ' Clear P4
Z X C V B N M < > ?
, . / Pg Up
P1 P2 P3
Ctrl Fn Alt Alt Gr Ins Del Freeze
Home End Pg Dn

No calibrations or adjustments are needed.
Verification

2.) Operate all knobs and verify that they don’t slip when operated.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-125 OP Knobs replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 System CFM and PWD Checks LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction

8-7-7 Silicone Keyboard Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person /
15 minutes
A thin, flexible plastic card, such as a credit card or an EHS card.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11



Silicone Keyboard Cover removal
Table 8-128 Silicone Keyboard Cover removal
1. Gently insert a card, in the center,

between the Lower Bezel and the
Keyboard.
2. Apply evenly distributed pressure to

the back of the card and tilt the card
back. Using as much surface of the
card (so the card and Cover bind).
As the card and cover bind, work
the card upward and with your other
fingers, work the card and Cover,
A/N Keyboard Mechanics upward to
remove the Cover and Mechanics.
Remove the Cover.
3. It may not be necessary to

disconnect the Keyboard
Mechanics Cable, but if it is,
disconnect it.
Grasp the connector on the large,
flat sides and pull straight away
from the board.

Silicone Keyboard Cover Installation
Table 8-129 A/N Keyboard Mechanics Installation
1. Install the new Cover onto the

Keyboard Mechanics.
Make sure the Cover is completely
around the Keyboard Mechanics,
so the Mechanics and Cover are
2. Re-install the Keyboard.Cover onto the Keyboard Mechanics.

Make sure the Cover is completely around the Mechanics, so the Mechanics and Cover are
Re-connect the Signal Cable if it was disconnected.
Place any excess Cable into the Lower Frame when re-installing the Keyboard.
3. Re- install Keyboard and Cover.
Verification
4.) Select comments and type different A/N keys to confirm keyboard functionality.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-130 Silicone Keyboard Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-7-8 A/N Keyboard Mechanics replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Silicone Keyboard Cover.

• 8-7-7 "Silicone Keyboard Cover replacement" on page 8-111.

A/N Keyboard Mechanics replacement
Table 8-133 A/N Keyboard Mechanics replacement
1. Disconnect the Keyboard

Mechanics signal Cable.
from the board.
2. Re-install the Cover onto the Keyboard Mechanics.

Make sure the Cover is completely around the Keyboard Mechanics, so the Mechanics and
Cover are installed correctly.
Re-connect the signal Cable.
Place any excess Cable into the Lower Frame when re-installing the Keyboard.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-134 A/N Keyboard Mechanics replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-7-9 Upper OP (Operator Panel)/Touch Panel Assembly replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
15 minutes 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF. THE WRIST STRAP SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO ONE OF
THE TWO RECEPTACLES INTEGRATED ON THE FRAME, SPECIFICALLY FOR THAT
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the six Upper OP Knobs and the Upper Op.

• 8-7-9 "Upper OP (Operator Panel)/Touch Panel Assembly replacement" on page 8-117.
If you need more information, see:
• 8-7-6 "OP (Operator Panel) Knobs replacement" on page 8-109.

Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly removal
Table 8-137 Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly removal
1. Make sure the Upper OP is in its uppermost position, with the Main Monitor out of the way.
2. Remove the six Upper OP Encoder Knobs.
NOTICE
Failure to remove the six Upper OP Knobs first, could cause damage to the knob shafts.
3. At the rear of the Ultrasound System, XY-Mech release

release the XY-Mech (frogleg) by inserting
a 1.5 mm (1/16 inch) hex wrench, straight
into the release point and pressing until
released.
Pull the console out to its extended position
to gain access to the Upper OP screws.
4. Remove the four screws and washers

securing the Upper OP from the rear of the
Upper UI Frame, using a #2 Phillips
screwdriver.
5. NOTE: MAKE SURE the six OP Knobs have been removed.

Swing the Main Monitor to the side.
Tilt the top toward the front of the Ultrasound System and disconnect the cables at the back of
the OP.

Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly installation
Figure 8-2 Upper OP/Touch Panel assembly cable placement
P8 J24 UPPER OP 12 wide
B J25
5V D
P4 J21
USB USB
J17 J2
HU B
J23 J16 J1
A - ECB
J15 3.3V
12V 5V 3.3V
J6 +48V uP
REG
5V TOUCH E
J22 12w"
ECB CRX ETX128 ETX64 GRLY

VIDEO
CTRL
EPM
D C EB A
22
C
22
TEST CONNECTOR
J6 J5 J4
U2 C115
J7 1
C105
SP16 2 6
13 13 R15
A6P5 25
25 FP22 P1 3
R11
FP24 4 8
FL3
FL1
11
FL2
11
FL4
C113
R20
5 9
R23
U3
FL8
R25
FL7
FL6
FL5
J12 J8
D C EB A E D C A B E D C B A
25 25 25 25 25 25
1 1 B C D
A E FZ
D C EB A 19 19
11 11
C2
C1
14 14 A4P4
A3P4 A2P4
A6P4
15 15 15 15 15 15
11 11
C3
A5P4
C9
C8
1 E D C B A 11
1 11 11 11 11 11
C15
C7
C6
C5
J12
C10
D C EB A
C4
C11
C12
C13
C14
19 19
C19
C17
C16
C18
C21
C20
C22
C24
C26
C27
C23
C25
1 1
C28
Z A B C D E F
C29
C30
C31
C40
1 1
C41
1 D C EB A 1
C36
C42
C37
C39
C38
C44
C43
FP21
C33
C32
C34
C35
11 11
19
A6P3
C47
C50
C45
C46
C48
C49
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C59
J10 J11 J2 C57

C58
C61 C62
1 1 9 9 C60
C63
E D C B A
C68
C67
DG BG
22 22 1 DC BA
1
C66
C147
C65
C64
C148
C149
DG FG HG C150
C151 A2P3
E F G H 10 C152 A3P3
10 SP15 C153
C138
C179 1
C180 C155 1 1 1
C156 A4P3
C181 C157 22 22 E D C B A
C182 C158
C183 C159
C184 C160
C185 C161
C186 C162
A5P3 C187 FP8
11 11 C188
C189
A6P2 C190 10 10 FP10
C191
C192 FP12
C193
C194 R30 A3P2
DG
BG
FP25 SP14 1 DC BA
1 C163 R31
C195 1
Item Connection Item Connection
Upper OP - ON/OFF J1 from Lower OP

ECB - Video J6 to Up OP J22,
A D to J16
USB J15 to Up OP J21
USB J2 to Up OP J17
Bulk Head Board - Power P4 from

B E Lower OP - ON/OFF J1 to Up OP J16
Backplane
USB J2 to Up OP J17
USB P8 from Up OP J25
Backplane - Power J12 to Up OP J23

C
and to Bulk Head Board P4

Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly installation
Table 8-138 Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly installation
1. Position the Upper OP to the Upper UI

Frame, with the six Encoder holes centered
around the Encoders and tilted forward.
2. Connect the cables to the Upper OP.
Upper OP cables connected, see Figure 8-2 "Upper OP/Touch Panel assembly
cable placement" on page 8-119.
3. Slide the OP upward and re-install the four

screws and washers to secure the OP to
the Upper UI Frame. Torque 0.7 Nm
(0.52 lbf-ft).
4. The Knobs are keyed, notice that the joystick has a flat side to match the Knobs.
Re-install the six OP Knobs removed.
Before continuing, test the Encoders and Op Panel controls to ensure they operate properly. If
the Encoder seals are too close to the Encoder, the seals can cause the Encoder operation to
bind. If the seals are to high, the can limit the joystick operation. If the joystick operation is limited,
remove the Knob and gently press the seal(s) in.
Re-install the six OP Knobs and all Covers removed.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-139 Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly installation Functional Checks
See:

8-7-10 Lower OP (Operator Panel) replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly in order to remove the Lower
OP.


Lower OP removal
Table 8-142 Lower OP removal
1. Keep XY-Mech in the released state and the console extended forward to gain access to the
Lower OP screws. The screws are accessible from the bottom of the OP Lower Frame.
2. Remove the five longer, and the Lower OP shown removed

three shorter screws (S) that secure
the Lower OP to the Lower OP
Frame, using a #2 Phillips screw
driver.
Access the screws from the bottom.
3. Remove the ground cable, using a

#2 Phillips screw driver.

Table 8-142 Lower OP removal
4. Lift the front edge and gently flex

the Lower OP up and slide it slightly
up and away from the Lower OP
Frame.
Place the OP on an ESD safe place.

Lower OP installation
Table 8-143 Lower OP installation
1. Make sure the cables are

accessible before placing the OP
into position.
Slide the OP between Upper UI
Frame and the Lower OP Frame.
Lift the front edge and gently flex
the Lower OP up and slide the OP
into place. It should seat easily and
in place.
2. Re-install the screws to secure the Lower OP to the Lower OP Frame five longer (rear) and the
three shorter (front).
3. Re-install the Upper OP and all Covers removed.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-144 Lower OP replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks

8-7-11 Bulkhead Board replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly and the Bulkhead Cover.


Bulkhead Board removal
Table 8-147 Bulkhead Board removal
1. Disconnect the cables behind the Bulkhead

Plate:
• Monitor Video (HDMI) P10,
• Monitor Power P3,
• Gel Warmer P1, if present,
• Remove Monitor Adapter ground cable
(circled) from the Bulkhead Board.
Video P10 cable retainer clamp screw
(circled), to be removed in next step.
2. Disconnect the cables from the Bulkhead Board at the front of the console:
• Power P4 - slide locking latch to release,
• Speakers P5 (right) and P6 (left), filters may not be present,
• Video (HDMI) P10 - remove 5 mm screw (from back of Bulkhead Plate) to release cable
retainer,
• USB P8

Table 8-147 Bulkhead Board removal
3. Remove the two Bulkhead Board

grounding screws ad washers, using a #1
Phillips screwdriver.
Note how the board is installed under the
two tabs, slide the Bulkhead Board out.
Bulkhead Board installation

Figure 8-3 Bulkhead assembly cable placement
PWB
5482677 REV 3
P6 P3 L9 P1 P5
L2
P8
L4 L3 L6
2
L5 L7
BULKHEAD BOARD
PWA
5482676 VER B
P4
ASSEMBLED
IN
e1
Item Connection Item Connection
P5, P6 Speakers P5 (right) and P6 (left) P8 USB Upper OP

P3 Power / USB to Monitor P4 Power from Backplane
P1 Gel Warmer, if present

Bulkhead Board installation
Table 8-148 Bulkhead Board installation
1. Re-install the Bulkhead Board by sliding it

under the two tabs.
Re-install the two grounding screws and
washers. Torque 1.3 Nm (1.2 lbf-ft).
2. Reconnect the cables to the Bulkhead Board:

• Power P4 - slide locking latch to secure,
• USB P8,
• Speakers P5 (right) and P6 (left),
• Video (HDMI) P10 - re-install 5 mm screw (from back of Bulkhead Plate) to secure cable
retainer. Torque 1.3 Nm (1.2 lbf-ft).
(space intentionally left blank)

Table 8-148 Bulkhead Board installation
3. NOTICE
Be very careful when re-connecting the Video HDMI cable.

Avoid bending the delicate conductors, or cable damage may occur.
NOTICE
DO NOT connect the Monitor power cable to the power P2 or P3 connector on the
Bulkhead when the LOGIQ E10 is powered up. Damage to the Monitor Power Cable and/
or the Bulkhead Board can occur. See images below of damage that can occur.
Connect the remaining cables:

• Video (HDMI) P10,
• Power P3,
• Gel Warmer P1, if present
• Re-install Monitor Adapter ground cable
to the Bulkhead Board (circled).
4. Re-install the Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-149 Bulkhead Board replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks

8-7-12 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF. THE ESD WRIST STRAP SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO ONE
OF THE TWO RECEPTACLES INTEGRATED ON THE FRAME, SPECIFICALLY FOR THAT
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the:
• Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly,
• six OP Knobs,
• Upper OP,
• Speaker Assembly cables,
• Bulkhead Board,
• Lower OP.

• 8-7-13 "Cover, UI Upper Assembly (Speakers) replacement" on page 8-137.
• 8-7-11 "Bulkhead Board replacement" on page 8-127.

Bulkhead, Plate, Extended removal
Table 8-152 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended removal
1. The Bulkhead Plate is used to secure the

Upper UI Frame to the Lower UI Frame.
The OP Grounding Strap Clamp is used to
ground the Upper OP and Monitor Cables.
In addition, the P-clamp also grounds the
Monitor Video (HDMI P10).
NOTE: Mark the order of the cables, under
the Grounding Strap Clamp, before
removal. Marking the order will allow them
to be re-installed in the same location.
Remove the Grounding Strap Clamp, using
a 5 mm hex wrench and the P-clamp screw
and lock washer, using a #1 Phillips
screwdriver.
2. Remove the five fixing screws securing the

Bulkhead Plate, using a 5 mm hex wrench.
Note that the upper two screws are shorter.
• uppers 20 mm long
• middle 45 mm long
• lowers 25 mm long
Remove the Bulkhead Plate and the
Bulkhead Bracket Housing (behind the
plate).

Bulkhead, Plate, Extended installation
Table 8-153 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended installation
1. Position the Bulkhead Plate so it aligns with the holes for the fixing screws.
re-install the two upper shorter screws and the remaining three. Torque: 10 Nm (7.4 lbf-ft).
2. Re-install the P-clamp with the screw and

lock washer.
MAKE SURE the cables are grounded and
installed in the location they were removed.
Re-install the Clamp strap with the EMC
gasket facing down, with the screws
removed.
3. Re-install:
• Bulkhead Board,
• Speaker cables,
• Lower OP,
• Upper OP,
• OP Knobs,
• all Covers removed.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-154 Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 Color Mode Checks required checks and is ready for use.
4-2-7 PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks

8-7-13 Cover, UI Upper Assembly (Speakers) replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly, the Monitor, Monitor Arm and
Arm Adapter.

• 8-7-3 "Main Monitor Arm assembly replacement" on page 8-91.
• 8-7-4 "Main Monitor Arm Assembly Adapter replacement" on page 8-99.

Speaker Assembly removal
Table 8-157 Speaker Assembly removal
1. Note how the Speaker cables are routed

and connected.
Disconnect the Speaker Assembly cables
from the Bulkhead Board.
Speaker Assembly cable routing,
connections:
P5 - left
P6 - right
2. Remove the five screws securing the Cover

Assembly to the Upper OP Frame, using a
4 mm hex wrench. (View from UI Upper
Frame bottom.)
3. Lift the Cover straight up.

Speaker Assembly installation
Table 8-158 Speaker Assembly installation
1. Install the replacement assembly. Speaker Assembly connectors and

Make sure the Speaker cables are cable routing
positioned in front of the Speaker
Assembly.
Route the cables as shown and tuck the
cables as deep as possible into the Upper
UI Frame (under each Speaker to ensure
the cables DO NOT vibrate on the
Speakers.
Tucking the cables as deep as possible into
the Upper UI Frame in front of the Speaker
Assembly will ensure the cables DO NOT
get damaged when installing the Upper UI.
Connect Left to P6 and Right to P5.
2. Re-install the five screws to secure the Cover. Torque: 3.0 +/- Nm.
3. Re-install:
• Monitor Arm Adapter,
• Monitor Arm and Monitor,
• Upper OP,

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-159 Speaker replacement Functional Checks
See:
Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of
Section 6-3 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all
motion Adjustment procedure
Audio Check

8-7-14 Trackball Assembly replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the Upper OP/Touch Panel assembly and the Lower OP. Place it on
a clean surface with the front down.

• 8-7-10 "Lower OP (Operator Panel) replacement" on page 8-122.

Trackball Assembly removal
Table 8-162 Trackball Assembly removal
1. Disconnect the signal cable

connector from the Lower Switch
and Encoder Board.
from the board.
The Trackball includes the
Trackball Cable.
The Customer Removable
Trackball can be cleaned from the
top.
2. Remove the four screws securing

the Trackball Mounting Bracket to
the Bezel, using a #1 Phillips
Screwdriver.
3. Remove the two screws securing

the Trackball the Trackball
Mounting Bracket.
Note the orientation of the Cable in
the Bracket.

Trackball Assembly Installation
Table 8-163 Trackball Assembly Installation
1. Re-install the screws to secure the Trackball the Trackball Mounting Bracket.
Remember the orientation of the Cable in the Bracket.
2. Re-install the screws to secure the Trackball Mounting Bracket to the Bezel.
3. Connect the signal cable connector to the Lower Switch and Encoder Board.
4. Re-install Lower and Upper OP and all Covers removed.
Verification
4.) Verify that the Trackball operates as intended.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-164 Trackball Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-7-15 Lower Bezel replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Upper OP/Touch Panel assembly. Place it on a clean surface with the front down.
4. Remove the Lower OP, Silicone Keyboard Cover (which will include the Keyboard Mechanics), the Trackball and
the six Encoders for the Upper OP/Touch Panel.

• 8-7-7 "Silicone Keyboard Cover replacement" on page 8-111.

Lower Bezel removal
Table 8-167 Lower Bezel removal
1. Remove the OP knobs.

If possible, place them in their
relative position on a table, or other
place where you can keep them
until you start the re-installation.
Before you install the Bezel, you
should move the OP controls over
to the new Bezel, one by one. Y
PW
TVI
X Z
CW PDI
M CF
View
B
Flow
Esc
~ ?
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
1
F8 F9 F10
CHI
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = Abc
Auto
[ ] \
"
; ' Clear P4
Z X C V B N M < > ?
, . / Pg Up
P1 P2 P3
Home End Pg Dn
2. Disconnect the six Encoders for the

six Upper OP/Touch Panel.
Grasp the connector and pull
straight away from the board.
3. Loosen the Encoder nut, using a

24 mm socket or an adjustable
wrench and remove the nut.
Remove the remaining five.

Table 8-167 Lower Bezel removal
4. There are two separate boards.

Disconnect one end of the Signal
Cable between the two boards.
Make sure the Keyboard cable has
been disconnected.
It is not necessary to disconnect the
remaining cables.
5. Remove the 30 screws securing the boards to the Bezel, using a T10 Torx driver. KEEP the old
Bezel facing down.
There are 22 screws on Trackball board and 8 on the other board. (Complete board shown for
reference.)
6. Remove the boards and transfer the Op Panel controls the new Bezel, one at a time.

Lower Bezel Installation
Table 8-168 Lower Bezel Installation
1. Set the new Bezel in place.
2. Install the screws to reattach the Boards.

Re-connect the boards Signal Cable, re-install the removed Encoders and re-connect them.
Re-install the A/N Keyboard.
Before continuing, test the Encoders and Op Panel controls to ensure they operate properly. If
the Encoder seals are too close to the Encoder, the seals can cause the Encoder operation to
bind. If the seals are to high, the can limit the joystick operation.
3. Re-install the Lower OP, Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly (verify Encoder operation) and all
covers removed.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-169 Lower Bezel replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
Joysticks

8-7-16 Upper Op Encoders/Joysticks and Lower Op Encoders and Encoders/Joysticks

replacement
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Upper OP/Touch Panel assembly. Place it on a clean surface with the front down.
4. Remove the Lower OP and Trackball.

• 8-7-15 "Lower Bezel replacement" on page 8-144.

Upper Op Encoders/Joysticks
If replacing the Upper Op Encoders, ONLY remove the Upper Op and Lower Op, then replace the
Encoder(s). Follow Step in 8-7-15 "Lower Bezel replacement" on page 8-144 and Perform Functional
Checks.
Table 8-172 Upper Op Encoders/Joysticks replacement
1. Loosen the Encoder nut(s), using a

24 mm socket or an adjustable
wrench and remove the nut(s).
2. Disconnect the Encoder(s) for the

Upper OP/Touch Panel.
Grasp the connector and pull
straight away from the board.
3. Replace Encoder(s) as necessary. Secure the Encoder(s).
4. Re-install Lower Op, Upper Op and all Covers removed.

Lower Op Encoders/Joysticks
The four Mode Select (Concentric Shaft) Encoders adjust the M-mode, PW-mode, CF-Mode, and B-
Mode scans.
NOTE: This procedure you will essentially perform the same procedure as replacing the Lower Op
Bezel, except, DO NOT remove the:
• Six Encoders for the Upper OP/Touch Panel.

• Silicone Keyboard Cover and Keyboard Mechanics.
• Keyboard Board side circuit board.
Table 8-173 Lower Op Encoders and Encoders/Joysticks replacement
1. Fold back the elastomer to expose the nuts that secure the Encoders/Joysticks to the Lower
Switch and Encoder Board.
Mode Encoders circled - Use a 7/16 inch, deep socket wrench or 7/16 inch open-ended wrench
to loosen the nut(s).
Encoders/Joysticks (A) - use a 24 mm socket or an adjustable wrench and remove the nut(s).
Remove Encoder(s)/Joystick(s) as necessary.
Continued

Table 8-173 Lower Op Encoders and Encoders/Joysticks replacement
2. Re-install the elastomer. MAKE SURE the elastomer is completely seated on the board.
3. Replace Encoder(s)/Joystick(s) as necessary. Secure the Encoder(s)/Joystick(s).
4. Re-assemble Lower Op, re-install Lower Op, Upper Op and all Covers removed.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-174 Lower Op Encoders and Encoders/Joysticks replacement Functional

Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks

8-7-17 Upper OP Frame Assembly replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the:
• Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover,
• Main Monitor,
• Monitor Arm and Adapter,
• Speaker Assembly,
• Lower OP,
• Bulkhead Board.


Upper OP Frame removal
Table 8-177 Upper OP Frame removal
1. Remove the Grounding Strap

Clamp, using a 5 mm hex wrench
and the P-clamp screw and lock
washer, using a #1 Phillips
screwdriver.
2. Remove the five fixing screws

securing the Bulkhead Plate, using
a 5 mm hex wrench.
Note that the upper two screws are
shorter.
Bulkhead Bracket Housing (behind
the plate).
3. Re-install two screws loosely

(bottom) to hold the Lower UI
Frame when the Upper Frame is
removed.
NOTE: Support the Upper UI Frame
when the remaining screws are
removed.
Remove the two remaining screws
securing the Upper UI Frame to the
Lower UI Frame, using a 5 mm hex
wrench.

Upper OP Frame installation
Table 8-178 Upper OP Frame installation
1. Position the Upper OP Frame onto the Lower Frame.
2. Install the Upper Frame with the screws and washers removed.
3. Support the two Frames and remove the temporary screws. Continue to support the Frames to
install the Bulkhead Plate.
Re-install the Bulkhead Bracket Housing (behind the Bulkhead Plate) and install the Plate with
the two 20 mm at the top and the two 25 mm at the bottom. Torque: 4.3 Nm (3.2 lbf-ft).
4. Re-install the:
• Main Cable to the Lower OP,
• Grounding Strap Clamp. Torque: 4.3 Nm (3.2 lbf-ft).
• P-clamp screw and lock washer, using a #1 Phillips screwdriver.
• Bulkhead Board,
• Lower OP and Upper OP,
• Monitor Adapter, Monitor Arm and Monitor,
• Re-install all Covers removed.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-179 Upper OP Frame Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
OP I/O Movement - XY and Z-Mechanism

8-7-18 Lower OP Frame Assembly replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the:
• Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover,
• Main Monitor,
• Monitor Arm and Adapter,
• Upper OP/Touch Panel Assembly,
• Speaker Assembly,
• Lower OP,
• Bulkhead Plate and Bulkhead Housing Bracket,
• Upper UI Frame,
• Bulkhead Board.

• 8-7-17 "Upper OP Frame Assembly replacement" on page 8-152.

Lower OP Frame removal
Table 8-182 Lower OP Frame removal
1. Remove the Grounding Strap

Clamp, using a 5 mm hex wrench
and the P-clamp screw and lock
washer, using a #1 Phillips
screwdriver.
2. Remove the five fixing screws

securing the Bulkhead Plate, using
a 5 mm hex wrench.
Note that the upper two screws are
shorter.
Bulkhead Bracket Housing (behind
the plate).
3. Re-install two screws loosely

(bottom) to hold the Lower UI
Frame when the Upper Frame is
removed.
NOTE: Support the Upper UI Frame
when the remaining screws are
removed.
Remove the two remaining screws
securing the Upper UI Frame to the
Lower UI Frame, using a 5 mm hex
wrench.

Table 8-182 Lower OP Frame removal
4. From underneath the Lower Frame,

remove the two screws securing the
Main Cable Assembly to the Lower
UI Frame, using a #2 Phillips screw
driver.
Pull the Main Cables through the
Frame opening to free the Frame.
5. Remove the two screws temporarily installed to hold the Lower UI Frame, while supporting the
Lower UI Frame and remove the Frame.
Lower OP Frame installation
Table 8-183 Lower OP Frame installation
1. Position the Lower UI Frame and temporally install two screws to hold the Lower UI Frame when
attaching the Main Cable Assembly.
Feed the cables into the Lower UI Frame and re-install the two screws to secure the Main Cable
Assembly to the Lower Frame.
2. Re-install the Upper Frame.
3. Support the two frames and remove the temporary screws.

Continue to support the Frames to install the Bulkhead Plate.
Re-install the Bulkhead Bracket Housing (behind the Bulkhead Plate) and install the Plate with
the five screws removed. The upper two screws are shorter.
4. Install the:
• Main Cable to the Lower OP,
• Bulkhead Board,
• Lower OP and Upper OP,
• Monitor Adapter, Monitor Arm and Monitor,
• re-install all Covers removed.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-184 Lower OP Frame Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
OP I/O Movement - XY and Z-Mechanism

8-7-19 Palm Rest Cover replacement

The Palm Rest Cover is attached to the LOGIQ E10 with self-tapping screws. These screws are
screwed into plastic. Use care during installation, DO NOT overtighten.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the six OP Knobs, the Upper OP and Palm Rest Cover.


Palm Rest Cover replacement
Table 8-187 Palm Rest Cover replacement
1. Remove the six OP Knobs.
NOTICE
Failure to remove the six OP Knobs first, could cause damage to the knob shafts.
2. Remove the Upper OP.
3. Remove the two screws from under the

Palm Rest, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
Remove the Palm Rest Cover.
4. Make sure the XYZ Buttons cable runs along the Lower OP cable channel, as shown so the cable
is not pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced.
Install the replacement cover and screws.
These screws are screwed into plastic. Use care during installation, DO NOT overtighten.
5. Re-install Lower OP, Upper OP and all Covers removed.

Verification
4.) Operate the XY and Z Controls to verify operation as intended.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-188 Palm Rest Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
Operator I/O Movement - XY and
Z-Mechanism

8-7-20 Left Handle Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the six OP Knobs, the Upper OP, the Lower OP and the Palm Rest.

• 8-7-19 "Palm Rest Cover replacement" on page 8-160.

Left Handle Cover removal / installation
Table 8-191 Left Handle Cover removal
NOTICE
2. Remove the:
• Upper OP,
• Lower OP,
• Palm Rest.
3. Release the:
• lock mechanisms (1) from the top Left Handle Cover,
• lock mechanisms (2) from the bottom Left Handle Cover.
Table 8-192 Left Handle Cover installation
1. Position:
• bottom Left Handle Cover and secure with locking mechanisms.
• top Left Handle Cover and secure with locking mechanisms.
2. Re-install:
• Palm Rest.
• Lower OP.
• Upper OP,

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-193 Left Handle Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-7-21 Right Handle Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
ONE OF THE TWO RECEPTACLES INTEGRATED ON THE FRAME, SPECIFICALLY
FOR THAT PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.
Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the six OP Knobs, the Upper OP, the Lower OP and the Palm Rest.


Right Handle Cover removal / installation
Table 8-196 Right Handle Cover removal
NOTICE
2. Remove the:
• Upper OP.
• Lower OP.
• Palm Rest.
3. Release:
• the lock mechanisms (1) from the top Right Handle Cover.
• the lock mechanisms (2) from the bottom Right Handle Cover.
Table 8-197 Right Handle Cover installation
1. Position:
• bottom Right Handle Cover and secure with locking mechanisms.
• top Right Handle Cover and secure with locking mechanisms.
2. Re-install:
• Palm Rest.
• Lower OP.
• Upper OP.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-198 Right Handle Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-7-22 Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement

The Options Holder (the Left Support or Right Support) is the base piece that attaches to the upper
console to support either a Transvaginal Probe Holder, a Gel Warmer, or a Storage Tray. The
Ultrasound System can support one Left Options Holder and one Right Options Holder at the same time.
A Right Options Holder comes standard with the Ultrasound System, with the Gel Warmer (48V).
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover and the Battery Cover. If the Options Holder is supporting the Gel Warmer, remove the
Gel Warmer first (see: 8-7-23 "Gel Warmer replacement" on page 8-173).
Separate and remove the Storage Tray or Transvaginal Probe Holder from the Options Holder, if applicable.

• 8-7-24 "Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement" on page 8-177.

Options Holder removal
Table 8-201 Options Holder removal
1. From underneath the Upper Console,

remove the three screws securing the
Options Holder.
Screws, underneath Upper Console - Gel

Warmer and Option Holder shown.
Remove the Options Holder from the Upper
Console.

Options Holder installation
NOTE: If this Options Holder will be supporting a Gel Warmer, place the Gel Warmer in the Options
Holder first, then install the Gel Warmer to the Options Holder.
Make sure the Gel Warmer cable fits in the cable channels and is not pinched.
Table 8-202 Options Holder installation
1. Position the Options Holder in place.

Make sure the Gel Warmer cable fits in the cable channels and is not pinched.
2. Re-install the three screws to secure the Options Holder. Torque: 1.5 Nm (1.1 lbf-ft).
3. Re-install the Storage Tray or Transvaginal Probe Holder to the Options Holder, if applicable.
Re-install all Covers removed.

Verification
4.) If a Gel Warmer is installed in the Options Holder, see: additional Verification and Functional
Checks for Gel Warmer (see: 8-7-23 "Gel Warmer replacement" on page 8-173).
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-203 Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-7-23 Gel Warmer replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover and the Bulkhead Cover.


Gel Warmer removal
Table 8-206 Gel Warmer removal
1. Disconnect the Gel Warmer cable from (P1) on the back of the bulkhead.
The Gel Warmer cable is routed through the cable channel (1) and the Lower Frame support (2).
Pull the Gel Warmer cable through the Lower Frame cable support to free the cable.
2. Remove the Options Holder (see: 8-7-22 "Options Holder / Left or Right Support replacement"
on page 8-169).
Options Holder removed, with Gel Warmer in place
3. Remove the two screws at the Gel Warmer base.

Lift the Gel Warmer out of the Options Holder.

Gel Warmer installation
Table 8-207 Gel Warmer installation
1. Place the Gel Warmer in the Options Holder, routing the cable through the cutout (1) between
the Options Holder and Gel Warmer and through the cable channel (2).
BE CAREFUL not to pinch the wires.
2. Install the two screws at the Gel Warmer base, securing the Gel Warmer to the Options Holder.
Torque: 1.5 Nm (1.1 lbf-ft).
3. Install Options Holder.
4. Route Gel Warmer cable through the Lower Frame cable support.
5. Connect Gel Warmer cable to the bulkhead.
6. Re-install Bulkhead Cover and all cover removed.

Temperature is preset to its highest level: 38 degrees C (+/-2 degrees C). It is recommended to retain
default setting.
User can turn dial to adjust the temperature to its lowest level: 32 degrees C (+/-2 degrees C).
Verification
4.) Place a closed bottle of gel, applicator end first, in the gel warmer. Verify warmer is operational.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-208 Gel Warmer replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-7-24 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder replacement

The Storage Tray and Transvaginal Probe Holder rests inside the Options Holder base and are
interchangeable. They can also replace the Gel Warmer. See: 8-7-23 "Gel Warmer replacement" on
page 8-173 and 8-7-25 "Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV/TR Probe Holder" on page
8-179.
Follow this procedure for replacement, or replacing a tray with a Probe Holder or a Probe Holder with a
tray.
Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder removal
Table 8-209 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder removal
1. Locate the two prongs below the tray or

Probe Holder.
2. Squeeze the two prongs together, then lift

the tray or Probe Holder off the
LOGIQ E10.

Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder installation
Table 8-210 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder installation
1. Seat the tray or Probe Holder tab into the options holder base and snap into place.

8-7-25 Replacing the Gel Warmer with a Storage Tray or TV/TR Probe Holder
Follow these instructions when removing the Gel Warmer and replacing it with a Storage Tray or a TV/
TR Tray.
Gel Warmer replacement
Before starting this procedure, see: 8-7-23 "Gel Warmer replacement" on page 8-173.
Table 8-211 Storage Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder installation
1. Remove the Gel Warmer.

Seat the tray tab into the options holder base and snap into place (see: Table 8-210 "Storage
Tray / Transvaginal Probe Holder installation" on page 8-178.

8-7-26 XYZ Buttons replacement

The XYZ Buttons, located on the palm rest, control the XY (frogleg) and Z (up/down) movement.
Push the left button, and then reposition the XY (horizontal) location of the Upper Console. Three
seconds after pushing the left button, the four motors in the XY frog leg lock to stabilize the console.
Toggle the right button to reposition the Z (vertical) location of the Upper Console. Toggle up to raise,
or down to lower, the console.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, the six OP Knobs, the Upper OP, Lower Op and Palm Rest.


XYZ Buttons replacement
Table 8-214 XYZ Buttons removal
NOTICE
2. Note the location of the cable for the XYZ

Buttons cable, in the Lower Op Frame
cable channels so the cable does not get
pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced.
Note that there are three “clips“ as part of
the Lower OP Frame to retain the cable as
it is routed to the USB connector. MAKE
SURE the cable is retained in these “clips.“
Disconnect the cable, connected to the
back of the XYZ Buttons (2).
The lower OP.does not have to be
completely removed, only three screws
secure the palm rest.
3. Gently pop the XYZ Buttons out of the Palm Rest section of the Lower OP Frame handle.
Table 8-215 XYZ Buttons installation
1. Connect the cable to the XYZ Buttons.

Insert the XYZ Buttons into the Palm Rest section of the Lower OP Frame handle.
Make sure the XYZ Buttons cable runs along the Lower OP cable channel and is retained in the
“clips“ to retain the cable, as removed so the cable is not pinched when the Palm Rest is
replaced.
2. Re-install the Palm Rest, Lower OP, Upper OP and all Covers removed.

Verification
4.) Operate the XY and Z Controls to verify operation as intended.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-216 XYZ Buttons replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
4-2-7 Basic Measurements 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all
Operator I/O Movement - XY and required checks and is ready for use.
Z-Mechanism
4-2-6
Checks

8-7-27 Probe Cable Hooks replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person / • LOCTITE 242 (LOCTITE P/N 24221). See:
15 minutes "Material Safety Data Sheet link for LOCTITE 242:" on page 8-183 to access data
sheet.
LOCTITE 242 can be obtained from Grainger.
• Grainger item number 5A228.
Material Safety Data Sheet link for LOCTITE 242:
• Copy URL into browser for Healthcare SDS System:

- http://gensuite.ge.com/geh/ehs/msds/msds.cfm?sno=W.137-116
Probe Cable Hooks replacement
Table 8-218 Probe Cable Hooks replacement
1. Unscrew the fastening screw.

The screw may be locked with LOCTITE,
so you may need to apply a little extra
force.
Remove the Cable Hook(s).
2. Position replacement Probe Cable Hooks and fix it in place by using the M5x20 screw and M6
washer removed. Apply LOCTITE 242.
Torque: 50 Ncm (0.37 lbf-ft or 4.4 lbf-in) (fingertight).

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-219 Probe Cable Hooks replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
4-2-7 Color Mode Checks 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all

Section 8-8
Replacing XYZ Parts
This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts in the Main Console.

8-8-2 XY Brake Motor replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-186
8-8-3 XY-Mechanism replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-192
8-8-4 Z-Mechanism replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-199
8-8-5 Drive Gear Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-208
8-8-6 XYZ Control Assembly replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-213

8-8-2 XY Brake Motor replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One Person / Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6 /

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11


• Section 8-6 "Replacing Covers and Bumpers" on page 8-29.
8 - 186 Section 8-8 - Replacing XYZ Parts

8-8-2 XY Brake Motor replacement (cont’d)
How XY Brake Motor Assembly is Packaged

P/N 5737394 is packaged in four pieces:
The XY Hinge (A) rests on the Motor
A. XY Hinge MAKE SURE to have the XY Hinge resting
Assembly (B) and it MUST be in that
B. Motor Assembly on the Motor Assembly and the Tension
position and the Tension Adjustment
C. Tension Adjustment Screw Adjustment Screw installed during the
Screw MUST be installed when the
D. Roller (threaded) Assembly installation.
Assembly is installed.
(packaging material, not shown)

8-8-2 XY Brake Motor replacement (cont’d)

1. Raise the console to its highest position before shutting down the system.
2. Press the power button to shutdown the unit. Ignore any message regarding the console being unlocked if
the console is not locked in the parking position.
3. While the system is powering down, push and hold
the XY unlock pushbutton (circled) on the front of
the controls console, to release the brakes inside of
the XY "frogleg" assembly.
NOTE: This step is necessary to make brake
removal easier. Do not omit this step.
4. Release the console from the park lock, if not already

released as follows:
Insert a 1/16" Allen wrench into the froglegs
assembly release hole. Push the wrench in until an
audible “click” may be heard, then fully expand the
froglegs.
5. After the system is powered down, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
6. Identify which lock motor needs to be replaced and
remove the corresponding cover, using a T-10
driver:
One TORX-head screw (6) to remove the forward
cover and two TORX-head screws (6a) to remove
the back cover.
7. Disconnect the wire connectors (7) to make sure the

brake assembly stays released.


8. Turn the tension adjustment screw (8), so that the
flat side faces the brake shoe (8a), to further release
the lock (brake) motor assembly.
NOTE: When replacing the brake on the right rear
side (A) and the brake on the left front side (B), the
tension adjustment screw (C) turns counter-
clockwise.
When replacing the brake on the right front side (A)
and the brake on the left rear side (B), the tension
adjustment screw (D) turns clockwise.
After the motor assembly is released, loosen the

retaining screw (8b) a little, then gently pry up on the
XY Hinge (8c) with a flat blade screwdriver. Alternate
both steps until the brake can be rocked out
completely.
The brake assembly needs to be gently pried out on
both ends, a little at a time, to rock it out of the arm
cavity.
(Alignment for removal {E}).
9. Before installing the new lock motor and after the old
motor assembly is removed, place a piece of sticky
tape (circled) on the tension adjustment screw on the
replacement motor. The tape is for holding the screw
in place and keep it from falling, while inserting the
motor into the frogleg arm.
NOTE: Remove the tape after the replacement brake
is secured into the frogleg.
10. Install a new lock motor assembly by aligning the XY

Hinge (10) into the slot in the brake shoe (10a).
When the lock motor assembly is properly aligned
and inserted, push the assembly in by the XY Hinge
as the retaining screw (10b) is tightened.
NOTE: The lock assembly may have to be rocked in
from side-to-side and end-to-end for proper
insertion.
11. Reconnect the wire connectors from the lock motor assembly to the frogleg wiring (refer to Step 7 for
reference).
12. Plug the power cord back into the wall outlet and power up the system.


13. This step is intended for adjusting the motor tension,
to make sure the lock motor operates properly.
Push and hold the XY unlock push-button on the
front of the controls console (see Step 3 for
reference), to keep the lock motor assembly
released.
At the same time, with a flat blade screwdriver, turn
the tension adjustment screw (13) clockwise, so that
the flat side of the screw faces away from the brake
shoe (13a).
NOTE: See Note in Step 8 for proper adjustment of
the tension screw, if needed.
14. Push the XY unlock push-button and confirm that the replaced lock motor(s) expands and releases.
Release the XY unlock push-button and confirm the lock motor(s) stay locked.
15. Replace the plastic flogleg cover(s) and secure each with the same TORX retaining screws used in Step 6.
Torque to 1 Nm.

If it is difficult to lock the XY-Mechanism in parked position, the locking mechanism need adjustments.
For Operator Panel adjustments, see: Section 6-4 "Operator Panel movement" on page 6-13.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-222 XY Brake Motor replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-5 Top Console checks 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all

8-8-3 XY-Mechanism replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One Person / Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6 /
2 Hours 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical contacts,
conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal
and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential for storing energy
must be discharged or isolated before making contact.
IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT, MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE CAPACITOR
PACK ARE OFF.
Prior to removing the Card Rack Boards, the LEDs on the end of each board should be unlit, to
indicate boards are NOT powered.
DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE
OF THE TWO RECEPTICALS INTEGRATED ON THE FRAME, SPECIFICALLY FOR THAT
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the:
• Side Covers, and Battery Cover,
• Monitor Rear Cover, Main Monitor assembly, Monitor Arm assembly and Monitor Arm Adapter,
• Upper OP and Lower OP,
• Bulkhead Board and Bulkhead Plate,
• Upper and Lower Frame.


• 8-7-12 "Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement" on page 8-133.
• 8-7-18 "Lower OP Frame Assembly replacement" on page 8-156.
Figure 8-4 XY-Mechanism

XY-Mechanism removal
Table 8-225 XY-Mechanism removal
Step Corresponding Graphic

1. The operator console can drop Z-Mechanism Manual release lever
unexpectedly when the Z-Mechanism is
released or bumped while working near
this and the Back Cover is off.
Be aware of this if the Z-Mech has
become warn or has weakened.
If you suspect the Z-Mech is warn or has
weakened, it should be replaced.
WARNING
2. Lock the Caster Brakes.
3. Remove the rear Brake Motor Covers, using a T-10 driver.
Carefully disconnect the rear Brake Motors and the ground cables, using a 4 mm hex wrench.


4. The screws are located in the front of the
Bumper (A).
The screws MUST BE removed or
damage to the Bumper can occur.
Remove to two screws securing the

Bumper Boss on the Z-Mech, using a
short #2 Phillips screw driver.
Remove the Bumper (A) by gently

grasping on the outer top, leading edge of
the Bumper.
Disconnect the connector to the Park
Lock.


5. Remove the four screws (B) securing the XY-Mech to the Z-Mech using a 6 mm driver, with an
extension.
6. Disconnect the connector from Park Lock.

7. Carefully lift the XY-Mech, while guiding out the connector to the Park Lock.

XY-Mechanism installation
Table 8-226 XY-Mechanism installation

1. Position the XY-Mech and guide the Park Lock connector into the Z-Mech and align XY-Mech
with the four guides.on top of the Z-Mech.
2. Install the four fixing screws, but DO NOT tighten them.
3. Re-connect the Park Lock cable.
Remove the rear Brake Motor Covers, connect the rear Brake Motors and the ground cables.
Re-install the Covers. Torque to 1 Nm.
4. Tilt the XY-Mech forward to insert the leading edge of the Bumper between the XY-Mech and
Z-Mech.
5. Tighten the four screws to secure the XY-Mech to the Z-Mech. Torque to 24 Nm (17.7 lbf-ft).
6. Re-install the two screws to secure the Bumper to the Z-Mech.
7. Re-install Lower and Upper Frame Assemblies.
8. Re-install Bulkhead Plate and Bulkhead Board.
9. Re-install the Lower OP and Upper OP.
10. Re-install Monitor Arm Adapter, Monitor Arm, Monitor and monitor Rear Cover.

If it is difficult to lock the XY-Mechanism in parked position, the locking mechanism need adjustments.
For Operator Panel adjustments, see: Section 6-4 "Operator Panel movement" on page 6-13.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-227 XY-Mechanism replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
Gel Warmer Check
Operator Functional Check LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
Run ECB I/O Diagnostics to Check
Audio Speakers
4-2-6
Checks

8-8-4 Z-Mechanism replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
Two Persons / Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6 /
4-6 Hours 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11


3. Remove the:
• Side Covers, Battery Cover and Top Cover,
• Monitor Rear Cover, Main Monitor assembly, Monitor Arm assembly and Monitor Arm Adapter.
• Upper OP and Lower OP.
• Bulkhead Board and Bulkhead Plate.
• Upper and Lower Frame.
• XY-Mech.
4. Remove the XYZ Control Box and the plate on top of XYZ Control.

• 8-7-18 "Lower OP Frame Assembly replacement" on page 8-156.
• 8-7-12 "Bulkhead, Plate, Extended replacement" on page 8-133.
• 8-8-3 "XY-Mechanism replacement" on page 8-192.
• 8-8-6 "XYZ Control Assembly replacement" on page 8-213.
Figure 8-5 Z-Mechanism

Z-Mechanism removal
Table 8-230 Z-Mechanism removal

1. The operator console can drop Z-Mechanism Manual release lever
unexpectedly when the Z-Mechanism is
released or bumped while working near
this and the Back Cover is off.
Be aware of this if the Z-Mech has
become warn or has weakened.
If you suspect the Z-Mech is warn or has
weakened, it should be replaced.
WARNING
2. Remove the four screws securing the
Main Cable Cover and the Column Cover,
using a #2 Phillips screw driver.
Support the Column Cover when the
screws are removed so the Cover does
not fall.
The right side, rear screw can be
accessed through the hole in the Drive
Gear housing.
3. Take note on how the Cables are routed, they MUST BE returned to the same location.
Remove the screws securing the Ground P-clamp, (A) Cable Clamps (B) and the
screw (C) securing the XYZ Motor Controller, using a #2 Phillips screw driver.

4. Disconnect all of the Main Cable Harness connections from the ECB - ECB J5, ECB J6,
ECB J15 and MOTOR CTRL (Button Interface), and power from BACKPLANE J12.
5. Disconnect the remaining cabling to the XYZ Motor Controller, USB Interface, Lock Motor
Z motor, Brakes and remove the grounds cables.
If the Brake Cable are not identified (left / right), mark them to ensure they are connected
correctly later.
6. Remove the Main Cable Harness from the
top of the Z-Mech, using a 5 mm hex
wrench.
Note how the XY-Mech Brake cables are
routed.
Feed all the cables through the Z-Mech.
7. Remove the screws (D) securing the right and left Cable Harness Brackets, using a 4 mm hex
wrench.

8. Remove the four screws and washers

securing the left side of the Z-Mech, using
a 5 mm hex wrench.
9. Remove the Drive Gear Assembly.


10. Remove the two screws and washers
securing the right side of the Z-Mech,
using a 5 mm hex wrench.
11. With both hands and possibly some help, lift the Z-Mech straight up off the Frame.

Z-Mechanism installation
Table 8-231 Z-Mechanism installation

1. Position the Z-Mech, so the holes for the fixing screws align.
Re-install the right and left Cable Harness Brackets and the five Countersunk screws, DO NOT
tighten.
Re-install the remaining six screws and washers, DO NOT tighten.
Torque top five screws to 10 Nm {7.4 lbf-ft}) and the six screws to screws 10 Nm
{7.4 lbf-ft}).
2. Make sure the XY-Mech Brake cables are
going to the correct Brakes and re-install
the Main Cable Harness to the Z-Mech
and XY-Mech. Torque to
1.5 Nm +/-10%.
3. The Cables MUST BE returned to the same location and channeled under the Cable Cover.
Re-install the screws to secure the Ground P-clamp, (A) Cable Clamps (B) and the
screw (C) securing the XYZ Motor Controller, DO NOT tighten the Clamps until the Main Cable
Cover and the Column Cover are installed, to ensure there is enough slack for the Covers to be
installed. Install Covers and tighten Clamps.

Table 8-231 Z-Mechanism installation

4. Re-install the XYZ Motor Controller.
5. Re-install the Lower and Upper Frame.
6. Re-install Bulkhead Plate and Bulkhead Board.
7. Re-install the Lower and Upper Op.
8. Re-install Monitor Arm Adapter, Monitor Arm, Monitor and monitor Rear Cover.
9. Re-connect all the Main Harness Cabling.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-232 Z-Mechanism replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
Gel Warmer Check LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
Operator Functional Check
Run ECB I/O Diagnostics to Check
Audio Speakers

8-8-5 Drive Gear Assembly replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
Two People / Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6 /
30-45 minutes 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11
NOTE: There is need to disconnect the Probes, they are probably safest if kept on the LOGIQ E10. The External I/O
Cabling does not need to be removed unless it is in the way.
1. While the LOGIQ E10 is powered up, move the Operator Interface up and towards the user.
4. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, Top Cover and the Rear Cover.


• 8-6-7 "Rear Cover/Air Exhaust replacement" on page 8-45
Figure 8-6 Drive Gear Assembly
NOTE: Two people are recommended for this procedure because it is very difficult for one person to
position the motor and wiggle the Top Console assembly at the same time; the second person
does not need to be a trained FE or do any lifting.

Drive Gear Assembly removal
Table 8-235 Drive Gear Assembly removal

1. The Drive Gear can be removed by Slot on Drive Gear
guiding the release lever as the drive
motor is being removed from the
Ultrasound System.
2. The Drive Gear Assembly is a part of the

Z-Mechanism. To remove the Drive Gear
Assembly. 1
Place a piece of paper on top of the Card
Rack to prevent any debris which may
have developed from Drive Gear 2
Assembly.
Disconnect the motor cable from the XYZ
1
Control Box and the Volume Navigation
ground lead, if present. 1
Unscrew and remove the four fixing
screws (1). Use a 5 mm L-Allen wrench
with a Ball Head to take off the whole
assembly (four bolts).
Push the release lever (2) to its maximum.

Drive Gear Assembly installation
Table 8-236 Drive Gear Assembly installation

1. NOTE: When attaching the replacement Drive Gear Assembly placement
assembly, you need to carefully work the
new assembly into place, wiggling the
motor assembly and the Top Console until
the shaft slides into the bearing.
Insert the Drive Gear assembly in the front
top, checking that the lever and motor
body are not wedged on the Frame. Install
it from the top and at an angle, ensuring
that the release lever goes through the
release lever opening in the back of the
LOGIQ E10.
You may need to either operate the
Z-Mech release lever when positioning, or
move the Top Console slightly up or down
to engage the teeth on the wheel with the
teeth on the gear.
Install the four fixing screws with washers.
(M6 x 16, torque: 9.5 Nm {7.0 lbf-ft}.)
2. Connect the motor cable from the XYZ Control Box and the Volume Navigation ground lead, if
present.
Power up the Ultrasound System and verify that the XYZ function as intended.
Power down the Ultrasound System.

Verification
2.) Connect cables and Probes if removed earlier.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-237 Drive Gear Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-8-6 XYZ Control Assembly replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
Two People / Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6 /
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.
Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet, all probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, Top Cover and the Rear Cover.
• 8-6-7 "Rear Cover/Air Exhaust replacement" on page 8-45

8-8-6 XYZ Control Assembly replacement (cont’d)

Figure 8-7 XYZ Control Assembly
XYZ Control Assembly removal
NOTE: There is a USB cable connected to the XYZ Controller, from J11 of the ECB. The cable must
also be removed from the USB port labeled USB Interface of the controller.
Table 8-240 XYZ Control Assembly removal

1. Take note of how the cables are
positioned in the grounding clamp, the
cables MUST BE returned in the same
manner.
Disconnect the cables to the XYZ Control
Assembly.
Remove the two screws securing the XYZ
Control and cable clamp.
2. Pull the top of the XYZ Control Assembly forwards, away and up from the bracket.

XYZ Control Assembly installation
Table 8-241 XYZ Control Assembly installation

1. Thread the XYZ Control Assembly into position.
2. Connect the cables to the XYZ Control
Assembly.
USB Left
ICSP Button Interface Brakes
Interface Interface
Right
Brakes
Reset
5438170 R1
Prog Lock
Motor
Z motor
48 V
3. Install the five countersunk screws at the top, rear, if they have been removed as part of
Z-Mechanism replacement. Torque: 9.8 Nm (7.2 lbf-ft).
Install the two screws to secure the cable on the top. (M4x8, sunken. Torque: 4.9 Nm {3.6 lbf-
ft}).

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-242 XYZ Control Assembly replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-5 Top Console checks required checks and is ready for use.

Section 8-9
Main Console parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts in the Main Console.

8-9-2 Subwoofer replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-218

8-9-2 Subwoofer replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS

EQUIPMENT. DO NOT REMOVE THE CAPACITOR PACK COVER.
PACK ARE OFF BEFORE REMOVING THE CAPACITOR PACK.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.
Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover and all Options and cabling within the Option Box.
8 - 218 Section 8-9 - Main Console parts replacement

Subwoofer removal
CAUTION
During this procedure, wear cut resistant gloves to avoid scraping your hands when
reaching into the Main Console or blind spaces.
Table 8-245 Subwoofer removal

1. Remove all Options within the Option Box. Options installed
Place all the Options on an ESD safe
place.
Disconnect all cabling to the Backplane.
NOTE: The flange nuts and screws
securing the Option covers are 7 mm and
#2 Phillips. All Options may not be present.
All the flange nuts and screws for the
Option covers, can be removed at once, if
desired. The Shear Wave Capacitor Pack
is the only Option in the Option Box that
DOES NOT have a removable cover.
Options and cabling removed
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the

ECG (Patient I/O Module) or the Rear I/O,
but the USB Cable at the bottom of the
Rear I/O, and all other cabling will have to
be removed.
Proceed to the next step for removing the
Options.


2. Remove the two flange nuts securing the
Battery Cover to the Option Bracket, using
a 7 mm driver.
Remove the Cover.
3. Disconnect the from the Backplane:

the Batteries power J10 and J11, and the
signal/communication connections J13
and J14.
NOTE: The power J10 and J11
connections of the Batteries MUST BE
DISCONNECTED as part of the Energy
Control and Power Lockout for the
LOGIQ E10.
Remove the batteries.


4. Remove the flange nut securing the Battery
Bracket to the Option Bracket.
Remove the Bracket.
5. Remove the screw securing the Subwoofer

audio cable grounding clamp to the Option
Box.
Place the cable and clamp below the
Option Box.


4D Motor Controller Cover, using a 7 mm
driver and slide the Cover out.
7. Remove the two screws securing the 4D

Motor Controller, using a #1 Phillips
screwdriver. DO NOT discard the two
screws.
The 4D Motor Controller connects to the
Backplane on the right end.
With your thumb and index finger, gently
grasp the Board at the right top and bottom,
and gently remove the Board from the
Backplane.
8. DANGER
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS
Remove the three flange nuts securing the

Shear Wave Capacitor Pack.
The Capacitor Pack will support itself on
the options bracket.
With both hands, slide the Capacitor Pack
from the Backplane.


9. There are 9 flange nuts that secure the
Option Box to the Option Bracket (three are
underneath). ONLY SIX have to be
removed. The lower three only have to be
loosened.
Loosen the lower three and remove the six,
using a 7 mm driver.
A A A
Rear I/O USB Cable
NOTE: Be aware, the Subwoofer magnet
may draw the Option Box to it, as it is
removed.
Lift the Option Box up slightly and turn it
away from the Main Power Supply to
access the USB Cable from the bottom of
the Rear I/O. Remove the USB Cable and
continue to remove the Option Box away
from the Card Cage.


10. NOTE: The Option Bracket is removed to
show J9. It is not necessary to remove the
Option Bracket.
Disconnect the Subwoofer audio cable
from J9 on the Backplane.
Remove the six screws securing the
Subwoofer to the Base Casting, using a #2
Phillips screwdriver.
Note the location of the Subwoofer
orientation and the Subwoofer to Base
Casting ground lead, it they should be
returned in the same location.
Transfer the Audio Cable to the
replacement Subwoofer. Be sure to
connect the Audio Cable, ground to ground
and positive to positive.
If you suspect the Audio Cable is faulty,
replace it.
Subwoofer installation
Table 8-246 Subwoofer installation

1. Position the Subwoofer and Subwoofer to Base Casting ground lead to the location they were
removed.
Re-install the six screws to secure the Subwoofer to the Base Casting.
Torque 0.6 N-m {0.4 lbf-ft}).
Connect the Audio Cable to J9 on the Backplane.
2. Re-install the Option Box.
Re-install the screw to secure the Subwoofer Audio Cable grounding clamp to the Option Box.
Re-install all Options and Cabling removed. Torque all the flange nuts to 1.5 Nm (1.1 lbf-ft) and
screws to 1.1 Nm (0.8 lbf-ft), unless otherwise specified.

Verification
4.) Turn the volume control on at the OP.
5.) Select PW mode and press on the selected Probe to ensure the Subwoofer produces sound.

Functional Checks
to the customer.
NOTE: NOT ALL functional checks will have to be repeated, if the functional check was performed
when the previous Option was re-installed. If ONLY a particular Option was removed, perform
the functional checks for the Subwoofer replacement and that particular Option.
Table 8-247 Subwoofer replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
Power SHUT DOWN LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
4-2-4 DO NOT POWER SHUT DOWN until ALL
functional checks have been performed.
Verify Options re-installed are functioning.
In addition: Perform the following functional checks if
the Option was or Options were removed during
Subwoofer replacement.
4D
Perform a 4D sweep
CW LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Leakage Current
PW/CW Doppler Mode Checks measured at (record the value) and meets
4-2-7
use pencil probes allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
checks and is ready for use.
Continued

Table 8-247 Subwoofer replacement Functional Checks
See:
ECG
4-2-7
use pencil probes
10-7-7
lead to ground
Isolated patient lead (source) leakage–
10-7-8
lead to lead
10-7-9
isolation test
ECG Checks
Active ECG:
Settings -> ECG -> Show ECG Tools.
Connect cables. Press Display ECG Tab LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
4-2-7
on TP. Verify ECG signal displayed on 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Leakage Current
monitor. measured at (record the value) and meets
Plug in the ECG cables with nothing allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
attached so they pick up noise. checks and is ready for use.
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Shear Wave Elastography (Shear Elasto)
4-2-7
Functional Checks
Power Assistant
Verify Power Assistant Option functions
Shear Wave
4-2-7
Functional Checks
removed.

Section 8-10
Casters and Brakes replacement
This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts for the Casters and Brakes.

8-10-2 Rear Caster(s) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-229
8-10-3 Front Caster(s) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-232
8-10-4 Caster Hubcap replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-236
8-10-5 Pedal Mechanism replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-239
8-10-6 Pedal Mechanism Cam FRU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-244
8-10-7 Pedal Mechanism Covers replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-250
8 - 228 Section 8-10 - Casters and Brakes replacement

8-10-2 Rear Caster(s) replacement

NOTE: If you suspect the Caster not being replaced is damaged from wear and tear or age, replace
both.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
Two people / This procedure requires:
30 minutes • Wheel Change Kit, P/N FC200829.
• an extended hex wrench (UNBRAKO / 10 mm hex wrench or the torque wrench
used to torque) due to the high torque: 130 Nm {95.9 lbf-ft}.
WARNING Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating Operator Panel is locked in its lowest,
parking position.
Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ E10 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.
CAUTION
Use extreme caution as when the LOGIQ E10 is un-stable, NOT RESTING on all four Casters.
1. Lock Operator Panel in its lowest, parking position.

4. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover and the Rear Bumper.

• 8-6-8 "Rear Bumper/Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement" on page 8-49.

Rear Caster(s) removal
Table 8-250 Rear Caster(s) removal

1. Turn Front Casters so they are pointing forward.
Activate the Direction Lock.
Using a torque wrench and 10 mm driver, break the bolt loose.
2. Put the Bevel Edged Board (A) of the Wheel Change Kit (A+B) on the floor.
3. NOTE: Prior to elevating LOGIQ E10, verify the Operator Panel is locked in its lowest, parked
position.
C The Caster not being replaced; pull the Ultrasound System backwards on that Caster, onto the
L
Bevel Edged Board (A). This will lift the other Rear Caster off the floor.
Turn the Rear Caster on the Bevel Edged Board in the direction as shown (away {C} from the
Base Casting (D).
Wedge the Wedge (B) from the side of the Base Casting (D), on the side in which the Caster is
being replaced, to keep the LOGIQ E10 solidly supported.
D
C
C
L
4. Activate the brakes.

The Ultrasound System is now nearly balanced between one Rear and both Front Casters.
5. MAKE SURE the LOGIQ E10 is at rest, on both Front Casters.
Lift the Rear Caster and put the Wooden Wedge (B), upright as shown, under the Base Casting
to stabilize the LOGIQ E10 with one Rear Caster off the floor. This Rear Caster can now be
removed.
6. Remove the fixing bolt. DO NOT discard the bolt.
Remove the Rear Caster.

Rear Caster(s) installation
Table 8-251 Rear Caster(s) installation

1. Align Caster, mounting it flat and toward the back.
Position Caster so it aligns with the hole for the fixing bolt.
Re-install fixing bolt (M12 X 40 mm). Use a 10 mm hex wrench, torque: 81 Nm (59.7 lbf-ft).
2. Remove Wooden Wedge and roll LOGIQ E10 off Bevel Edged Board.
To replace the other Rear Caster, repeat all the steps.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-252 Rear Caster(s) replacement Functional Checks
See:
Required torque was applied.
4-2-6
Checks

8-10-3 Front Caster(s) replacement

NOTE: If you suspect the Caster not being replaced is damaged from wear and tear or age, replace
both.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
Two people /
30 minutes
This procedure requires the Wheel Change Kit, P/N FC200829.
WARNING Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating Operator Panel is locked in its lowest,
parking position.
Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ E10 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.
CAUTION
1. Lock Operator Panel in its lowest, parking position.

4. Remove the Side Covers, the Rear Cover and the Foot Rest Bumper.

• 8-6-5 "Foot Rest Bumper replacement" on page 8-41.

Front Caster(s) removal
Table 8-255 Front Caster(s) removal

1. Turn Front Casters so they are pointing forward.
Activate the Direction Lock.
2. Put the Bevel Edged Board of the Wheel Change Kit (A+B) on the floor.
3. CAUTION
C
L KEEP the Caster as centered as possible on the Bevel Edged Board when resting.
NOTE: Prior to elevating LOGIQ E10, verify the Operator Panel is locked in its lowest, parked
position.
The Caster not being replaced; pull the Ultrasound System backwards on that Caster, onto the
Bevel Edged Board (A). This will lift the other Front Caster off the floor.
The Front Caster on the Bevel Edged Board will be facing forward, in the direction as shown
(away {C} from the Base Casting (D).
Wedge the Wedge (B) from the side of the Base Casting (D), on the side in which the Caster is
being replaced, to keep the LOGIQ E10 solidly supported.
D
C
L
4. The Ultrasound System is now nearly balanced between one Front and both Rear Casters.
5. MAKE SURE the LOGIQ E10 is at rest, on both Rear Casters.
Lift the Front Caster and put the Wooden Wedge (B), upright as shown, under the Base Casting
to stabilize the LOGIQ E10 with one Front Caster off the floor. This Front Caster can now be
removed.

Table 8-255 Front Caster(s) removal

6. Remove the 10 mm nuts (C) securing the
Brake Lock-release Rod Assembly (D) to
the Caster. DO NOT discard the nuts.
NOTE: DO NOT change the distance of the
the ball joint studs (E), they MUST BE
returned at the same distance they were
removed. Changing the distance, will affect
the brakes.
If the ball joint stud rotates when removing
the 10 mm nuts, apply slight pressure to
the Brake Rod Assembly or the ball joint
stud has an 8 mm flat that can be held with
an 8 mm wrench.
Unscrew and remove the three screws (F), F

using a 6 mm hex wrench for the Front
Caster that is free from the floor. DO NOT
discard the screws.
Remove the Caster.
8 mm

Front Caster(s) installation
Table 8-256 Front Caster(s) installation

1. Position Caster so it aligns with fastening screws.
Install three fixing screws (M8 x 20 mm), torque: 20.5 Nm (15.1 lbf-ft).
2. Re-attach 10 mm nut to secure Brake Lock-release Rod Assembly to Caster.
3. Remove Wooden Wedge and roll LOGIQ E10 off Bevel Edged Board.
To replace the other Front Caster, repeat all the steps.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-257 Front Caster(s) replacement Functional Checks
See:
Required torque was applied.
4-2-6
Checks

8-10-4 Caster Hubcap replacement

Table 8-258 Manpower / Time and Tool
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
WARNING
Make sure to wear safety glasses or safety goggles for personal protection, as the hubcap
OR may splinter and/or shatter during removal.


Caster Hubcap replacement
Table 8-260 Caster Hubcap replacement

1. With a flat-head screwdriver (1), insert the
blade between the rubber part (2) of the
Caster and the edge of the Hubcap (3).
Pry off the at several locations around the
Hubcap.
2. Lift the Hubcap (4) off of the Caster (5).

Place a new Hubcap onto the Caster, by
aligning the four notches on the underside
of the Hubcap (circled) with the four holes
on the Caster (circled).
With the notches and holes aligned, push
on the top of the Hubcap to seat it onto the
Caster.
An audible snap sound will confirm that the
Hubcap is properly attached.

Verification

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-261 Caster Hubcap replacement Functional Checks
See:
Brakes and Direction Lock Functional required checks and is ready for use.
4-2-6
Checks

8-10-5 Pedal Mechanism replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

3. Remove the Side Covers, Front Cover, Foot Rest Bumper and transfer Pedal Mechanism Covers to
replacement Mechanism.

• 8-10-7 "Pedal Mechanism Covers replacement" on page 8-250.

Pedal Mechanism removal
Table 8-264 Pedal Mechanism removal

1. Power down the LOGIQ E10 and lock the Rear Casters.
2. Using a 10 mm open-end wrench, secure
flange nut (1) and loosen flange nut (2 -
“locking” nut). remove “locking” nut (2).
Remove pivot screw (3 - below Pedal
Mechanism Assembly A), while holding
flange nut (1), capture the hardware as it is
removed.
Note the sequence of all the hardware
removed, it MUST BE re-installed in the
same manner.
2
1 3

Table 8-264 Pedal Mechanism removal

3. Remove the six screws (3) and (4). Two
are underneath (3) and four on the top (4),
The two lower screws (3), also secure the
Strap Hook to the Base Casting.
4. Lift up and gently pull up the Pedal Mechanism.

5. Remove the Pedal Mechanism Covers.

Pedal Mechanism installation
Table 8-265 Pedal Mechanism installation

1. Position the Pedal Mechanism and install the top six fixing screws. Torque: 24 Nm (17.7 lbf-ft).
2. Re-install the pivot hardware as it was
removed.
Secure flange nut (1), facing inward and
screw the pivot screw (3) until they are
hand tight.
MAKE SURE the nylon washers slide over
the spacer and ARE NOT pinched by A
Spacer.
Secure flange nut (1) using a 10 mm open
end wrench and tighten the Pivot screw (3)
using a 5 mm hex wrench until they are
secure.
Install the second 10 mm "locking" nut (2);
DO NOT disturb the position of nut (1).
2
Secure nut (1) with one wrench and torque 1 3
“locking” nut (2) 10 Nm (7.4 lbf-ft), locking
the nuts together.
(Pedal Mechanism Assembly A.)
3. Verify that the pedals work as intended:

a. Push down brake pedal (from “free” position), release it and verify the pedal to return quickly
up to half position.
b. Try to move the Ultrasound System back and forward; and verify that the brake pedal stays
in brake mode.
c. Push down direction lock pedal and verify the pedal to return quickly.
d. Move Ultrasound System and verify Casters stay in direction lock mode.
e. At push down, observe the “Latches” to come over pivot T-Shape, and interfere by engaging.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-266 Pedal Mechanism replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-5 Top Console checks LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
4-2-6
Checks

8-10-6 Pedal Mechanism Cam FRU replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
(Tools):
• Torx driver - T30. Optional Torx L-wrench or Torx socket.
• Open end Wrench, 10 mm.
• Wrench, Box, 10 mm. Optional deep socket.
• Adjustable wrench, 152 mm (6 inches) long (if a longer adjustable
One person / wrench is used, it will contact the floor when trying to turn it.
30 minutes • Two M5 X 0.8 X 16 mm screws (P/N 46-312358P52) from Box 1 of
the LOGIQ E10 Hardware Kit (P/N 5310019-2).
• LOCTITE 290 (LOCTITE P/N 29031). See:
"Material Safety Data Sheet link for LOCTITE 290:" on page 8-244 to access data
sheet.
LOCTITE 290 can be obtained from Grainger.
• Grainger item number 5E217.
NOTE: An adjustable wrench is deeper than an open end wrench and will secure
the Cam Plate better in this procedure.
Material Safety Data Sheet link for LOCTITE 290:
• Copy URL into browser for Healthcare SDS System:

- http://gensuite.ge.com/geh/ehs/msds/msds.cfm?sno=W.137-337

8-10-6 Pedal Mechanism Cam FRU replacement (cont’d)

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the Pedal Mechanism to replace the Pedal Mechanism Cam. To
simplify the installation of the Cam, it is important to understand the location and how the Cam
is positioned in the Pedal Mechanism.
Table 8-268 Cam to Pedal Mechanism replacement

1. Power down the LOGIQ E10 and lock the Rear Casters.
2. Using a 10 mm open-end wrench, secure
flange nut (1) and loosen flange nut (2 -
“locking” nut). remove “locking” nut (2).
Remove pivot screw (3 - below Pedal
Mechanism Assembly A), while holding
flange nut (1), capture the hardware as it is
removed.
Note the sequence of all the hardware
removed, it MUST BE re-installed in the
same manner.
2
1 3


3. The Cam (4) seats above the Cam Cam Roller seated in center of Cam
Roller (5) and needs to be installed as
shown, or the Cam mounting holes (6) will
not be aligned.
The Cam Roller (5) needs to be lowered to
install the Cam. The Torsion Spring (7) and
Cam Roller will hold the Cam in position,
after the Cam is in place.
6
4
5


4. Open the adjustable wrench to 14 mm Wrench position on Cam Plate
(0.55 inches).
14mm
(0.55 inches) 4
@ 100%
Slide the wrench on to the Cam Plate (8),

5
behind the Cam Roller (5). Turn the wrench
down slightly to insert the Cam (4).
Cam (4) position on Pedal Mech
Apply LOCTITE 290 to the two

M5 X 0.8 X 16 mm screws (9). Torque the
screws: 2.6 Nm (1.9 lbf-ft).
Re-install the pivot screw.


5. Re-install the pivot hardware as it was
removed.
Secure flange nut (1), facing inward and
screw the pivot screw (3) until they are
hand tight.
MAKE SURE the nylon washers slide over
the spacer and ARE NOT pinched by A
Spacer.
Secure flange nut (1) using a 10 mm open
end wrench and tighten the Pivot screw (3)
using a 5 mm hex wrench until they are
secure.
Install the second 10 mm "locking" nut (2);
DO NOT disturb the position of nut (1).
2
Secure nut (1) with one wrench and torque 1 3
“locking” nut (2) 10 Nm (7.4 lbf-ft), locking
the nuts together.
(Pedal Mechanism Assembly A.)

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-269 Pedal Mechanism replacement Functional Tests
See:
Section Functional Tests Debrief Script
4-2-6
Checks

8-10-7 Pedal Mechanism Covers replacement

The Pedal Mechanism Covers are attached to the LOGIQ E10 with self-tapping screws. These
mounting screws are screwed into plastic. Use care during installation, DO NOT overtighten.
This procedure applies to both Covers on the Pedal Mechanism.
Table 8-270 Manpower / Time and Tool
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
A small ratchet with 1/4 inch socket and a #2 Phillips, six inch extended driver and
a mirror will be very helpful during this procedure.
One person /
5 minutes
per cover


Pedal Mechanism Covers replacement
Table 8-272 Pedal Mechanism Covers replacement

1. Place a mirror under the Pedal Mechanism
to locate the Phillips screws securing the
Pedal Mechanism Covers.
Four screws (circled) and identified (1)
secure the Parking Brake Pedal Cover (1a)
and four screws (circled) and identified (2)
secure the and Swivel Lock Cover (2a).
Remove damaged cover(s) and re-install
replacement cover(s).
HAND TIGHTEN.
These screws are screwed into plastic. Use
care during installation, DO NOT
overtighten.
NOTE: If you suspect the Cover not being
replaced is damaged from wear and tear or
age, replace both.
1a
2a

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-273 Pedal Mechanism Covers replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-6
Checks

Section 8-11
Front End Acquisition / Card Cage parts replacement
This section describes how to replace the parts in the Front End / Card Cage.

8-11-2 Front End Card Rack parts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-254
8-11-3 Front End Card Cage Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-255
8-11-4 Front Plane / XD BUS replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-259
8-11-5 Relay Board (GRLY or RLY) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-263
8-11-6 Transmitter Board (ETX) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-266
8-11-8 ECB replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-272
8-11-9 GPU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-278
8-11-10 WLAN replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-286
8-11-11 BIOS Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-292
8-11-12 EPM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-295
8-11-13 Backplane replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-298
8-11-14 Connector Panel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-314
8-11-15 Rear I/O replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-327
8-11-16 Batteries replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-330
8-11-17 HDD replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-335
8-11-18 Fan Tray replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-339
8-11-19 Light Block (Hard Drive/Network Status) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-342
8-11-20 Printer Tray replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-345
8-11-21 Cable Holders - ECB, Main Power Supply and Rear I/O replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-348
8-11-22 Option Box replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-352
8-11-23 Card Cage replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-361
ONE OF THE TWO RECEPTICALS INTEGRATED ON THE FRAME, SPECIFICALLY FOR THAT
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.
PACK ARE OFF.
Prior to removing the Card Rack Boards, the LEDs on the end of each board should be unlit,
to indicate boards are NOT powered.

8-11-2 Front End Card Rack parts overview

Positions of the cards in a LOGIQ E10. Table 8-274 shows the positions of the cards. Position #1 is
nearest the Probe connectors (GRLY, front of Ultrasound System).
Figure 8-8 Front End Card Rack
NOTE: Torque all M6 screws and flange nuts in the Card Cage to 1.5 Nm (1.1 lbf-ft) unless otherwise specified.
Table 8-274 Card Cage Card Positions

TOTAL NUMBER OF CARDS PER
Item ABBREVATION CARD NAME LOGIQ E10
1. GRLY Relay Board 1
2. ETX 64 Transmitter Board 1
3. ETX 128 Transmitter Board 1
4. CRX2 Receive Board 1
5. ECB LOGIQ E10 Carrier Board 1
6. EPM Power Module 1
7. BP Backplane 1
The Front Plane Boards connect to the back of
Front Plane /XD the Relay Board, the Analog Receiver Boards and
N/A 2
BUS the Transmitter Board. The Front Plane boards
are interchangeable.
8 - 254 Section 8-11 - Front End Acquisition / Card Cage parts replacement
8-11-3 Front End Card Cage Cover replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers and the Battery Cover.


Front End Card Cage Cover removal
NOTE: If the V Nav Option is present, the Hi-Pass connection from the GRLY Board to the DriveBay2+
must be disconnected.
If the WLAN Option is present, note the orientation of the antennas, they MUST BE returned to the same
position. Reposition the antennas when removing the Cover.
Table 8-277 Front End Card Cage Cover removal

1. Remove the Front Plane extraction tools,
2. If the V Nav Option is present, remove the Hi-Pass connection - V Nav Option
Hi-Pass EMI Cover by removing the screw
and the screw holding the cable P-clamp,
using a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
Disconnect the Hi-Pass cable from GRLY
Board.
Table 8-277 Front End Card Cage Cover removal

3. Remove the eight screws securing the
Card Cage Cover.
The Card Cage Cover lifts off the Cage.

Front End Card Cage Cover installation
Table 8-278 Front End Card Cage Cover installation
1. Re-install the Card Cage Cover and secure it with the eight screws removed. Install all the
screws before tightening.
2. Connect the Hi-Pass cable to the GRLY

Board and re-install the EMI Cover, if
present.
Remove the screw from the “P“ clamp to
secure the shielded cable and the clamp to
the Card Cage Cover.
Re-install the Front Plane extraction tools.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-279 Front End Card Cage Cover replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 Basic Measurements allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
10-7-4 Grounding continuity checks and is ready for use.

8-11-4 Front Plane / XD BUS replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, the Front Plane extraction tools and Front End Card Cage Cover.

• 8-11-3 "Front End Card Cage Cover replacement" on page 8-255.

Front Plane Boards removal
Table 8-282 Front Plane Boards removal
NOTE: Read through the removal and installation steps completely before performing. Perform the
steps carefully to avoid damage to the Front Plane connectors.
Front Plane Boards
Table 8-282 Front Plane Boards removal

1. Using the Front Plane extraction tools,
place the tools on the Plane to be removed,
as shown. Gently lift on the upper tool and
press down on the lower tool, evenly to pry
the Plane away from the Cards. Maintain
control of the Plane as it frees from the
Cards so it is not dropped.
Place it on an ESD safe place.
Front Plane Boards installation
Table 8-283 Front Plane Boards installation
1. Holding the upper and lower edges of the board with both hands, carefully install the Front Plane
Board. Ensure that you do not bend any of the connector pins during the installation.
Apply even pressure across the board and to apply gentle, even pressure at the four corners of
the Front Plane Board to make full contact with the other boards.
2. Install the Card Rack Cover and fasten it with the fixing screws.
Connect the Hi-Pass cable to the GRLY Board and re-install the cover, if present.

No calibrations or adjustments are needed after these parts replacement.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-284 Front Plane Boards / XD BUS replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
4-2-7 Basic Measurements measured at (record the value) and meets
allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
8-11-5 Relay Board (GRLY or RLY) replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.
Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover and Front End Card Cage Cover.
• 8-11-4 "Front Plane / XD BUS replacement" on page 8-259.

Relay Board removal
Table 8-287 Relay Board removal

Relay Board location
1. Using the board ejector levers, remove the Relay Board. Place it on an ESD safe place.
Relay Board installation
Table 8-288 Relay Board installation
1. Carefully align the Relay Board with the rails and push it in until starts to seat in the Backplane
connectors and close the board ejector levers.
2. Carefully install the two Front Plane Boards.
Connect the Hi-Pass cable to the GRLY and re-install the cover, if present.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-289 Relay Board (GRLY or RLY) replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks

8-11-6 Transmitter Board (ETX) replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.
Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, and Front End Card Cage Cover.
ETX Board removal
Table 8-292 ETX Board removal

ETX Board location
1. Using the board ejector levers, remove the ETX Board(s). Place on an ESD safe place.
ETX Board installation
Table 8-293 ETX Board installation
1. Carefully align the ETX Board(s) with the rails and push in until it starts to seat in the Backplane

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-294 Transmitter Board (ETX) replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
8-11-7 CRX replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11



CRX removal
Table 8-297 CRX removal

CRX Board location
1. Using the board ejector levers, remove the CRX Board. Place on an ESD safe place.
CRX installation
Table 8-298 CRX installation
1. Carefully align the CRX Board with the rails and push in until it starts to seat in the Backplane
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-299 CRX Board replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks

8-11-8 ECB replacement

Before replacing the ECB, it is recommended to take a photo of the cabling to the ECB for reference.
NOTE: If only the ECB is to be replaced, transfer the GPU and the WLAN Option, if present to the
replacement ECB.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person / Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6. /
PACK ARE OFF.
DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY
ESD PRECAUTIONS:
PURPOSE.
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

ECB removal
Table 8-302 ECB removal

1. Remove all cabling to the ECB.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the
ECB to the Card Cage.


3. NOTE: The ECB weighs almost 4.5 kg ECB ejector levers
(10 lbs.). BE SURE to support it when it is
removed.
Release the board ejector levers that
secure the ECB to the Card Cage and
gently slide it out of the Card Cage.

4. Continue to gently slide the ECB from the ECB being removed
Card Cage. Place on an ESD safe place,
with the GPU facing down.
A piece of ESD safe foam works well to
support the ECB flat.
ECB installation
Table 8-303 ECB installation
1. Carefully align the ECB with the rails and push in until it starts to seat in the Backplane
2. Re-install the two screws to secure the ECB to the Card Cage.
3. Re-connect all cabling to the ECB. See: "ECB cable connections" on page 8-276.

Table 8-303 ECB installation

ECB cable connections
Table 8-304 Connections to from ECB
J?? To From ECB J?? To From ECB J?? To From ECB

J1 Hard Drive J2 DVD J3 not used
To P10 Bulkhead Plate, to
J4 BayBird Power J5 J6 To J22 Upper OP
OLED Video Cntl
J7 USB BayBird J8 To Control MPS J9 To Scan Convert - Rear I/O
J10 To Isolate - Rear I/O J11 XYZ Control J12 USB BW Printer
J13 To Cntr + VPD - Rear I/O J14 To USB Hub - Rear I/O J15 To J21 Upper OP
J16 not used J17 not used J18 not used
J19 not used J20 not used J21 Light Block (HDD/NW Status)
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-305 ECB replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks

8-11-9 GPU replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
A small, close quarters ratchet set will be very useful for this procedure.
If a small, close quarters ratchet set is not available, see: Figure 8-9 "Small, close
One person / quarters ratchet set Alternate" on page 8-279.
30 minutes Close Quarters Ratchet:

PACK ARE OFF.
ESD PRECAUTIONS:
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF. THE ESD WRIST STRAP SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO ONE OF
THE TWO RECEPTICALS INTEGRATED ON THE FRAME, SPECIFICALLY FOR THAT PURPOSE.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, Front End Card Cage Cover and the ECB.

• 8-11-8 "ECB replacement" on page 8-272.
Figure 8-9 Small, close quarters ratchet set Alternate
B


GPU removal
NOTE: If a small, close quarters ratchet set is not available, plug (A) can be removed to access screws
with a T-10 Torx driver. Re-install plug after replacement. Plug (A) removed and access (B)
shown.
Table 8-308 GPU removal

1. Small, close quarters ratchet set Alternate
B

The GPU is connected and mounted to the ECB.

Place the ECB on a safe, level ESD surface when servicing the GPU.
NOTE: The right side of this image is defined as the upper, top of the ECB.

2. Remove the GPU to ECB Cable from the
ECB and GPU.
Remove the two T10, GPU lower retainer
screws (circled) and remove the retainer.
Note how the retainer is assembled. Both
lower retainer halves are identical.
3. Remove the rear, GPU upper retainer T10

mounting screw and loosen the front T10
screw. The upper retainer has slot for the
front T10 screw.
Slide the retainer away from the ECB.
Note how the retainer is removed, it must
be re-installed in the same manner.


4. Grasp the GPU with your forefingers and
thumbs. Make sure your forefingers are
outside of the GPU to ECB connection and
gently slide the GPU out of the connector
(away from the heatsink).
Remove the GPU from the bottom the
ECB.
GPU installation
Table 8-309 GPU installation

1. Slide the GPU from the bottom of the ECB
and gently slide the GPU into the GPU to
ECB connection (toward the heatsink).
2. The upper retainer has slot for the front T10

screw and a lip to balance the installation of
the GPU.
The retainer must be re-installed with the lip
toward the GPU.

3. Re-install the rear, GPU upper retainer T10
mounting screw.
4. Locate the two T10, GPU lower retainer

mounting holes (circled).
5. Assemble the GPU lower retainer, as

removed and re-install the two T10 screws.
Hand tighten.
Apply slight, even pressure on to the lower
retainer halves and tighten the screws
evenly.


6. Tighten the upper retainer T10 mounting
screws.
7. Re-install the GPU to ECB Cable.
8. Re-install the ECB and all I/O cabling.
Verification
Functional Checks
Perform the following functional tests to confirm the system is operational before returning the system
to the customer.
Table 8-310 GPU replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks

8-11-10 WLAN replacement

NOTE: The WLAN Card replacement Kit includes all the hardware for the WLAN, replace all the
hardware when the WLAN Card is replaced.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person / 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.
30 minutes A magnifying glass to connect the WLAN antenna cables to the WLAN Card will be
very useful for this procedure.
Table 8-312 WLAN replacement

1. The WLAN Card is connected and mounted to the ECB.
Remove the antennas.
Place the ECB on a safe, level ESD surface when servicing the WLAN, with the I/O face, facing
down. DO NOT lay the ECB with the GPU facing up, components can be broken.
The antenna cable connections are circled and the WLAN Card mounting screw (A).

2. Note the routing of the Cables and the position of the Clamps, the Cables must be routed in the
same manner.
Remove the two coaxial antenna cables from the WLAN Card.
Remove the screw securing the WLAN Card to the ECB, using a #1 Phillips screwdriver. Grasp
the WLAN with your forefinger and thumb and gently slide the WLAN away from the ECB.
Remove the screws (B) securing the Cable Clamps.
Stand the ECB, in the direction it is installed (BIOS battery up), secure the Cable nuts (C), using
an 8 mm wrench and loosen the nuts on the face of the ECB I/O, using an 8 mm wrench.
3. Place the lockwashers onto the threaded shaft of the Cables and install the new Cables. Torque
the nuts on the face of the ECB to 0.7 ±10% Nm.
Install the new Clamps, as shown. Torque to 0.15 ±10% Nm. Route the Cables as shown.
Secure the replacement WLAN Card to the ECB. Torque to 0.15 ±10% Nm.
Connect the Cables to the WLAN Card.


4. Install the Antennas and tighten with thumb
and index finger.
Position the Antennas as shown.
5. Re-install the ECB and all covers removed.
WLAN Set-up
For configuring the WLAN, refer to the latest revision of the LOGIQ E10 Basic User Manual, Chapter 10.
Services Security Set-up
NOTE: This step is mandatory in order to insure proper functionality of services and communications
security settings.
Table 8-313 Services Security Set-up

1. Connect the Service key and access Windows.
2. Open an explorer window.
3. Navigate to C:\Remap.
Run the batch file “EnableWLAN.bat”. A screen will flash “updating network configuration for
4.
WLAN.“
Basic Configuration of WLAN
Table 8-314 Basic Configuration of WLAN

1. Perform the WLAN configuration as de-
scribed in Chapter Basic User Manual.
See: Configuring the Wireless Network in
Chapter 13 of the of the Basic User
Manual.
Configure as required by the site IT depart-
ment.

Verifying Connectivity
Testing WLAN
Table 8-315 Testing WLAN

1. When the WLAN is active, an icon appears WLAN Active
in the status bar to indicate whether the
WLAN is active or not active.
WLAN not Active
2. Select Utility -> Connectivity -> Configuration Tool Screen

TCP/IP -> Wireless Network -> Configu-
ration.
If enabled, Available Wireless Networks
appear.
If not connected:
Highlight the wireless network you want to
use.
Click Connect at the bottom of the “Config-
uration” tool.
If unable to connect, select Diagnostics tab,
Run Diagnostics. For more information,
see the latest revision of the LOGIQ E10
Basic User Manual, Chapter 10.
3. Check that the WLAN is working properly; ping/ verify a device in the network, query WL or Send
an image.
Verification
1.) Verify that the screw that you removed earlier has been installed.
2.) If finished, connect cables and Probes removed earlier.
Functional Check
to the customer.
If all are successful, include the following debrief script: LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for use.
Table 8-316 WLAN replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks

8-11-11 BIOS Battery replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.
Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

BIOS Battery replacement
Table 8-319 BIOS Battery replacement

1. The BIOS Battery is located on the ECB.
Remove the Battery and replace it.
2. Carefully install the ECB.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-320 BIOS Battery replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
10-7-5 Leakage Current Limits
8-11-12 EPM replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11



EPM removal
Table 8-323 EPM removal

1. The EPM is located next to the ECB. The EPM location
ECB must be removed to access the EPM.
Release the board ejector levers that
secure the EPM to the Card Cage and
gently slide it out of the Card Cage.
Place on an ESD safe place.
EPM installation
Table 8-324 EPM installation
1. Carefully align the EPM with the rails and push in until it starts to seat in the Backplane
2. Carefully install the ECB.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-325 EPM replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks

8-11-13 Backplane replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
4 to 6 Hours 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.

WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical contacts, conductors
and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD
sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before
making contact.
IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT, MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE CAPACITOR PACK ARE
OFF BEFORE REMOVING THE CAPACITOR PACK.
Prior to removing the Card Rack Boards, the LEDs on the end of each board should be unlit, to indicate
boards are NOT powered.
DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD
PRECAUTIONS:
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF. THE ESD WRIST STRAP SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO ONE OF THE
TWO RECEPTICALS INTEGRATED ON THE FRAME, SPECIFICALLY FOR THAT PURPOSE.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
5. REMOVE THE BATTERY COVER AND DISCONNECT THE POWER CABLES J10 and J11
J11
LOCKOUT
Signed Date (black and red) FROM THE BACKPLANE. See: 8-2-2 "Warnings" on page 8-3 and 8-11-15 "Rear I/O
J10
J11 replacement" on page 8-327.

CAUTION To avoid injury, handle the Backplane by the edges. There are two guides to guide the ECB onto the
Backplane, which protrude and are VERY SHARP.

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, Front Cover, Rear Cover, Front End Card Cage Cover, Front Plane Boards
and Main Power Supply.
4. Remove all Options within the Option Box, Printer or Printer Filler Storage and the Printer Tray.
5. Release all Cards in the Card Cage and the ECB from the Backplane.
Continued

• 8-11-12 "EPM replacement" on page 8-295.
• 8-6-14 "Printer Filler Storage replacement" on page 8-66.
• 8-16-8 "Printer (Digital Graphic) replacement" on page 8-427.
• 8-11-20 "Printer Tray replacement" on page 8-345.
• 8-12-2 "MPS replacement" on page 8-369.
• Section 8-16 "Options replacement" on page 8-406.
Backplane removal
NOTE: The Option covers are secured to the Option Bracket with M4 threaded studs, as part of the
Option Bracket and M7 flange nuts. All Options may not be present.
All the Option covers, can be removed at once, if desired. The Shear Wave Capacitor Pack is
the only Option in the Option Box that does not have a removable cover.
It is not necessary to remove the ECG (Patient I/O Module) or the Rear I/O, but the USB Cable
at the bottom of the Rear I/O, and all other cabling will have to be removed.
Table 8-328 Handling Backplane


CAUTION
Table 8-329 Backplane removal

a 7 mm driver.
Remove the Cover.

and J14.
LOGIQ E10.
3. Remove the Main Power Supply.

4. Free all the Boards in the Card Cage from the Backplane, including the ECB and EPM.


5. Remove all Options within the Option Box.
Place all the Options on an ESD safe place.
Options.
Options installed (Options and cabling
removed are shown below).

Remove the Bracket.

Box.
Option Box.


4D Motor Controller Cover and slide the
Cover out.

screwdriver.
DO NOT discard the two screws.
Backplane.
NOTE: If the screwlocks stay on the
Backplane, transfer them to the
replacement Backplane.
10. DANGER

from the Backplane.

11. Locate the CW Option cable, on the front of
the Card Cage.
Pull straight off to disconnect from the
Backplane.


loosened.
A A A
Rear I/O USB Cable

removed.
access the Network Cable from the bottom
of the Rear I/O. Remove the Network Cable
and continue to remove the Option Box
away from the Card Cage.

13. Disconnect the Subwoofer audio cable
from J9 on the Backplane.
14. Remove the four hex screwlocks (.312

inches long, on the right) and two locking
posts (on the left) attached to the
Connector Panel, using a 3/16 hex driver.
DO NOT discard the hex screwlocks or the
locking posts.


15. Remove the five M6 screws (B) that secure
the Option Bracket to the Base Casting,
Starting at the bottom, remove the 7
Phillips screws that secure the Option
Bracket to the Card Cage, using a #2
Phillips screwdriver. BE SURE to support
the Bracket as it is being removed, it has
mass.
16. Remove the 21 Phillips screws that ground

and secure the Backplane to the Card
Cage, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver. The
screws are around the perimeter of the
Backplane.
CAUTION
To avoid injury, handle the Backplane by

the edges. There are two guides to guide
the ECB onto the Backplane, which
protrude and are VERY SHARP.
Carefully remove the Backplane away from
the Card Cage by grasping the outer
edges, pulling out the right edge first, to
guide the connectors to the Main Power
Supply out of the Card Cage.
Backplane installation
Table 8-330 Backplane installation
1. Grasping the outer edges of the Backplane, carefully place the Backplane toward the Card Cage,
guiding the connectors to the Main Power Supply into the Card Cage.
Install the 21 Phillips screws to secure and ground the Backplane to the Card Cage. Tighten
screws alternately.
2. Re-connect the Subwoofer audio cable to J9 on the Backplane.
3. Re-install the Option Bracket. BE SURE to support the Bracket as it is being installed, it has
mass.
Re-install the five M6 screws that secure the Option Bracket to the Base Casting, loosely.
4. Re-install the four hex screwlocks (on the right) and two locking posts (on the left) to the
Connector Panel Torque to 0.6 +/- 0.1 Nm (0.4 +/- 0.07 lbf-ft).
Starting at the top, re-install the 7 Phillips screws that secure the Option Bracket to the Card
Cage. Tighten alternately.
Torque the M6 screws to 3.7 +/- 0.6 Nm (2.7 +/- 0.44 lbf-ft), ONLY the M6 screws are torqued to
this value.
Re-connect Subwoofer to J9, on the Backplane.
5. Position the Option Box up slightly and turn it toward the Main Power Supply to access the
Network Cable at the bottom of the Rear I/O. Re-connect the Network Cable and continue to
position the Option Box onto the studs that secure the Option Box to the Card Cage. Three are
underneath the Option Box, in slots.
Re-install the flange nuts. Tighten all the nuts, alternately, using a 7 mm driver.
6. Place the Subwoofer cable and grounding clamp into the Option Box.
Re-install the screw to secure the clamp to the Option Box. MAKE SURE the clamp is grounding
the cable.
7. Re-install the Battery Bracket.
Install the flange nuts and secure the Battery Bracket to the Option Bracket.
8. Install the Battery last.

Re-install all Options and Option covers removed re-connect all cabling to the Backplane and
CW Cable, if present.
9. Re-install Printer Tray and Printer or Printer Filler.
10. Re-install Main Power Supply.
11. Re-seat all the boards in the Card Cage.
12. Re-install the Battery Bracket, re-connect the Batteries and install the Battery Cover.
13. Re-install all other covers removed.

After Replacing the Backplane
1.) Reboot the system into Windows desktop and double-click the VPD Editor icon on the desktop. You
need Service SSA Key to access Windows.
2.) Select the Backplane in the device grid (BP).
3.) Locate the System serial field and select.
4.) Click the write dirty fields button and click in the Value column, in front of system serial number field
and type the serial number of the console. For example: 123456US7.
5.) Click the write dirty fields button, wait cursor (hourglass) may come up while the data is written to
the component. When the data is written to the component, it will be shown in the Previous Value
column confirming the value has been updated, Both columns should display the updated serial
number.
Figure 8-10 VPD Grid - Backplane
6.) Click the close button (small x) in the upper right corner to exit.
7.) Reboot the system and proceed to Functional Checks.
Verification

Functional Checks
to the customer.
the functional checks for the Backplane replacement and that particular Option.
Table 8-331 Backplane replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
Power SHUT DOWN
functional checks have been performed
In addition: Perform the following Functional Checks if
Backplane replacement.
4D checks and is ready for use.
Perform a 4D sweep
CW
4-2-7
use pencil probes
Continued
Table 8-331 Backplane replacement Functional Checks
See:
ECG
4-2-7
use pencil probes
10-7-7
lead to ground
10-7-8
lead to lead
10-7-9
isolation test
ECG Checks
Active ECG:
Connect cables. Press Display ECG Tab
4-2-7
on TP. Verify ECG signal displayed on
monitor.
attached so they pick up noise. LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
Diagnostics 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Leakage Current
Diagnostics
Shear Wave Elastography (Shear Elasto) checks and is ready for use.
4-2-7
Functional Checks
Power Assistant
Shear Wave
4-2-7
Functional Checks
removed.
V Nav
3D/4D and Volume Navigation Functional
4-2-7
Checks

8-11-14 Connector Panel replacement

This procedure is essentially like replacing the Backplane, but the Backplane will not be removed.

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
4 Hours 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.

WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical contacts, conductors
and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD
sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before
making contact.
DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD
PRECAUTIONS:

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
J11
LOCKOUT
Signed Date (black and red) FROM THE BACKPLANE. See: 8-2-2 "Warnings" on page 8-3 and 8-11-15 "Rear I/O
J10
J11 replacement" on page 8-327.


3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover, Front Cover, Rear Cover, Front End Card Cage Cover, Front Plane
Boards and Main Power Supply.
4. Remove all Options within the Option Box, Printer or Printer Filler Storage and the Printer Tray.
Continued

• Section 8-16 "Options replacement" on page 8-406.
NOTE: The Option covers are secured to the Option Bracket with M4 threaded studs, as part of the
Option Bracket and M7 flange nuts. All Options may not be present.
All the Option covers, can be removed at once, if desired. The Shear Wave Capacitor Pack is
the only Option in the Option Box that does not have a removable cover.
It is not necessary to remove the ECG (Patient I/O Module) or the Rear I/O, but the USB Cable
at the bottom of the Rear I/O, and all other cabling will have to be removed.
CAUTION
Table 8-334 Connector Panel replacement

a 7 mm driver.
Remove the Cover.


and J14.
LOGIQ E10.

3. Remove all Options within the Option Box.
Place all the Options on an ESD safe place.
Options.
Options installed (Options and cabling
removed are shown below).


Remove the Bracket.

Box.
Option Box.

Cover out.

screwdriver.
DO NOT discard the two screws.
Backplane.
NOTE: If the screwlocks stay on the
Backplane, transfer them to the
replacement Backplane.
8. DANGER

from the Backplane.


loosened.
A A A
Rear I/O USB Cable

removed.
access the Network Cable from the bottom
of the Rear I/O. Remove the Network Cable
and continue to remove the Option Box
away from the Card Cage.

10. Remove the four hex screwlocks (.312
inches long, on the right) and two locking
posts (on the left) attached to the
Connector Panel, using a 3/16 hex driver.
DO NOT discard the hex screwlocks or the
locking posts.


11. Remove the five M6 screws (B) that secure
the Option Bracket to the Base Casting,
Starting at the bottom, remove the 7
Phillips screws that secure the Option
Bracket to the Card Cage, using a #2
Phillips screwdriver. BE SURE to support
the Bracket as it is being removed, it has
mass.

12. The Connector Panel (C) is secured to the Option Bracket (D) with five flange nuts (E).
13. Remove the Connector Panel flange nuts, using a 7 mm driver.
14. Install the replacement Connector Panel to the Option Bracket.
15. Transfer the four hex screwlocks and the two locking posts the Connector Panel.
Torque to 0.6 +/- 0.1 Nm (0.4 +/- 0.07 lbf-ft).
16. Re-install the Option Bracket. BE SURE to support the Bracket as it is being installed, it has
mass.
Re-install the five M6 screws that secure the Option Bracket to the Base Casting, loosely.
17. Starting at the top, re-install the 7 Phillips screws that secure the Option Bracket to the Card
Cage. Tighten alternately.
Torque the M6 screws to 3.7 +/- 0.6 Nm (2.7 +/- 0.44 lbf-ft), ONLY the M6 screws are torqued to
this value.

18. Position the Option Box up slightly and turn it toward the Main Power Supply to access the
Network Cable at the bottom of the Rear I/O. Re-connect the Network Cable and continue to
position the Option Box onto the studs that secure the Option Box to the Card Cage. Three are
underneath the Option Box, in slots.
the cable.
20. Re-install the Battery Bracket.
Install the flange nut and secure the Battery Bracket to the Option Bracket.
21. Install the Batteries last.

Re-install all Options and Option covers removed, and re-connect all cabling to the Backplane.
22. Re-connect the Batteries and install the Battery Cover.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
the functional checks for the Connector Panel replacement and that particular Option.
Table 8-335 Connector Panel replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
10-7-5 Chassis leakage current test LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
Power SHUT DOWN 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Leakage Current
4D
Perform a 4D sweep
Continued

Table 8-335 Connector Panel replacement Functional Checks
See:
ECG
4-2-7
use pencil probes
10-7-7
lead to ground
10-7-8
lead to lead
10-7-9
isolation test
ECG Checks
Active ECG:
4-2-7
monitor.
Diagnostics
4-2-7
Functional Checks
Power Assistant
Shear Wave
4-2-7
Functional Checks
removed.
V Nav
4-2-7
Checks
8-11-15 Rear I/O replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11



Rear I/O replacement
Table 8-338 Rear I/O replacement

1. The Rear I/O mounts directly to the Option
Box.
Located the two screws that secure the
Rear I/O to the Option Box, above the
Batteries.
Remove the screws using a #2 Phillips
screwdriver.
2. Slide the Rear I/O straight off the Option

Box and disconnect the Network and
Power Cables.
3. Slide the replacement Rear I/O straight onto the Option Box and re-connect the Network and
Power Cables.
Verification

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-339 Rear I/O replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 Probe/Connectors Checks 5750007-1EN, (latest revision). Equipment
passed all required checks and is ready for use.

8-11-16 Batteries replacement

Batteries MUST BE replaced in pairs.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11


Batteries replacement
Table 8-342 Batteries replacement

1. The Batteries connect directly to the
Backplane.
Locate the flange nuts securing the Battery

Cover.
Remove the flange nuts using a long 7 mm
driver.
Remove the Cover.
NOTE: Only one battery is shown to show
the correct connections.
Battery Cover removed


2. Disconnect the power J10, J11 (if present)
and signal/communication J14 and J13
connection(s) to the Backplane.
Remove the Batteries.
NOTE: Regulations vary for different
countries. Dispose of the used batteries in
accordance with local regulations.

3. Slide the replacement Batteries into the
Battery Bracket and connect the signal/
communication J14, J13 and power J10
and J11 and connectors to the Backplane.
4. Re-install the Battery Cover.
5. Re-install Left side cover.

Verification

NOTE: Diagnostics can be performed on a Battery when the battery condition is over 15%. The Battery
FRU is shipped at 20~30%. You do not need to check the capacity as a functional test. If the
capacity is less than 15% (normally this does not happen), you will have to wait for it to charge,
it takes around 5 minutes to increase 1%.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-343 Batteries replacement Functional Checks
See:
10-8-3 Grounding continuity 5750007-1EN, (latest revision). Leakage
10-8-4 Chassis Leakage Current Test Current measured at (record the value) and
meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all
Verify Power Assistant Option functions, required checks and is ready for use.
if present.
8-11-17 HDD replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person /
60 minutes, includes Refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6 /
Software Load and 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.
testing.
PACK ARE OFF.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11
1. Record the system’s TCPIP settings and installed Option strings.

2. Back up the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer Presets), and Service
settings. You will perform a Restore after the install.

• 8-4-6 "Loading the Base Image and Application Software" on page 8-11.

HDD removal
If the HDD has patient data, leave the HDD at the site.
Table 8-346 HDD removal

1. The HDD is located above the DVD Drive.
Remove the nut securing the HDD to the
DVD bracket, using a 7mm driver.
Slide the HDD off the bracket.
2. Disconnect the HDD connector from the

HDD, by loosing the two screws.
The HDD connector comes from J1 of the
ECB.
Table 8-346 HDD removal

3. Loosen the four screws securing the HDD
the HDD housings. Two on each side.
The screws do not have to be removed. the
isolator grommets will hold the screws.
Slide the HDD out of the inner housing.
If the screws and grommets are removed,

the grommets can be re-inserted into the
larger holes and centered in the smaller
holes.
HDD installation
Table 8-347 HDD installation

1. Slide the replacement HDD into the HDD
inner housing.
The isolator grommets MUST BE installed
to isolate the inner housing from the outer
housing.
Tighten the four screws securely, they will
bottom out when they are installed.
2. Re-connect the HDD cable from J1 to the HDD and tighten the connector screws.
3. Re-install the nut that secures the HDD housings to the DVD bracket. Torque to 1.5 Nm
(1.1 lbf-ft).
5. Power up the LOGIQ E10.
6. Re-install the Base Load and Application Software.
7. Enter the TCPIP settings and Option strings for the LOGIQ E10.
8. Restore the Patient Archive images, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration (Customer
Presets), and Service settings.

Verification
1.) Verify that all screws that you removed earlier have been installed.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-348 HDD replacement Functional Checks
See:
Refer to Confirm DVR Operation required checks and is ready for use.
Basic User
(if installed)
Manual
8-11-18 Fan Tray replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover and the Front Card Cage Cover.


Fan Tray removal / installation
CAUTION
Table 8-351 Fan Tray removal / installation

1. Remove the two screws that secure the
Fan Tray Assembly to the Card Cage.
2. Slide the Fan Tray out of the Card Cage.
3. Re-install the replacement Fan Tray. Make sure the Fan Tray seats completely into the Card
Cage. Re-install the two screws.
Verification
4.) Verify that there is no unusual noise from the Fan Assembly.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-352 Fan Tray replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
Let the LOGIQ E10 run for 10 minutes and required checks and is ready for use.
observe that the Fans are running and
there are no errors reported by the
LOGIQ E10.

8-11-19 Light Block (Hard Drive/Network Status) replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, Front Cover and Printer or Printer Filler Storage.

Light Block (Hard Drive/Network Status) replacement
Table 8-355 Light Block (Hard Drive/Network Status) replacement

1. Disconnect the Module cable from J21 of
the ECB
2. The Module is located on the front, top,

right side of the Card Cage.
Remove the two Phillips screws securing
the Module and foam seal to the Card
Cage, using a #2 Phillips screwdriver. DO
NOT discard the screws or seal.
A = Hard Drive
B = Network
C = Blue - 1 GB Network Okay
White - GB Network (slow)
3. Install the replacement Module and the foam seal. Tighten the screws securely, they will bottom
out when they are installed.
The seal will not be tight against the Module. It is intentional for the seal to be loose. The seal
will be pressed against the Card Cage and Front cover to capture the light activity and direct it
through the Front Cover.
4. Route the Module cable along the Card
Cage, as shown and around the back of the
Card Cage to J21 on the ECB.
Connect the cable to J21 on the ECB.

Table 8-355 Light Block (Hard Drive/Network Status) replacement
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-356 Light Block (Hard Drive/Network Status) replacement Functional

Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
Verify Network Activity lights emit through required checks and is ready for use.
the Front Cover
8-11-20 Printer Tray replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, Front Cover and Printer or Printer Filler Storage.


Printer Tray removal
Table 8-359 Printer Tray removal

2. Unlatch the two latches that clamp the
Printer Tray to the Option Box.
3. Push the Printer Tray in, approximately 1/2 inch to free the three tabs retaining the Tray to the
Option Box.
Remove the Tray.
Printer Tray installation
Table 8-360 Printer Tray installation

1. Lower the lower Column Cover.
2. Position the Printer Tray on top of the Option Box.
The three tabs insert into the slots on the top of the Option Box.
Slide the Tray into the slots until it stops.
3. Latch the latches that clamp the Printer Tray to the Option Box.
4. Re-install Printer and connect the cables to the back of the Printer or Printer Filler Storage into
the Printer Tray.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-361 Printer Tray replacement Functional Checks
See:

8-11-21 Cable Holders - ECB, Main Power Supply and Rear I/O replacement
NOTE: If a Cable is being replaced, perform all of the Functional Checks for that component
replacment.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

2. Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and from the MPS, and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, the Mains Cable Hook, the Rear Cover and the Main Power Supply.

• 8-12-2 "MPS replacement" on page 8-369.
Cable Holders - ECB, MPS and Rear I/O replacement
Table 8-364 Cable Holders - ECB, MPS and Rear I/O replacement

1. NOTE: The cables MUST BE placed in the same location when they are re-installed.
Disconnect the Cables for Cable Holder(s) you are replacing and remove the Cable Holder off
the hooks. The ECB and Rear I/O Holders slide off in the left direction. The MPS Holder slides
off in the right direction, at 45 degrees.
2. Slide the replacement Holder onto the
hooks, with the arrow on the Holder
pointing up.
1 - ECB Cable Holder
2
2 - MPS Cable Holder
3 - Rear I/O Cable Holder

Table 8-364 Cable Holders - ECB, MPS and Rear I/O replacement

3. Re-install the Cables to the Holder(s) replaced.
2 3
1
J8 (USB2) U
J9 (USB2)
J10 (Network)
M
J11 (USB2)
J12 (USB2) L
J13 (USB2)
J14 (USB2) K
4
5
6
7
To:
G) USB Cable - MPS
1) MPS USB2
J) Rear I/O USB3
2) XYZ Controller USB2
K) Rear I/O USB2
3) BW Printer USB2
L) Rear I/O Network
4) Rear I/O HDMI
M) Rear I/O HDMI
5) Rear I/O Network
N) USB Cable - XYZ Controller
6) Rear I/O USB2
U) USB Cable - BW Printer
7) Rear I/O USB3
Verification
4.) Perform a test print, if Printer is present.
Functional Checks
Table 8-365 Cable Holders - ECB, MPS and Rear I/O replacement Functional
Checks
See:
If the MPS or Rear I/O Cable Holder was replaced,
perform the following Functional Checks
Probe/Connectors Checks
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
4-2-5 Top Console checks measured at (record the value) and meets
Perform a 4D sweep
Power SHUT DOWN
DO NOT POWER SHUT DOWN until ALL
4-2-4
functional checks have been performed, if
required
the ECB Cable Holder was replaced

8-11-22 Option Box replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
1 Hour 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.
conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal and
replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential for storing energy must be
discharged or isolated before making contact.
ESD PRECAUTIONS:

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
J11
LOCKOUT
Signed Date (black and red) FROM THE BACKPLANE. See: 8-2-2 "Warnings" on page 8-3 and 8-11-15 "Rear I/
J10
J11 O replacement" on page 8-327.


4. Remove the Printer or Printer Filler Storage, the Printer Tray, the Battery Bracket and 4D Option Cover, if present.
5. Transfer the Rear I/O and Patient I/O Filler or Patient I/O Option, if present.
Continued

• 8-11-15 "Rear I/O replacement" on page 8-327.
• 8-11-16 "Batteries replacement" on page 8-330.
• 8-16-6 "Patient I/O ECG Option replacement" on page 8-417.
CAUTION
Table 8-368 Option Box removal

a 7 mm driver.
Remove the Cover.


2. Disconnect the Batteries power J10 and
J11, and the signal/communication
connections J13 and J14.
LOGIQ E10.
Disconnect all cabling to the Back Plane.

Bracket Assembly to the Option Bracket,
Remove the Tray.

Box.
Option Box.


Cover out.
It is not necessary to remove the 4D Board.
6. Locate the two screws securing the Rear

I/O to the Option Box, above the Batteries.
Remove the screws using a #2 Phillips
screwdriver.

7. Slide the Rear I/O straight off the Option
Box and disconnect the Network Cable and
Power Cable.
8. There are 9 flange nuts securing the Option

Box to the Option Bracket (three are
underneath). ONLY the TOP SIX have to
be removed. The lower three (A), only have
to be loosened.
Loosen the lower three (A) and remove the
top six, using a 7 mm driver.
removed.
away from the Main Power Supply and
continue to remove the Option Box away
from the Card Cage.
A A A

Option Box installation
Table 8-369 Option Box installation
1. Position the replacement Option Box up, slightly and turn it toward the Main Power Supply and
continue to position the Option Box onto the studs to secure the Option Box to the Option
Bracket. Three are underneath the Option Box, in slots.
2. Transfer the Rear I/O, Patient I/O Filler or Patient I/O Option, if present.
the cable.
4. Re-install the Battery Bracket Assembly.
Install the flange nut and secure the Battery Bracket Assembly to the Option Bracket.
5. Install the Batteries last.

Re-install the 4D Cover, if present and re-connect all cabling to the Backplane.
6. Re-install the Printer Tray, Printer Filler Storage or the Printer, if present
7. Re-connect the Batteries and install the Battery Cover.
Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
the functional checks for the Backplane replacement and that particular Option.
Table 8-370 Option Box replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
4-2-7 Basic Measurements LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
Power SHUT DOWN required checks and is ready for use.
the Option was disconnected from the Back Plane.
Continued

Table 8-370 Option Box replacement Functional Checks
See:
ECG
4-2-7
use pencil probes
10-7-7
lead to ground
10-7-8
lead to lead
10-7-9
isolation test
ECG Checks
Active ECG:
4-2-7
monitor.
Diagnostics
4-2-7
Functional Checks
Power Assistant
8-11-23 Card Cage replacement.

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
6 hours 8-2-6 "PPE Required During Service" on page 8-6.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove everything from the Card Cage. A complete list of parts is located in this Table.
Continued


• 8-11-5 "Relay Board (GRLY or RLY) replacement" on page 8-263.
• 8-11-6 "Transmitter Board (ETX) replacement" on page 8-266.
• 8-11-12 "EPM replacement" on page 8-295.
• 8-11-13 "Backplane replacement" on page 8-298.
• 8-11-16 "Batteries replacement" on page 8-330.
• 8-11-17 "HDD replacement" on page 8-335.
• 8-11-18 "Fan Tray replacement" on page 8-339.
• 8-11-19 "Light Block (Hard Drive/Network Status) replacement" on page 8-342.
• 8-11-21 "Cable Holders - ECB, Main Power Supply and Rear I/O replacement" on page 8-348.
• 8-12-2 "MPS replacement" on page 8-369
• 8-13-3 "DVD R/W drive replacement" on page 8-374.
• 8-13-4 "Drive Bay Storage Drawer (DVD Storage) replacement" on page 8-378
• 8-16-5 "CW Option replacement" on page 8-413.
• 8-16-6 "Patient I/O ECG Option replacement" on page 8-417.
Card Cage replacement
CAUTION
NOTE: When removing the HDD, it is not necessary to remove the HDD from HDD Mounting Bracket
or the Rear I/O from the Option Box.
Table 8-373 Card Cage replacement

1. Remove all of the Cards from the Card Cage, remove the Back Plane.
2. Remove the four screws securing the Card
Cage to the Card Rack Mount, using a
7 mm hex wrench.
3. Remove the four screws securing the Card

Cage to the Base Casting, using a 7 mm
hex wrench.
4. Slide the Card Cage out of the console from the right side.
5. Slide the replacement Card Cage into the console from the right side. Secure the Card Cage to
the Base Casting and Card Rack Mount. Torque to 10 +/- 10% Nm (7.4 +/- 0.74 lbf-ft).

Table 8-373 Card Cage replacement

6. Transfer the Cable Holder to the new Card
Cage. Slide the Holders onto the hooks,
with the arrow on the Holder pointing up.
1 - ECB Cable Holder
2
2 - MPS Cable Holder
3 - Rear I/O Cable Holder
7. Re-install all components removed.

8. Before re-installing the Covers, power up the system to verify that it operates as intended.
9. Power down the system and re-install Battery Cover and all Covers removed.
Verification

Functional Checks
the functional checks for the Card Cage replacement and that particular Option.
Table 8-374 Card Cage replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
Power SHUT DOWN
4D checks and is ready for use.
Perform a 4D sweep
CW
4-2-7
use pencil probes
Continued
Table 8-374 Card Cage replacement Functional Checks
See:
ECG
4-2-7
use pencil probes
10-7-7
lead to ground
10-7-8
lead to lead
10-7-9
isolation test
ECG Checks
Active ECG:
4-2-7
monitor.
Diagnostics
4-2-7
Functional Checks
Power Assistant
Shear Wave
4-2-7
Functional Checks
removed.
V Nav
4-2-7
Checks

Section 8-12
MPS (Main Power Supply) replacement
This section describes how to replace the Main Power Supply and components and to service parts.

8-12-2 MPS replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-369
8 - 368 Section 8-12 - MPS (Main Power Supply) replacement

8-12-2 MPS replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, the Mains Cable Hook and the Rear Cover.


MPS removal
Table 8-377 MPS removal

1. NOTE: When the Ultrasound System is in Main PS and mounting
standby, the MPS (PS) will be warm. This is
normal for the PS.
Disconnect the PS Cables:
P6 - USB to ECB J8.
P8 - 24VDC to Printer, if present.
P9 - 48VDC to XYZ Controller.
Remove the three screws that secure the
PS, using a 5 mm hex wrench.
2. Ease the PS away from the fang bracket,

located at the top mounting screw, while
supporting the PS at the bottom center.
Pull/slide the entire PS backwards until the
connectors to the Backplane are unseated.
Pull away from the bottom and upward to
remove the PS.

Main Power Supply installation
Table 8-378 Main Power Supply installation

1. Ease the PS onto the fang bracket (located
at the top mounting screw), while
supporting the PS at the bottom center.
Push/slide the entire PS forwards until the
connectors from the PS are seated to the
connectors on the Backplane (shown).
Attach the lockwasher and flat washer onto
the screws and re-install the three screws
to secure the PS, using a 5 mm hex
wrench. Torque: 10 Nm {7.4 lbf-ft}.
2. Re-connect the PS Cables:

P6 - USB to ECB J8.
P8 - 24VDC to Printer, if present.
P9 - 48VDC to XYZ Controller.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-379 MPS replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
10-7-4 Grounding continuity measured at (record the value) and meets
Perform a 4D sweep

Section 8-13
Peripherals replacement
Follow the instructions in this section to replace peripherals.

8-13-2 Internal Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-374
8-13-3 DVD R/W drive replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-374
8-13-4 Drive Bay Storage Drawer (DVD Storage) replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-378
8-13-5 Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-381
8-13-6 External Peripherals overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-384

8-13-2 Internal Peripherals overview

See: Section 3-5-3 "Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection" on page 3-36.
8-13-3 DVD R/W drive replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover and the Top Cover.
Continued
8 - 374 Section 8-13 - Peripherals replacement



DVD R/W drive removal
Table 8-382 DVD R/W drive removal

1. Disconnect the DVD connector by loosing
the two screws.
2. Remove the screws that secure the DVD to

the DVD bracket.
Slide the DVD forward to remove.
DVD R/W drive installation
Table 8-383 DVD R/W drive installation

1. Slide the replacement DVD into the DVD bracket and align the mounting holes.
2. Re-connect the DVD cable from J2 to the DVD and tighten the connector screws.

Verification

3.) Insert and play DVD to confirm proper operation of the DVD drive.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-384 DVD R/W drive replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-3 Power ON/Boot Up LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
4-2-7 Probe/Connectors Checks 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Leakage Current
4-2-4 Power SHUT DOWN checks and is ready for use.

8-13-4 Drive Bay Storage Drawer (DVD Storage) replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11



Drive Bay Storage Drawer (DVD Storage) replacement
Table 8-387 Drive Bay Storage Drawer (DVD Storage) replacement

1. Remove the screws securing the storage
drawer to the LOGIQ E10. Discard the
screws and drawer in the appropriate
manner.
2. Slide the replacement Storage Drawer into the LOGIQ E10.

Secure the Storage Drawer with the screws supplied.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-388 Drive Bay Storage Drawer (DVD Storage) replacement Functional
Checks
See:

8-13-5 Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT.
DO NOT REMOVE THE CAPACITOR PACK COVER.
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned OFF. AVOID ALL CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL
CONTACTS, CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS. ALWAYS USE NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES
DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS. ALL PARTS
THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED
BEFORE MAKING CONTACT.
MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE CAPACITOR PACK ARE OFF BEFORE REMOVING THE
CAPACITOR PACK. The Capacitor Pack can store up to 112 Volts.
If the system is going to be serviced, keep the following information and precautions in mind:
Charge indicators:
• The capacitor module has LEDs to indicate if the capacitors are charged or not.
• ONLY REMOVE THE CAPACITOR PACK WHEN LEDs ARE OFF.
Discharge times:
• 4.7 seconds after normal shutdown.
• If cables are pulled while the system is on, it takes typically 40 seconds to reach 60 Volts and 5
minutes to fully discharge (0 Volts).
do not PLUG OR UNPLUG CABLES WHEN the POWER IS ON.ONLY PLUG OR UNPLUG CABLES
WHEN the POWER IS OFF.
Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Allow the Capacitor Pack to discharge. LEDs OFF.
4. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover and Capacitor Pack.
Continued


Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement
WARNING DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS

Table 8-391 Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement

1. Remove the three flange nuts securing the
from the Backplane.
2. The Shear Wave Option Capacitor Pack

connects directly to the Backplane.
Locate the Shear Wave Option Capacitor

Pack connector (A) and mounting studs
(circled).

Table 8-391 Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement

3. Align the mounting holes for the Capacitor
Pack to the studs.
With two hands, gently slide the Capacitor
Pack to the Backplane. The Capacitor Pack
will support itself on the Options Bracket.
Using a M7 driver, install the three flange
nuts supplied with the Kit to secure the
Pack to the Options Bracket.
4. Re-install Left Side Cover.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-392 Shear Wave Capacitor Pack replacement Functional Checks
See:
Shear Wave Elastography (Shear Elasto) 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all
4-2-7 required checks and is ready for use.
Functional Checks
8-13-6 External Peripherals overview

See: 5-13-3 "External peripherals" on page 5-28.

Section 8-14
Cables replacement
This section describes how to replace the cables used by LOGIQ E10.

8-14-2 Main Cable replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-386

8-14-2 Main Cable replacement

Manpower
One person, 30 minutes.
Tools / PPE
For tools needed, refer to: 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6 /
Preparations
When preparing for the replacement, you must perform the following steps:
1.) Power down the system.

2.) Disconnect the mains power cable from the wall outlet and all Probes and External I/O Cabling.
3.) Remove six OP Knobs.
4.) Remove the Upper OP, Lower OP, the Left Side Cover, the Top Cover and the Main Cable Cover.
For more information:

• 8-6-16 "Main Cable Cover replacement" on page 8-73.
8 - 386 Section 8-14 - Cables replacement

Main Cable (Harness) removal
Three cable connectors must be disconnected in the Operator Panel area:
1.) The cable with the D-SUB connector was disconnected from the Controller Board when you
removed the Operator Panel, Upper.
2.) Disconnect the HDMI cable from the Bulkhead.
3.) Disconnect the cable from the Z switch (Up/Down control).
4.) If not already done, unscrew the fixing screws on the Ground (GND) Clamp on the Bulkhead
Bracket, so you can release the cables from the clamp.
Two cables are connected to the XY (Frog) brakes. They are routed to connectors inside the rear XY
(Frog) legs. To disconnect these cables, follow this procedure:
1.) Remove the covers on the rear XY (Frog) legs.

2.) Disconnect the cables.
Two cables (from the Main Cable) are connected to the XYZ Control box.
• Disconnect the two cables.

The remaining two cables originate on the I/O at the BEP.
1.) Disconnect the DVI cable from J22.

2.) Disconnect the D-SUB from J21.
The Cable Chain is attached with two screws in the UI end and one screw in the other end.
1.) Remove two screws from the Cable Chain’s anchor point at the lower UI.
2.) Remove one screw on the other end of the Cable Chain.
3.) Remove the Main Cable, including the Cable Chain away from the LOGIQ E10.
Main Cable (Harness) installation
1.) Route the Main Cable, including the Cable Chain into its position.
2.) Install the two screws used to attach the Cable Chain to the UI (Torque: 2.2 Nm {1.6 lbf-ft}).
3.) Install the screw at the other end of the Cable Chain (Torque: 6 Nm {4.4 lbf-ft}).
Route the Main Cable following the steps in
Table 8-393 "Main Cable (Harness) Routing" on page 8-388.

Main Cable (Harness) installation (cont’d)
Table 8-393 Main Cable (Harness) Routing

1. Lay out the cables as shown. DO NOT
cross any cables or allow any excess length
in the Lower OP Frame, except the XYZ
USB Cable (shown below). Make sure the
cables are not crossed coming into the
Lower OP Frame.
Route the USB Cable for the XYZ Switch as

shown. Use the markings on the cable to
position in the tab.
2. There should only be enough cable for the

cable ground shielding to be under the
Grounding Strap Clamp when it is secured.
Also, the USB cables have markings and
should be in the same area.
Notice that the cables are not crossed or

snug when routed into the Lower OP
Frame.
NOTE: Apply Clamp loosely, then connect

cables. Adjust lengths as necessary and
tighten the Clamp.


3. Lay out and arrange the cables from right to
left following the Cable Configuration. Make
sure the cables are not crossed when
routed from the Lower OP Frame into the
Z-Mechanism.
NOTE: The cables coming out of the Main

Cable Harness into the Z-Mechanism
MUST NOT be crossed or run under each
other. Crossing the cables will reduce the
amount of slack necessary for the cables to
flex when the Z-Mechanism and
X-Mechanism moves.
Run all cables in parallel according to the

cable configuration.
Cable configuration, starting from the

right side:
• Video Cable
• XY Cables - two
• Park Lock Cable
• Controller Cable
• USB Cables - two
• Bulkhead/OP Cable
4. Route the Video Cable along the Z-
Mechanism first. Create an “S“ with the
Cable. This will allow the Video Cable to
flex as the Z-Mechanism moves.
NOTE: The Video Cable is on the bottom of

the Main Harness. This is the correct
configuration.


5. Lay the cables in the center of the Upper
Arm of the Z-Mechanism. Follow the
contour of the Upper Arm and maintain the
Cable Configuration from Step 3.
6. With the console raised to its full height,

install the Main Cable Cover so the Cover
overlaps the Main Cable Cover edges.
Slide the Cable Cover back and forth to
make sure it does not bind on the cables.
Install the four screws to secure the Main

Cable Cover and Column Cover Assembly
(tighten by hand).


7. The cables must continue to follow the
Cable Configuration and lay flat (as shown)
when the cables exit the Main Cable Cover.
The Z-Mechanism Power Cable (1) must be

routed beneath the cables and cable
ground shielding must be positioned under
the Grounding Clamp (2) before the clamp
is secured.
NOTE: The cable ground shielding must be

positioned under the Grounding Clamp as
shown to achieve the optimum slack for the
Main Cable Assembly before the clamp is
secured. Use the markings on the USB
Cables to position the USB Cables.
8. Secure the P-clamp for the Video Cable

ground. Keep the P-clamp aligned with the
ground label as the screw is tightened to
prevent the clamp from twisting. The P-
clamp and cable must be aligned with the
label when the clamp is tightened.
NOTE: The Video Cable is routed

underneath the other cables to reach the P-
clamp mounting point.


9. Follow the Cable Configuration, except for
the Video Cable which will be routed first,
then the remaining cables (as shown).
Make sure the cables are flush and behind

the handle. If not, the Upper Cover will
pinch the cables and will be difficult to
install.
NOTE: The Video Cable is routed

underneath the other cables. All cables
MUST lie flat.
10. After the Grounding Clamp and P-clamp
are tightened, gently press the cables into
the Z-Mechanism so the slack is absorbed,
this will allow the cables to flex as the
Z-Mechanism moves.
Perform a manual test of the Z-Mechanism

and XY-Mechanism to ensure the cables
flex into the Z-Mechanism and not out. The
cables should not chafe against the Main
Cable Cover and Column Cover Assembly.
Connect Main Cable (Harness) Cables
1.) Connect the D-SUB to J21 on the BEP I/O.

2.) Connect the DVI to J22 on the BEP I/O.
3.) Connect two cables to the XYZ Control box.
4.) Route and connect the two XY cables.
5.) Connect the HDMI connector to the Bulkhead.
6.) Install the Cable Clamps (Torque: 3 Nm {2.2 lbf-ft}).
7.) Connect the cable to the Z-switch.
8.) Power up LOGIQ E10.
9.) Verify that the XYZ functions operate as they should.
10.)Power down LOGIQ E10.
11.)Install all covers.
12.)Perform Functional Checks. See: - Verification and "Functional Checks" on page 8-393.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-394 Main Cable replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
4-2-7 Color Mode Checks 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all

Section 8-15
V Nav Roll Stand Assembling or Replacement
The purpose of this section is to describe assembly or replacement of the Roll Stand.
NOTE: Be sure the wheels on the Roll Stand are not locked and move the Roll Stand slowly, with
caution to avoid tip over. DO NOT move with the arm extended.
NOTE: The Roll Stand basket is designed to hold the transmitter, which weighs about five pounds
(2.27 kg). DO NOT overload the basket.
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ E10:

WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO
VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS:
TAG
LOCKOUT
& 3. MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG.
Signed Date
1. Power down the LOGIQ E10.


• 4-2-4 "Power SHUT DOWN" on page 4-9
• 8-6-3 "Side Cover(s)/Side Air Intake (Filter) inspection / replacement" on page 8-33
8 - 394 Section 8-15 - V Nav Roll Stand Assembling or Replacement

8-15-1 Parts Reference - Roll Stand
Figure 8-11 Volume Navigation Roll Stand Installation Kit - See: Table 8-397 "Volume Navigation Roll Stand
Installation Kit - Parts Reference" on page 8-396 for item description

8-15-1 Parts Reference - Roll Stand (cont’d)

The following parts and hardware are included with this installation kit (hardware not shown):
Table 8-397 Volume Navigation Roll Stand Installation Kit - Parts Reference
Item # Description Quantity

1 Roll Stand Post, 60 inches 1
2 Roll Stand Base with 21-lb. Counterweight 1
3 5/16-18 x 1 inch Hex Head Cap Screw (HHCS) 1
4 5/16 Flat Washer 1
5 5/16 Split Lock Washer 1
6 GE Volume Navigation Arm 1
7 Cord Loop Hook 1
8 Utility Basket 1
9 Handle 1
10 Track Cover, 12 inches 3
11 Cover Plate 1
not shown 1/4-20 x 3/8 inch Socket Head Cap Screw (SHCS) 4
not shown 1/2 inch Socket Wrench 1
not shown 3/16 inch hex wrench 1

8-15-2 Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand

Use these instructions to assembled or replace the Roll Stand.
1.) Insert the post in the base. The locator pin ensures correct alignment.
Figure 8-12 Post into Base - (1) 5/16 fLAT Washer, (2) 5/16 Lock Washer,
(3) 5/16-18 x 1 inch Screw - Roll Stand only
1
2
3
2.) Using the 1/2 inch socket wrench provided, fasten the post to the base with the hardware shown.

8-15-2 Assembling or replacing the Roll Stand (cont’d)

3.) Slide the cord loop hook, basket and handle into the rear channel in the order shown.
Figure 8-13 Post Assembly
4.) Using the hex wrenches provided, tighten all of the set screws in each accessory to secure the po-
sition in the track.
a.) Tighten the top four set screws with the 3/32 inch hex wrench.
b.) Tighten the center four set screws with the 1/8 inch hex wrench.
c.) Tighten the bottom two set screws with 3/32 inch hex wrench.


5.) Loosen the knob slightly, guide the arm into the channel and move it to the mounting position.
Figure 8-14 Loosening Knob
NOTE: Make sure the Transformer Support Platform (larger view) in Figure 8-14 "Loosening Knob" on
page 8-399 is installed in the UP position.
NOTE: The channel fits between the front and rear slide plates.
Figure 8-15 Channel Location


6.) Tighten the knob to lock the arm into position.
7.) Mount the transmitter (1) on the arm and route the cable through the cable clips (2) on the top side
of the arm.
Figure 8-16 Cable Clips - Roll Stand only
8.) While supporting the arm (loaded with the transmitter), slowly loosen the knob which allows the arm
to gradually move down the channel.
NOTE: The arm must move down the channel very slowly when the knob is loosened, and it must move
easily upward when the lifting arm is in the channel. If the arm free-falls or will not move, follow
the adjustment procedure, see:
8-15-3 "Adjusting Tension on Sliding Mechanism" on page 8-403.


9.) Using the 3/16 inch hex wrench provided, fasten the cover plate to the top of the post with four (4)
1/4-20 x 3/8 inch SHCS as shown.
Figure 8-17 Cover Plate Installation


10.)Snap the three Rear Track Covers into place in locations shown.
Figure 8-18 Rear Track Covers Installation

8-15-3 Adjusting Tension on Sliding Mechanism

Table 8-398 Adjusting Tension on Sliding Mechanism

1. Remove the plastic bolt cap from the lower Plastic Bolt Cap for tension nut and Unlocking
tension nut. Clamping Knob
The clamping knob must be unlocked while

making this adjustment. Using the 1/2 inch
socket wrench, loosen or tighten the
tension nut for the desired tension.
2. Perform Functional Checks.

Verification
1.) Connect cables and Probes removed earlier

2.) Power up the LOGIQ E10 to verify that it operates as intended.
Functional Checks
Perform the following functional checks to confirm the LOGIQ E10 is operational before returning the
LOGIQ E10 to the customer.
Table 8-399 V Nav Roll Stand Assembling or Replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-6 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all
Checks

8-15-4 Routine Maintenance

1.) Periodically inspect all fasteners associated with the mounting system. Tighten them as necessary
for optimal operation and safety.
NOTE: DO NOT overtighten any fasteners.
8-15-5 Cleaning the Mounting Assembly

1.) The mounting assembly may be cleaned with most mild, non-abrasive solutions commonly used in
the hospital environment (e.g., diluted bleach, ammonia, or alcohol solutions).
2.) The surface finish will be damaged permanently by strong chemicals and solvents such as acetone
and trichloroethylene.
3.) Do not use steel wool or other abrasive material to clean the mounting assembly.
4.) The damage caused by the use of unapproved substances or processes will not be covered by
warranty. It is recommended to testing any cleaning solution on a small area of the mounting
assembly, that is not visible, to verify compatibility.
5.) Never submerge the roll stand nor allow liquids to enter the mounting assemblies. Wipe any
cleaning agents off of the mounting assembly immediately, using a water-dampened cloth. Dry all
mounting assemblies thoroughly after cleaning.
CAUTION THE COMPANY MAKES NO CLAIMS REGARDING THE EFFICACY OF THE LISTED CHEMICALS
OR PROCESSES AS A MEANS FOR CONTROLLING INFECTION. CONSULT YOUR HOSPITAL’S
INFECTION CONTROL OFFICER OR EPIDEMIOLOGIST. TO CLEAN OR STERILIZE MOUNTED
INSTRUMENTS OR ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT, REFER TO THE SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS
DELIVERED WITH THOSE PRODUCTS.

Section 8-16
Options replacement
This section describes how to install LOGIQ E10 options.

8-16-2 LOGIQ E10 Options Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-407
8-16-3 LOGIQ E10 Option Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-408
8-16-4 4D Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-409
8-16-5 CW Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-413
8-16-6 Patient I/O ECG Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-417
8-16-7 Power Assistant Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-423
8-16-8 Printer (Digital Graphic) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-427
8-16-9 Shear Wave Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-431
8-16-10 V Nav Option replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-434
8-16-11 Wireless LAN Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-437
8 - 406 Section 8-16 - Options replacement

8-16-2 LOGIQ E10 Options Installation Instructions
Table 8-400 LOGIQ E10 Options
OPTION NAME
4D Option
CW Option
DC Printer Option
External Monitor Option
Patient I/O ECG Option
Power Assistant Option
Shear Wave Option
Patient I O ECG Option
V Nav Option
Wireless LAN Option

8-16-3 LOGIQ E10 Option Location

Table 8-401 LOGIQ E10 Option Location
OPTION NAME and LOCATION
4D, see: 8-16-4 "4D Option replacement" on Shear Wave, see: 8-16-9 "Shear Wave Option
1. 6.
page 8-409. replacement" on page 8-431.
CW, see: 8-16-5 "CW Option replacement" on

2. 7. S-Video (not shown), see: .
page 8-413.
DC Printer, see: 8-16-8 "Printer (Digital Graphic) V Nav, see: 8-16-10 "V Nav Option
3. 8.
replacement" on page 8-427. replacement" on page 8-434.
Patient I/O ECG, see: 8-16-6 "Patient I/O ECG Wireless LAN Option (on ECB), see: 8-16-11
4. 9.
Option replacement" on page 8-417. "Wireless LAN Option" on page 8-437.
Power Assistant, see: 8-16-7 "Power Assistant

5. “
Option replacement" on page 8-423.

8-16-4 4D Option replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11



4D Option removal
For location of the Option in the LOGIQ E10, see: Table 8-401 "LOGIQ E10 Option Location" on page
8-408.
Table 8-404 4D Option removal

4D Motor Controller Cover, using a 7 mm
driver and slide the Cover out.

screwdriver.
Backplane.
4D Option installation
Table 8-405 4D Option installation

1. The 4D Option attaches to the Backplane
with the screws removed and to the
screwlocks.

Table 8-405 4D Option installation

2. If the Extension Adapter for 4D Motor-
controller stays in the Backplane, install the
replacement board.
If the Adapter comes out and is still
attached to the removed board, re-install it
on the replacement board.
3. The 4D Motor Controller connects to the

grasp the replacement Board at the right
end and gently press the Board connector
into the Adapter/Backplane.
Secure the 4D Motor Controller with the two
screws removed.
4. Slide the 4D Motor Controller Cover in and

secure it to the options bracket, using the
two flange nuts removed.
5. Re-connect the Batteries and re-install all Covers removed.

Verification
2.) Connect cables and probes removed earlier.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-406 4D Option replacement Checks
See
5750007-1EN. Equipment passed all required
4-2-7 System CFM and PWD Checks tests and is ready for use.
Perform a 4D sweep

8-16-5 CW Option replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover and Front Cover.


CW Option removal
8-408.
Table 8-409 CW Option removal

1. Pull the CW Option cable straight out to
disconnect from the Backplane.
2. Loosen the two Phillips screws, using a #2

Phillips screwdriver, but do not remove.
Lift the CW Connector, Card Rack Bracket
straight up to remove.

CW Option installation
Table 8-410 CW Option installation

1. Position the CW Connector onto the Card
Rack.
Tighten the two Phillips screws.
2. Connect the CW Option cable to the Backplane.

Verification
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-411 CW Option replacement Functional Checks
See
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
4-2-7 LOGIQ E10 Basic Service Manual, Direction
use pencil probes
5750007-1EN, (latest version). Leakage
4-2-7 Probe/Connectors Checks Current measured at (record the value) and
meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all
required tests and is ready for use.
10-8-4 Chassis Leakage Current Test
Perform a CW scan with P2D, P6D,

8-16-6 Patient I/O ECG Option replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
One person /
30 minutes,
excludes travel
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF. THE ESD WRIST STRAP SHOULD BE
CONNECTED TO ONE OF THE TWO RECEPTICALS INTEGRATED ON THE FRAME,
SPECIFICALLY FOR THAT PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.
Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Left Side Cover, the Battery Cover and the Front Cover. Remove the Shear Wave Option, if present.
• 8-16-9 "Shear Wave Option replacement" on page 8-431, if the Shear Wave Option is present.

Patient I/O ECG Option removal
8-408.
Table 8-414 Patient I/O ECG Option removal

1. If the Shear Wave Option is present,
remove the three flange nuts securing
the Shear Wave Capacitor Pack, using
a 7 mm driver.
With two hands, slide the Capacitor
Pack from the Backplane.
2. Disconnect the ECG USB 2 Signal and

Power Cable from J2 of the Backplane.
Remove the EMI cover (A) from the
Option Box, using a 7 mm driver.
3. Disconnect the Power and USB cable

from P1 and P2 of ECG.

Table 8-414 Patient I/O ECG Option removal

4. Remove the two screws securing the
ECG module.
Slide the ECG module, off the Option
Box.

Patient I/O ECG Option installation
Table 8-415 Patient I/O ECG Option Installation

1. Connect the Power and USB2 cable to the
ECG; Power P2 and USB2 P1 to the ECG
before mounting it to the Option Box.
2. Route the Power/USB2 end of the cable

through the Option Box (as shown).
Secure the ECG to the Option Box, using
the two screws removed.
3. Slide the ECG module, onto the Option

Box.
Re-install the two screws to secure the
ECG module.

Table 8-415 Patient I/O ECG Option Installation

4. Re-connect the Power and USB cable to J2
of the Backplane and install the EMI Cover,
using the flange nut removed. Make sure
the shielding is exposed to the EMI Cover
as shown (A), before tightening the flange
nut. Using a 5.5 mm driver.
If the Shear Wave Option WAS present,
proceed to the next Step. If the Shear Wave
Option WAS NOT present, proceed to
Step 6.

Pack.
Pack to the Backplane. The Pack will
support itself on the options bracket.
Re-install the three flange nuts removed to
secure the Pack to the options bracket.
6. Re-connect the Batteries and all Covers removed.
No calibrations or adjustments are needed after this option installation.
Verification
Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this installation:
4.) Perform and record a scan, and play back to confirm proper ECG operation.

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-416 Patient I/O ECG Option replacement Functional Check
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
4-2-7
use pencil probes
10-7-7
lead to ground
10-7-8
lead to lead
Isolated patient lead (sink) leakage- 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Leakage Current
10-7-9
isolation test measured at (record the value) and meets
ECG Checks
tests and is ready for use.
Active ECG:
4-2-7 Connect cables. Press Display ECG Tab
monitor.
Diagnostics
4-2-7 Functional Checks, if the Shear Wave
Option was present.

8-16-7 Power Assistant Option replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO

TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS:
1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF. THE ESD WRIST STRAP SHOULD BE
CONNECTED TO ONE OF THE TWO RECEPTICALS INTEGRATED ON THE
FRAME, SPECIFICALLY FOR THAT PURPOSE.
2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with
electrical contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive
handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All
parts that have the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated
before making contact.
IF THE SHEAR WAVE OPTION IS PRESENT, MAKE SURE THE LEDS ON THE
CAPACITOR PACK ARE OFF.
Prior to removing the Card Rack Boards, the LEDs on the end of each board
should be unlit, to indicate boards are NOT powered.

When servicing parts of the Ultrasound System where there is exposure to voltage
greater than 30 Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
4. WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AND
Signed Date
THE ON/OFF BUTTON (WHITE LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL) TO TURN OFF, AS

J10 THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION.
TAG
&
5. REMOVE THE BATTERY COVER AND DISCONNECT THE POWER CABLES
J11 J10 and J11 (black and red) FROM THE BACKPLANE. See: 8-2-2 "Warnings" on
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10
page 8-3 and 8-11-15 "Rear I/O replacement" on page 8-327.

J11
Beware that the Main Power Supply, the Batteries, Power Module, ECB Shear Wave
Capacitor Pack may be energized, even if the power is turned OFF if the cord is still
plugged into the AC Outlet.



Power Assistant Option replacement
8-408.
Table 8-419 Power Assistant Option replacement

1. The Power Assistant Option connects
directly to the Backplane.
Remove the two flange nuts securing the
Battery Cover, using a 7 mm driver.
Remove the Cover.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the
Battery Bracket.

Table 8-419 Power Assistant Option replacement

2. With the Batteries power J10 and J11
disconnected (part of the Energy Control
and Power Lockout), disconnect the
signal/communication J13 and J14
connections from the Backplane.
Remove the Batteries.
Regulations vary for different countries.
Dispose of a used battery in accordance
with local regulations.
Slide the replacement Batteries into the
Battery Bracket and connect the power J10
and J11 and signal/communication J13
and J14 connectors to the Backplane.
3. Re-install Battery Cover and Left Side cover.

Verification
1.) Connect cables and Probes you removed earlier.

NOTE: Diagnostics can be performed on a Power Assistant Battery when the battery condition is over
15%. The Battery FRU is shipped at 20~30%. You do not need to check the capacity as a
functional test. If the capacity is less than 15% (normally this does not happen), you will have
to wait for it to charge, it takes around 5 minutes to increase 1%.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-420 Power Assistant Option replacement Functional Checks
See:
Verify Power Assistant Option functions required checks and is ready for use.

8-16-8 Printer (Digital Graphic) replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, Front Cover, Top Cover, Rear Cover, Main Power Supply and Printer.


Printer (Digital Graphic) removal
8-408.
Table 8-423 Removal

2. Note the location of the Printer in the fixing
bracket of the Tray. The leading edge of the
Printer housing (1), is aligned with the
leading edge of the Tray. When the
replacement Printer is installed, it should
be in this same position.
Remove the flange nut (2), using a 7 mm
driver and release the fixing bracket.
Disconnect cables from the back of Printer,
from the Power Supply and the ECB I/O
panel.
3. Slide the Printer out of the Tray.

Printer (Digital Graphic) installation
Table 8-424 Printer (Digital Graphic) installation

1. Slide the Printer into the Tray as noted in removal.
2. Connect the cables to the back of the
printer. Use the new cables provided with
the Printer.
Re-install flange nut and apply slight
pressure, down on the fixing bracket while
tightening the nut.
Remove shipping tape.
3. Re-connect the USB Printer Cable from J12, of the ECB and the Power Cable from the MPS
(P8, 24VDC) to (PWR) on the Printer.

Verification

3.) Test the Print Keys to confirm they function as they did before.
4.) Perform a test print.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-425 Printer (Digital Graphic) replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 Probe/Connectors Checks 5750007-1EN, Rev. 1. Equipment passed all

8-16-9 Shear Wave Option replacement

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time


Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11



Shear Wave Option removal
8-408.
Table 8-428 Shear Wave Option removal

1. Remove the three flange nuts securing the
Shear Wave Capacitor Pack, using a 7 mm
driver.
With two hands, slide the Capacitor Pack
from the Backplane.
Shear Wave Option installation
Table 8-429 Shear Wave Option installation

Pack.
Pack to the Backplane. The Pack will
support itself on the options bracket.
Re-install the three flange nuts removed to
secure the Pack to the options bracket.
2. Re-install Left Side Cover.

Verification

Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-430 Shear Wave Option replacement Functional Checks
See:
Shear Wave Elastography (Shear Elasto) 5750007-1EN, (latest revision). Leakage
4-2-7
Functional Checks Current measured at (record the value) and
10-8-3 Grounding continuity meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all
10-8-4 Chassis Leakage Current Test

8-16-10 V Nav Option replacement

Sometimes referred to as “Bay of Birds” or “3D Drive Bay” or “V Nav” or “Volume Navigation”
Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11



V Nav Option removal
8-408.
Table 8-433 V Nav Option removal

1. Disconnect the cables to the rear of the
V Nav module.
2. Remove the four screws securing the right

side of the V Nav module.
V Nav Option installation
Table 8-434 V Nav Option installation

1. Re-connect cables to the rear of the V Nav module:
• HDMI from V Nav (GRLY Board).
• USB from J7 on the ECB I/O panel.
• PWR from J4 on the ECB I/O panel.
2. Re-install the four screws to secure the right side of the V Nav module.

Verification
4.) Perform scans requiring V Nav module.
Functional Checks
to the customer.
Table 8-435 V Nav Option replacement Functional Checks
See:
4-2-7 B-Mode Checks
4-2-7
Checks

8-16-11 Wireless LAN Option

Manpower /
Tools / PPE
Time
PACK ARE OFF.
PURPOSE.
EQUIPMENT.

Volts:
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
J10

J11

3. Remove the Side Covers, the Battery Cover, Front Cover, Top Cover, Rear Cover, Main Power Supply and Printer.
Continued


• 8-11-10 "WLAN replacement" on page 8-286.
Set-up and Functional Checks are covered in the WLAN Replacement.

Chapter 9
Renewal Parts
Section 9-1
Overview
This chapter gives you an overview of the available Spare Parts for LOGIQ E10 and probes that may
be used on LOGIQ E10.
Contents in this chapter
9-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9-2 List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9-3 Parts list groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-4 LOGIQ E10 Model Software Configuration and Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9-5 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9-6 Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9-7 Top Console parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9-8 XYZ Mechanism parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9-9 Main Console parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9-10 Casters (Wheels) parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9-11 Card Rack parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9-12 Back End parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
9-13 Main Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
9-14 Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
9-15 Mains Power Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9-16 Internal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
9-17 Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9-18 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
9-19 Product Labels on LOGIQ E10 and Consoles used in a Veterinary Environment . . . . . 9-48
9-20 Hardware Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9-1

Section 9-2
List of Abbreviations
Table 9-1 List of Abbreviations
ABBREVIATIONS DESCRIPTION
3D THREE DIMENSIONAL (See: RT3D and 4D)
4D FOUR DIMENSIONAL IS THE SAME AS THREE DIMENSIONAL + REALTIME
ACP AC CONTROLLER (AC POWER)
ACT AC TRANSFORMER
ASSY ASSEMBLY
ECB LOGIQ E10 CARRIER BOARD (BACK END)
CTRL CONTROL
EXT. EXTERNAL
FRU Y REPLACEMENT PART
FRU N NON STOCK PART
I/O INPUT/OUTPUT
INT INTERNAL
LCD LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
OP OPERATOR PANEL
PC PERSONAL COMPUTER (Back End Processor)
PS POWER SUPPLY
PWA PRINTED WIRE ASSEMBLY
QTY QUANTITY USED PER SCANNER
RT3D REAL TIME THREE DIMENSIONAL (Same as 4D)
RX RECEIVER
SWAVE SHEAR WAVE ELASTOGRAPHY
TX TRANSMITTER
XFRMR TRANSFORMER
CW CONTINOUS DOPPLER
ECG ELECTRO CARDIO GRAPHY
9-2 Section 9-2 - List of Abbreviations

Section 9-3
Parts list groups
Table 9-2 Parts List Groups
TABLE NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NUMBER

Table 9-3 LOGIQ E10 Software Configuration and Hardware 9-4
Table 9-4 LOGIQ E10 Software 9-4
Table 9-5 Covers and Bumpers - LOGIQ E10 9-5
Table 9-6 Top Console parts 9-11
Table 9-7 XYZ Mechanism parts 9-16
Table 9-8 Main Console parts 9-18
Table 9-9 Casters (Wheels) parts 9-22
Table 9-10 Card Rack parts 9-24
Table 9-11 Back End parts 9-28
Table 9-12 Main Power Supply 9-30
Table 9-13 Printers 9-31
Table 9-14 Digital Video Disc (DVD) 9-31
Table 9-15 Mains Power Cables 9-32
Table 9-16 Top Console cables 9-35
Table 9-17 XYZ Motor/Brake Control cables 9-36
Table 9-18 Main Power Supply Cables 9-37
Table 9-19 Supported Probes 9-39
Table 9-20 Options 9-44
Table 9-21 Product Labels on LOGIQ E10 and Consoles used in a Veterinary Environment 9-48
Table 9-22 Box 1 of P/N 5310019-2 Hardware Kit Compartment Contents 9-49
Table 9-23 Box 2 of P/N 5310019-2 Hardware Kit Compartment Contents 9-54

Section 9-4
LOGIQ E10 Model Software Configuration and Hardware
Table 9-3 LOGIQ E10 Software Configuration and
Hardware
MODEL SOFTWARE
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER VERSION
LOGIQ E10,
5935000E10 R1.x.x
100-240 VAC
Section 9-5
Software
Table 9-4 LOGIQ E10 Software
ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU
1.
LOGIQ E10, E11, E20 R1.1.0

5793701 1 Y
Software Thumb Drive Assembly
9-4 Section 9-4 - LOGIQ E10 Model Software Configuration and Hardware
Section 9-6
Covers and Bumpers
Table 9-5 Covers and Bumpers - LOGIQ E10 1 of 6
1.
Rear Bumper Assembly

(does not include 5732296-2 5788804FRU 1 Y
Filter - Gray)
2.
Left Side Cover Assembly

(does not include 5732296 5788802FRU 1 Y
Filter - Onyx Black)
3.
Right Side Cover Assembly

(does not include 5732296 5788801FRU 1 Y
Filter - Onyx Black)
4.
Top Cover 5738000 1 Y

5.
Handle Rear 5738012 1 Y
6.
Left Support Assembly Frey 5307245 1 Y
7.
Right Support Asm Frey 5307243 1 Y
8.
LOGIQ E10 Main Diplay Bezel Label 5789927

LOGIQ E10 1 Y
9.
Cover Rear - OLED monitor with label GC307351 1 Y
10.
GE Logo Badge 100MM - Onyx Black 5446869-2 2 Y
9-6 Section 9-6 - Covers and Bumpers

11.
Front Bumper Assembly 5788803FRU 1 Y
12.
Rear Cover 5738009 1 Y
13.
Front Cover Assembly 5788800FRU 1 Y
14. Right Pedal 5738008 (1) 1 Y
15.
1
Left Pedal 5738007 (2) 1 Y

2

16. Contains:
1. Pan Arm Down Cover
2. Lift Arm Cover - Right
3. Lift Arm Cover - Left
4. Joint Cover
5. Extension Arm Cover
6. Rotation Limit Screw
LCD Arm Plastic Covers
(Ergotron Arm)
5957000-1 3 4 1 Y
1
2
6
5
17.
Drive Bay Storage Drawer 5267580-3 1 Y
18.
TVTR Probe Holder Assembly 5306880-3 1 Y
19.
Cover Main Cable - Onyx GA307192-2 1 Y
20.
Cover, Palm Rest Onyx Black 5178069-10 1 Y
9-8 Section 9-6 - Covers and Bumpers

21.
Assembly Column Cover Onyx GA200359-2 1 Y
22.
Bulkhead Cover GA307061 1 Y
23. Includes Sound Exciters

(Sound Exciters are not a FRU)
Cover, UI Upper Assembly 5758936 1 Y
24.
Bin Pivot 5756121 2 Y
25.
EMI Cover - PCI Express

5315881 1 Y
Cable
26.
Bumper Boss Z outer GA307188-2 1 Y

27.
Rear Trim Assembly 5788805FRU 1 Y
9 - 10 Section 9-6 - Covers and Bumpers

Section 9-7
Top Console parts
Table 9-6 Top Console parts 1 of 5

1. English Silicone Keyboard Cover
6208000-50 1 Y
(provided on the Op Panel)
English Keyboard shown
2. French Canadian Silicone Keyboard
6208000-51 1 Y
Cover Esc
~ ?
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Set Home
1
2
F8 F9
Word
F10
Prt Sc
! _ +
3. Norwegian Silicone Keyboard Cover 6208000-52 1
@
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
^
6
&
7
*
8
(
9
)
0 - = 1 Y
4. Swedish Silicone Keyboard Cover 6208000-53 [ ] \ 1 Y
A S D F G H J K L : "
; '
5. Russian Silicone Keyboard Cover 6208000-54 Z X C V B N M < > ?
1 Y
, . / Pg Up
6. Greek Silicone Keyboard Cover 6208000-55 Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ins Del
Home End Pg Dn
1 Y
7. German Silicone Keyboard Cover 6208000-56 1 Y
8. French Silicone Keyboard Cover 6208000-57 1 Y
9.
Tray Unit Assembly 5307236-2 1 Y
10.
Bulkhead Board Assembly

5482676 1 Y
RoHs compliant
11.
Ultrasound Global LCD Arm -

5957000-130 1 Y
OLED Monitor
Chapter 9 Renewal Parts 9 - 11

Table 9-6 Top Console parts 2 of 5 (Continued)

12. The Cover, Rear for this monitor
DOES NOT come with the Monitor. If it needs to be
replaced, order GC307351. See P/N "GC307351"
on page 9-6.
LOGIQ E10 Sony MCM-2250NB

OLED GC200350 1 Y
Monitor 22 inch, Widescreen
13.
Gel Warmer Unit 5245350-10 1 Y
14. Trackball - Removable Style 5393439-20 1 Y
15.
Y TVI
PW
X Z
CW PDI
M CF
View
LOGIQ E10 Lower OPIO and B

Flow
6208000-1 1 Y
Esc
~ ?
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
1
F8 F9 F10
CHI
Furnished Substitute Button Caps 1

!
Q
@
2
W
#
3
E
$
4
R
%
5
T
^
6
Y
&
7
U
*
8
I
(
9
O
)
0
P
_
-
{
+
=
} |
Abc
B
Auto
[ ] \
"
; ' Clear P4
Z X C V B N M < > ?
, . / Pg Up
P1 P2 P3
Home End Pg Dn
Room 3D/4D Elasto

Profile
LOGIQ Contrast
V Nav View
16.
Bezel Lower 6208000-30 1 Y
17. Button Caps 6208000-40 1 Y
9 - 12 Section 9-7 - Top Console parts


18.
A/N Keyboard Mechanics 6208000-60 1 Y
19.
Encoders Joystick 5207000-29 9 Y
20.
Encoders Concentric 6208000-75 4 Y
21.
Knob Kit 6208000-80 1 Y
22.
UI Lower Frame Assembly 5195937-10 1 Y
23.
LOGIQ E10 Monitor Arm Adapter 5452024-10 1 Y


24.
UI Boss Bearing GC307103 1 Y
25.
Probeholder Soft Insert Large (x4) -

5189615-10 1 Y
Onyx Black
26.
Probeholder Soft Insert Small (x2) -

5189156-10 4 Y
Onyx Black
27.
Gel Warmer Knob Replacement Kit 5322780 1 Y
28.
Trackball Mounting Bracket 5776090 1 Y
29. Cable FF
Cable - Trackball 5778028 5778028 REV X

1 Y
#NAME#
#ORIGIN#
#DATE#
9 - 14 Section 9-7 - Top Console parts


30.
LOGIQ E10 Upper Op Panel Assembly 6209000-1 1 Y

Section 9-8
XYZ Mechanism parts
Table 9-7 XYZ Mechanism parts
1. Includes Drive Gear Assembly GA200750
Z-Mechanism Assembly GA200039-2 1 Y
2.
Z-Mechanism Motor GA200034 1 Y
3.
XY Mechanism GC200461-2
4. Includes Z-Mechanism Motor GA200034
Drive Gear Assembly GA200750 1 Y
9 - 16 Section 9-8 - XYZ Mechanism parts

Table 9-7 XYZ Mechanism parts
5.
XY Lock Motor Assembly 5737394 4 Y
6.
Park Lock GA200161-2 1 Y
7.
XYZ Motor Controller 5440179-5 1 Y

Section 9-9
Main Console parts
Table 9-8 Main Console parts 1 of 4

1.
Printer Tray Assembly 5761056 1 Y
2.
Fan Tray Assembly 5716605 1 Y
3.
Black and White Printer Filler Storage 5309088 1 Y
4.
Connector Panel 5728728 1 Y
9 - 18 Section 9-9 - Main Console parts

Table 9-8 Main Console parts 2 of 4 (Continued)

5.
Options Bracket Assembly 5728720 1 Y
6. Side Filter - Onyx Black 5732296 2 Y
7.
Rear Filter - Gray 5732296-2 1 Y
8.
LOGIQ E10 4 Ohm Subwoofer 5261127-3 1 Y
9.
XYZ Switch Assembly, Onyx Black 5691976-10 1 Y


10.
EPS Battery 5778294 1 Y
11.
LED Light Block 5763378 5763378 REV X... ECB J21 1 Y
12.
Probe Cable Hook Twin GA307069 2 Y
13.
Clip - Power Cord 5321359-5 1 Y
14.
Cable Holder ECB 5761237 1 Y
15.
Cable Holder Rear I/O 5761238 1 Y
16.
Cable Holder Main PS 5761239 1 Y
9 - 20 Section 9-9 - Main Console parts


17.
USB Plug 5738022 1 Y
18.
No-bin Plug 5738024 2 Y
19.
Cord Hanger 5738025 1 Y
20.
Bracket - CW Filler 5768326-2 1 Y
21.
Bracket - Patient I/O

5786122 1 Y
Filler Assembly

Section 9-10
Casters (Wheels) parts
Table 9-9 Casters (Wheels) parts 1 of 2
1.
Front Caster 5915000-10 2 Y
2.
Rear Caster 5915000-20 2 Y
3.
Pedal Mechanism Assembly 5311911-2 1 Y
9 - 22 Section 9-10 - Casters (Wheels) parts

Table 9-9 Casters (Wheels) parts 2 of 2 (Continued)
4.
Caster Replacement Kit FC200829 1 Y
5.
Caster Brake-Lock Release Assembly 5312180 1 Y
6.
Casters Hub Cap 5915000-99 1 Y

Section 9-11
Card Rack parts
Table 9-10 Card Rack parts 1 of 4
1.
LOGIQ E10 Backplane Assembly

5503292-30 1 Y
PCIE Gen 3
2.
LOGIQ E10 CRX2

5503294 1 Y
Receive Board Assembly
9 - 24 Section 9-11 - Card Rack parts

Table 9-10 Card Rack parts 2 of 4 (Continued)
3.
LOGIQ E10 Power Module 5751000 1 Y
4.
LOGIQ E10 GRLY 5441000-4 1 Y

5.
LOGIQ E10 ETX 128 5321216-4 1 Y
6. LOGIQ E10 ETX 64 5321216-5 1 Y
7.
F E DC B A Z 1 F E DC B A Z 1 F E DC B A Z F E DC B A Z
1 1
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
P5 P9 P8 P1
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
LOGIQ E10 Frontplane 5716000 2 Y

1 25 1 25 1 25 25
1
P10 P7 P2
P6
22 22 22 22
22 22 22 22
F E D C B A Z F E DC B A Z F E DC B A Z E D FC B A Z
8.
LOGIQ E10 Front Cover Assembly 5716594 1 Y
9 - 26 Section 9-11 - Card Rack parts

9.
LOGIQ E10 Card Rack Chassis 5729373 1 Y
10.
Front Plane Removal Tool 5755089 2 Y

Section 9-12
Back End parts
Table 9-11 Back End parts
1. FRU does not include GPU or SSD
LOGIQ E10 Carrier Board Assembly

5589004 1 Y
RoHS (includes COMX)
2.
GPU NVIDIA Quadro P4000 066E8930 1 Y
3.
SSD (Solid State Drive) 5792621 1 Y
4.
LOGIQ E10 Rear I/O Assembly

5750365 1 Y
without S-video
9 - 28 Section 9-12 - Back End parts

Table 9-11 Back End parts
5.
Mechanical Hard Drive 1TB 5215286-4 1 Y
6.
Solid State Drive 5791596 1 Y
7.
THIS SYSTEM CONTAINS THE

FOLLOWING WIRELESS
MODULE: INTEL 8260NGW
FCC ID: PD98260NG

IC: 1000M-8260NG
LOGIQ E10 WLAN Kit 5786283-2 1 Y
02607-15-02198
Complies with
IDA Standard
DB 02914
HDIF15000519
8.
BIOS Battery
2404028-7 1 Y
Type BR2032

Section 9-13
Main Power Supply
Table 9-12 Main Power Supply
1.
Main Power Supply, Universal AC

5755937-1 1 Y
Input, 100V-240V C14
9 - 30 Section 9-13 - Main Power Supply

Section 9-14
Peripherals
9-14-1 Printers
Table 9-13 Printers
1.
SONY UP-D898DC Black and White

5535200 1 Y
Thermal Printer for Ultrasound
2.
SONY UP-DR80MD Medical

5555266 1 Y
Grade A4 Printer
9-14-2 Digital Video Disc (DVD) Drive

Table 9-14 Digital Video Disc (DVD)
1.
DVD Assembly 5305921-6 1 Y

Section 9-15
Mains Power Cables
Table 9-15 Mains Power Cables 1 of 2
PART
ITEM PART NAME NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU
1.
Power Cord 110V for Canada,USA 2388982 1 Y
2.
Power Cord for UK 5182816 1 Y
3.
Power Cord for South Africa 5408183 Rev x

H
1 Y
WW.YYYY
Country of origin:
China
4.
Power Cord for Argentina 5182942 1 Y
5.
Power Cord for Israel 5182453 1 Y
6.
Power Cord for Switzerland 5182235 1 Y
7.
Power Cord for Denmark 5182083 1 Y
8.
Power Cord for Japan 5408490 1 Y
9 - 32 Section 9-15 - Mains Power Cables

Table 9-15 Mains Power Cables 2 of 2 (Continued)
PART
9.
Power Cord for ANZ 5182296 1 Y

LABEL
10.
Power Cord for China 2388981 1 Y
11.
Power Cord for India 5182611 Rev x

1 Y
H
WW.YYYY
Country of origin:
China
12.
Power Cord for Italy 5182940 1 Y
13.
Power Cord for Brazil 5399665 1 Y

5
REV _
H4000ZM
YYYYMMMDD
XXXXXX
MADE IN XXX Country Of Origin
14.
Power Cord 220V for EU 2327990 1 Y

Section 9-16
Internal Cables
• 9-16-1 "LOGIQ E10 Cables" on page 9-35

• 9-16-2 "Main Power Supply cables" on page 9-37
9 - 34 Section 9-16 - Internal Cables

9-16-1 LOGIQ E10 Cables

Figure 9-1 LOGIQ E10 Cable diagrams
USB
GEL WARMER
TEMP
CONTROL F
BB
EXT PORTS
POWER UPPER OP R7
5V
SUB USB3
J25
WOOFER R
HUB
BULKHEAD
P T BOARD 5V
J21
P1 P5
USB USB3 J16
4D SHEAR WAVE HUB
PATIENT IO (OPTIONAL) USB
OPTION) MOTORCONTROL P8 J23 J17
(OPTIONAL) AUDIO
P3 48V
3.3V 3.3V
P4 12V 5V 3.3V
Touch Bklight +
P6 +48V
REG Ctrl VPD Ctrl
AA
P10
L 5V TOUCH
4D ADAPTER 12w"
VIDEO
CTRL
CW PROBE
BACKPLANE J22
CONNECTION E1
(BT2010 Ver D
OPTION) BULKHEAD
UP/DN/LOCK
E2 PLATE
BUTTONS
W
OP PANEL R
METAL SHIELD
METAL SHIELD
D
D1
VPD
V
BW PWR
PRINTER USB
(OPTIONAL)
U CC
J
I K
+3.3V
+5V
USB USB3 PORT 1

HUB
USB3 PORT 2
CTRL
GRAPHICS
+ VPD
CARD
ISOL
NETWORK
ATE
HDMI OUT
SCAN
SVIDEO OUT
L CONVERT
REAR IO
M
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
24vdc
48vdc
CONTROL
O G
PWR
HARD
DRIVE
SATA
Z MOTOR
X-Y
H LOCK
O
XYZ CONTROLLER
MOTOR
PWR
Q FROG
DVD
BRAKES
SATA
INNER OUTER
LEFT BRAKE LEFT BRAKE
B C
Z
VNAV
INSIDE
Y
BAYBIRD B
(VGU USB N
OPTION)
POWER
INNER
C OUTER
RIGHT BRAKE RIGHT BRAKE
X
Table 9-16 Top Console cables
1. Cable T
Gel Warmer Power 5245462 1 Y

9-16-1 LOGIQ E10 Cables (cont’d)

Table 9-17 XYZ Motor/Brake Control cables
1. Cable N
(750 mm)
Cable - ECB USB to XYZ Controller 5194492-22 1 Y
XYZ MOTOR CONTROL 5194492-22 ECB J11
2. Cable Q
MOTOR CTRL 5310448.... XY LOCK
Cable - XY-Lock 5310448 2 Y

9-16-2 Main Power Supply cables

Table 9-18 Main Power Supply Cables 1 of 2
1. Cable G
Cable - ECB USB to Main PS 5194492-20 (580 mm) 1 Y

MAIN PS 5194492-20 ECB J8
2. Cable H
Cable - XYZ Controller Power 5731039 MAIN PS P9 5731039 REV X XYZ CONTROLLER J9
1 Y
3. Cable BB
Cable - PWR-USB, Backplane to
5746119 1 Y
Patient I/O BACKPLANE J2 5746119 ...... PATIENT IO
4. Cable O
CABLE - eSATA 15-7 USB-C 5737007 2 Y

HD / DVD 5737007 REV X ECB J1 / J2
5. Cable J
REAR IO J4 5737395........ ECB J14
Cable - ECB USB3 to Rear I/O 5737395 1 Y
6. Cable M
ECB J9 5746116......... REAR IO J2

Cable - ECB HDMI to Rear I/O 5746116 1 Y
7. Cable L
ECB J21 5746117 REV X REAR IO J1
Cable - ECB Network to Rear I/O 5746117 1 Y
8. Cable I
Cable - Power Backplane to Rear I/O 5746118 1 Y
BACKPLANE 5746118 ...... REAR IO J5
9. Cable D
ECB
J5
ECB
J15 BACK
ECB PLAN
J6 E J12
Main Cable Assembly 5272357-13 1 Y

UPPE
R OP
J22
UPPE
R OP
J21

Table 9-18 Main Power Supply Cables 2 of 2 (Continued)
10. Cable U
Cable - ECB USB to BW Printer 5194492-21 (900 mm) 1 Y

BW PRINTER 5194492-21.... ECB J12
11. Cable X
Cable - Power ECB to BAYBIRD 5244550-11 ECB J3 OR J4 5244550-11.... BAYBIRD POWER

1 Y
12. Cable W
CW Cable with Bracket 5768228 1 Y
13. Cable Y
Cable - USB_ECB to BAYBIRD 5194492-24 (500 mm) 1 Y

BAY BIRD 5194492-24....
ECB J7
14. Cable Z
Cable V Nav 5439524 1 Y
DRIVE BAY
15. Cable R
Cable - XYZ Switch Board 5198990 1 Y
16. Cable P
Cable - RCA Audio, BEP to

5194498-2 1 Y
Silver Flute Subwoofer SUBWOOFER 5194498-2 REV x BEP J33
17. Cable CC
Cable - Power, ECB to GPU 5761667 5761667 REV X
1 Y
#NAME# #ORIGIN#
#DATE#
18. Cable K
(860 mm)
Cable - USB ECB to Rear IO 5194492-23 1 Y
REAR IO J3 5194492-23........... ECB J13
19. Cable F
Cable - USB OP Bulkhead, FREY 5248610 1 Y

BULKHEAD P7/P8 5248610 REV OP PANEL J24/J25

Section 9-17
Probes
Table 9-19 Supported Probes 1 of 5
MINIMUM
PROBE CATALOG NUMBER PART NUMBER COMMENTS SOFTWARE
REQUIRED
IC5-9-D H40442LK 5499592 R1.x.x or later
L8-18I-D H40452LL 5499594 R1.x.x or later
C2-9-D H40462LN 5499605 RoHs R1.x.x or later
C1-6-D H40472LT 5499606 R1.x.x or later

Table 9-19 Supported Probes 2 of 5 (Continued)
MINIMUM
REQUIRED
C1-6VN-D H40472LW 5476279 R1.x.x or later
C2-9VN-D H40472LY 5488219 R1.x.x or later
C3-10-D H40482LB 5493012 R1.x.x or later
M5Sc-D H44901AE 5446030 R1.x.x or later
9 - 40 Section 9-17 - Probes

MINIMUM
REQUIRED
ML6-15-D H40452LG 5499600 R1.x.x or later
L2-9-D H44901AI 5765796 R1.x.x or later
L2-9VN-D H44901AJ 5765797 R1.x.x or later

MINIMUM
REQUIRED
ML4-16-D H44901AK 5754883 R1.x.x or later
ML4-16VN-D H44901AL 5763594 R1.x.x or later
Included with H46402LW
6Tc-RS H45551ZE 5729431 R1.x.x or later
Included with H46402LW

to be used with H45551ZE
RS-DLP Adapter H46352LK 5444874 R1.x.x or later
9 - 42 Section 9-17 - Probes

MINIMUM
REQUIRED
C2-7-D H46422LM 5505700 R1.x.x or later
C2-7D-LC H46422LP 5505702 LC = Longer Cable R1.x.x or later
C2-7VN-D H46422LN 5505701 R1.x.x or later
P2D H4830JE TE100024 R1.x.x or later
RIC5-9-D 4D KTZ304111 KTZ303987 R1.x.x or later
RAB6-D H48681MG KTZ303986 R1.x.x or later

Section 9-18
Options
Table 9-20 Options 1 of 4

1.
Right Bin 5758404 1 Y
2.
Left Bin 5758402 1 Y
3.
Single Bin 5738020 2 Y
4.
DC4D Assembly 5372959 1 Y
5.
Extension Adapter for 4D

5736042 1 Y
Motor-controller
9 - 44 Section 9-18 - Options

Table 9-20 Options 2 of 4 (Continued)

6.
Cover - 4DMC Assembly 5761216 1 Y
7.
Shear Wave Module 5728716 1 Y
8.
DVD Assembly 5305921-6 1 Y
9.
Patient IO Module III - RoHS GB200010-2 1 Y


10.
Battery Bracket Assembly 5728704 1 Y
11.
Battery Pack 5450061 2 Y
12.
Probeholder Insert for 4D Probe - Onyx Black 5307472-2 1 Y
13. Cable V
Cable - 24V Power Main PS to BW Printer 5758058 1 Y
BW PRINTER 5758058 REV X #NAME# #ORIGIN# #DATE# MAIN PS
14.
HP Officejet Pro 8210 Printer 5763696 1 Y
9 - 46 Section 9-18 - Options


15.
LOGIQ E10 Rear I/O Assembly

5750365-2 1 Y
with S-video
16. DriveBay2+ (System Electronics Unit) 5459862 1 Y
17. V Nav, Drive Bay 3D Tracking System

5457453 1 Y
Mid Range Transmitter Assembly
18.
Stand for Tru3D Transmitter 5268740 1 Y

Section 9-19
Product Labels on LOGIQ E10 and Consoles used in a Veterinary Environment
Table 9-21 Product Labels on LOGIQ E10 and Consoles used in a Veterinary Environment
PART
1.
LOGIQ E10
GE Medical Systems Ultrasound
and Primary Care Diagnostic, LLC
9900 Innovation Drive
Wauwatosa, WI, USA, 53226
Back Cover Label 5789698 1 Y

20
Authorized European Representative:

GE Medical Systems SCS
283 rue de la Miniere
78530 Buc France
5789698REV 2
2. GE Care_system Id Label 2112014-2 1 Y
3.
Side Cover Vet Label 5790735 2 Y
4.
AFU Vet Safety Label 5723475 1 Y
5.
Vet Caution Label 5136239-S 1 Y
9 - 48 Section 9-19 - Product Labels on LOGIQ E10 and Consoles used in a Veterinary Environment
Section 9-20
Hardware Kit
Hardware Kit for LOGIQ E10 (includes two boxes with hardware) See: Figure 9-2 and Figure 9-3 "Box
2 of P/N 5310019-2 Hardware Kit" on page 9-54. See: Table 9-22 and Table 9-23 "Box 2 of P/N
5310019-2 Hardware Kit Compartment Contents" on page 9-54 to identify and keep the kit organized.
NOTE: This Kit is also used on the LOGIQ E9
Figure 9-2 Box 1 of P/N 5310019-2 Hardware Kit
Table 9-22 Box 1 of P/N 5310019-2 Hardware Kit Compartment Contents
Number Thumbnail Contents Where Used
Flat Washer, ISO7089, M3, Steel 140HV, Zinc

1.) Bulkhead Board Assy
Plated, RoHS Fastener

2.) OP panel; Z-Mech

3.) Cable hook; bumper rear; cover rear

4.) Top cover; bracket rear handle
Large Flat Washer, ISO7093, M6, Steel 140HV, Zinc

5.) Main PS; BEP; Cardrack

6.) Washer, OD 10mm, ID 6.5mm Pedal brake Rod assy
7.) Washer 20-6.5 - 1mm Pedal Mechanism Rod assy

8.) Casters

9.) Rear caster
External Toothed Lock Washer, DIN 6797A, M3,

10.) Subwoofer (newer consoles)
Spring Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS Fastener
External Toothed Lock Washer, DIN 6797A, M4, Arm adapter; Z-Mech; trackball; subwoofer onBT09/BT10
11.)
Spring Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS Fastener consoles, Removable trackball ground lead
External Toothed Lock Washer, DIN 6797A, M5,

12.) XY Mech; Z-Mech
Internal Toothed Lock Washer, DIN 6797J, M3,

13.) Printer bracket to printer (SWE option)
Internal Toothed Lock Washer, DIN 6797J, M5,

14.) Printer bracket to mount (SWE option)
Curved Lock Washer, DIN 128A, M5, Spring Steel, Daeil arm; kortek monitor to ergotron arm (+ if LCD is updated in
15.)
Zinc Plated, RoHS Fastener the field)
Curved Lock Washer, DIN 128A, M6, Spring Steel,

16.) Card rack; power supply; BEP
Zinc Plated, RoHS Fastener
17.) Flat Washer, ISO7089, M4, Nylon, RoHS Fastener BEP5 EPS
9 - 50 Section 9-20 - Hardware Kit

18.) Washer POM Bearing Rod Caster lock release assembly
19.) Washer, Front Cover ICHIRO Cover front
20.) Spacer Op panel Operator panel
Hexagon Prevailing Torque Nut, ISO7040, M2.5-

21.) Removable fan tray magnetic catch
0.45, Grade 8 Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS Fastener
Hex Nut with Integral Lock Washer, ISO 4032, M4-

22.) Harness BEP5 power
0.7 Class 8 Steel, Zinc Plated RoHS Fastener
Hexagon Nut with Lock Washer, M6-1, Grade 8

23.) Pedal Rod assy
Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS Fastener
Hexagon Nut, ISO4032, M6-1.0, Grade 8 Steel, Zinc

24.) Rod assembly
Phillips Pan Head Screw, ISO 7045, M3-0.5, X6mm

25.) XYZ MC; printer bracket
Long, Grade 4.8 Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS Fastener
Phillips Pan Head Screw, ISO 7045, M3-0.5, X8mm

26.) Infestation guard -Removable fan tray consoles
Phillips Pan Head Screw, ISO 7045, M3-0.5,

27.) X12mm Long, Grade 4.8 Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS Subwoofer; BEP5 PS
Fastener
Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw_M3-

28.) DVD; VNAV; BEP5 EPS; 4D MC
0.5_ X6mm Long Zinc Plated Steel_RoHS Fastener
Freedriv Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine

29.) Screw_M3-0.5_ X8mm Long Zinc Plated Bulkhead Board Assy; 4D MC
Steel_RoHS Fastener


30.) Screw_M3-0.5_ X12mm Long Zinc Plated BEP5 cable connectors
Steel_RoHS Fastener
Screw for Thermoplastics Phillips Head with Washer

63.) Side Covers; removable fan tray cover
-WH5411- Dia. 4.0, Length 8
64.) Locking Post Kit Bulkhead board; BEP5 I/O board
65.) Hex Standoff M3 x 5, with 6.5 long M3 Male Thread Bulkhead plate
Cross Recessed, PHILLIPS, Pan Head Machine

66.) Screw, ASME B18.6.3 TYPE I, #6-32 X 1_2 Inch BEP5 MB
Long, Stainless Steel 18-8, RoHS
Plastic snap rivet, Black. Hole 4.1 to 4.2mm.

67.) BEP5 fan
Thickness 4.5 to 5.5mm
Cross Recessed Pan Head Tapping Screw, ST 4,2

68.) Palm rest
X 13mm Long, Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS Fastener

69.) Foot rest

70.) Speaker assy

71.) Foot rest

72.) Foot rest
74.) Spacer round, AA5010-60-08.0-25 Pedal rod assy

Custom Divider Series StowAway Utility Box

75.) Hardware kit box

Section 9-20 Hardware Kit (cont’d)

Use this Table 9-23 to help identify contents of the Hardware Kit, Box 2 (Figure 9-3) and keep them
organized.
Figure 9-3 Box 2 of P/N 5310019-2 Hardware Kit

31.) Screw_M4-0.7_ X6mm Long Zinc Plated Z Bracket; patient I/O filler; XYZ MC
Steel_RoHS Fastener

Bracket CW filler; EMI cover PCI express cable; BEP5 door;
32.) Screw_M4-0.7_ X8mm Long Zinc Plated
ground lead on arm adapter; removable fan tray side cover
Steel_RoHS Fastener
Freedriv Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Filler bracket; Column cover assy; Z-Mech; Op panel lower;
33.) Screw_M4-0.7_ X10mm Long Zinc Plated removable trackball screws; LCD mon to Ergotron arm; OLED
Steel_RoHS Fastener and 23" mon to arm

34.) Screw_M4-0.7_ X12mm Long Zinc Plated Subwoofer cable P clamp; Card rack cover (Vnav inside)
Steel_RoHS Fastener

35.) Screw_M4-0.7_ X25mm Long Zinc Plated OP panel lower
Steel_RoHS Fastener

36.) Screw_M4-0.7_ X35mm Long Zinc Plated Trackball (not removable)
Steel_RoHS Fastener


37.) Screw_M4-0.7_ X40mm Long Zinc Plated OP panel upper
Steel_RoHS Fastener
Hexalobular Socket Flat C-Sunk Head Screw_ M4-

38.) 0.7_ X8mm Long_Grade 8.8_Zinc Plated Bracket main cable mount
Blue_RoHS Fastener
Phillips Flat Head Screw, ISO 7046, M4-0.7, X10mm

39.) Bracket main cable mount; rear handle
40.) Nylon M4 X 35 Pan Head Phillips Machine Screw BEP5 EPS
41.) Screw TP LCD Monitor to arm
Phillips Pan Head Screw, ISO 7045, M5-0.8 X 10MM

42.) Printer bracket
Long, Class 4.8 Steel, Zinc Plated RoHS Fastener

43.) Screw_M5-0.8_ X16mm Long Zinc Plated Cable hook; bumper rear; cover rear; LCD mount lock assy
Steel_RoHS Fastener

44.) Screw_M5-0.8_ X25mm Long Zinc Plated Gel warmer and tray
Steel_RoHS Fastener
Socket Pan Head Screw_ M5-0.8_X8mm

45.) Z-Mech
Long_Steel 8.8,Zinc Plated Blue_ RoHS Fastener
Hexalobular Socket Pan Head Screw_ M5-

46.) 0.8_X16mm Long_Steel 8.8,Zinc Plated Blue_ Main Cable Assembly
RoHS Fastener
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M5-0.8, X16mm

47.) Long, Grade12.9 Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS LCD monitor to Daeil arm
Fastener
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, ISO 4762, M5-

48.) 0.8, X50mm Long, Grade 8.8 Steel, Black Oxide, LCD arm adapter for ergotron arm
RoHS Fastener


49.) Screw_M6-1_ X16mm Long Zinc Plated Top cover; Front cover
Steel_RoHS Fastener

50.) 1_X16mm Long_Steel 8.8,Zinc Plated Blue_ RoHS Plate targa; bracket rear handle; main cable assy; Z-Mech
Fastener

51.) 1_X20mm Long_Steel 8.8,Zinc Plated Blue_ RoHS Bulkhead plate
Fastener

52.) 1_X25mm Long_Steel 8.8,Zinc Plated Blue_ RoHS Clamp main cable under the lower op
Fastener

53.) 1_X30mm Long_Steel 8.8,Zinc Plated Blue_ RoHS Z-Mech; break rod assy
Fastener

54.) 1_X45mm Long_Steel 8.8,Zinc Plated Blue_ RoHS Bulkhead plate
Fastener
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M6-1, X16mm

55.) Z-Mech motor; cardrack

56.) Long, Grade12.9 Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS Power supply; BEP
Fastener

57.) Card rack
Hexalobular Socket Flat C-Sunk Head Screw_ M6-

Card rack mount to base; bracket lock cover side; clamp frame
58.) 1_ X16mm Long_Grade 8.8_Zinc Plated
main cable
Blue_RoHS Fastener

59.) 1.25_X20mm Long_Steel 8.8,Zinc Plated Blue_ Caster; pedal brake
RoHS Fastener
Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw, M8-1.25,

60.) X30mm Long, Grade 8.8 Steel, Zinc Plated, RoHS Z-Mech
Fastener


61.) X40mm Long, Grade12.9 Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS Rear caster
Fastener

62.) X40mm Long, Grade12.9 Steel, Black Oxide, RoHS Targa back
Fastener
75.) Custom Divider Series StowAway Utility Box Hardware kit box


Chapter 10
Care & Maintenance
Section 10-1
Overview
10-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 10
This chapter describes Care and Maintenance on the Ultrasound system and peripherals. These
procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the Ultrasound system’s performance. Read this
chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.
10-1-2 Periodic maintenance inspections

It has been determined by engineering that your Ultrasound System does not have any high wear
components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance inspections are mandatory.
However, some customers’ Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or
inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.
Table 10-1 Contents in Chapter 10
Section Description Page Number

10-1 Overview 10-1
10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-3
10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-4
10-4 System maintenance 10-7
10-5 Tools Required 10-8
10-6 Using a Phantom 10-12
10-7 Electrical Safety Tests 10-12
10-8 When There’s Too Much Leakage Current... 10-29
DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION,

AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT
THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND SWITCH OFF THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER
BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS
STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.
CAUTION PRACTICE GOOD ESD PREVENTION. WEAR AN ANTI–STATIC STRAP WHEN HANDLING
ELECTRONIC PARTS AND EVEN WHEN DISCONNECTING/CONNECTING CABLES.
CAUTION DO NOT PULL OUT OR INSERT CIRCUIT BOARDS WHILE POWER IS ON.
CAUTION DO NOT OPERATE THIS SYSTEM UNLESS ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE, TO ENSURE OPTIMAL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND COOLING.
WHEN COVERS ARE REMOVED, EMI MAY BE PRESENT.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10 - 1

10-1-3 Grounding Points

There are several grounding points on the LOGIQ E10. The grounding points must be used when an
ESD is used during servicing of the LOGIQ E10.
Any unpainted or coated metal surface that is grounded to the Base Casting (chassis):
• the Card Cage

• the Frame
• the Main Power Supply
The ground stud near the Circuit breaker and ON/OFF button is one location.
Figure 10-1 LOGIQ E10 Main Power Supply Grounding
Point
10 - 2 Section 10-1 - Overview

Section 10-2
Why do Maintenance
10-2-1 Keeping Records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of periodic and corrective
maintenance. The Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC and IQC), see: 10-8-6 "Ultrasound
Equipment Quality Check (EQC and IQC)" on page 10-30, provides the customer with documentation
that the Ultrasound system is maintained on a periodic basis.
A copy of the Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check form should be kept in the same room or near the
Ultrasound system.
10-2-2 Quality Assurance

In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it
is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each Ultrasound
system. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or
appropriate designee.
Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period
so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.
Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and
maintained on the site.
Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for
a quality assurance program. Contact GE for coverage and/or price for service.

Section 10-3
Maintenance Task Schedule
10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?
The Care and Maintenance task schedule specifies how often your Ultrasound System should be
serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.
NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the Ultrasound System care and maintenance is
performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and
performance.
Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your Ultrasound System and can best
provide competent, efficient service. Contact GE for coverage information and/or price for service.
The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care and Maintenance Task
Schedule assumes that you use your Ultrasound System for an average patient load and not use it as
a primary mobile Ultrasound system which is transported between diagnostic facilities.
NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to
increase the periodic maintenance frequencies.
Refer to the Customer Care Schedule in the service manual for the Ultrasound System for the
recommended maintenance care schedule. See: Table 10-2 "Customer Care Schedule" on page 10-5.
10 - 4 Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule

10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? (cont’d)
Abbreviations used in the Customer Care Schedule Table 10-2:
D = Daily W = Weekly M = Monthly A = Annually

Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule
Item Service at Indicated Time D W M A Notes
Air Filter Grid Remove the filter grid and clean the air filter. • Or at least bi-weekly
AC Mains Cable Inspect AC Mains Cable • Mobile Unit Check weekly
Check if all cables are fixed well seated at

also after corrective
Cables and Connectors the correct position and if there is no • maintenance
mechanical damage visible.
Clean alphanumerical keyboard, Functional Be careful not to get the cloth

keys, Digital potentiometers, TGC-Shift too wet so that moisture does
User Interface
potentiometers. (vacuum cleaner, lukewarm
• not enter the loudspeakers,
soap water on a soft, damp cloth) TGC-Slider, or other keys!
Clean LCD Monitor surface and Probe Be careful not to get the cloth
LCD Monitor, Touch
Panel and Probe holder
holder with a fluid detergent in warm water • too wet so that moisture does
on a soft, damp cloth. not enter the entire system.
Clean and inspect the mechanical function

of wheels, casters, brakes and swivel locks
Mechanical parts as well as side door, foot rest, front and rear • Mobile Unit Check Daily
handle, and monitor holder.
Remove Dust and Coupling gel.
Control Console Check Translation/Rotation and Height

movement Adjustment (Elevation)
• more frequently at Mobile Units
Check proper operation If failure occurs go to trackball

Trackball Check
(Cursor movement X, Y direction)
• cleaning.
Remove trackball ring; open the trackball

Please record it in the systems
Trackball Cleaning housing and take out the trackball to clean it • setup maintenance report
with soft tissue and screwdriver shaft.
* save the image filing data

Disk Drives Test Image filing (Archive) Import and weekly or at least monthly on
(Data Backup) Export data capability (DVD/CD Drive)
• •* DVD/CD depending on the
number of examinations
Clean probes and probe cables and check

acoustic lens housing (cracks) and probe
Safe Probe Operation cables. In case of mechanical damage, •* * or before each use
don’t use them! Danger: Safety risk for
operator and patient.
To detect air bubbles in filling liquid, shake

Probe Air bubbles the probe carefully and check abnormal •
noise.
Remove dust/dirt of all probe connectors.

Probe connectors
Clean with vacuum cleaner if dust is visible.
•
Also after corrective
Console Leakage
Current Checks
• maintenance or as required by
your facilities QA program.

Peripheral Leakage
Current Checks

Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule
Item Service at Indicated Time D W M A Notes

Surface Probe Leakage
Current Checks
Endocavity Probe Also after corrective

Leakage • maintenance or as required by
Current Checks your facilities QA program.

Measurement Accuracy
Checks
Check axial and lateral resolution (see Basic

User Manual Technical specifications).
Check Gain and TGC changes, vary the Also after corrective
Probe/Phantom Checks focus and check reaction on screen. Check • maintenance or as required by
deviation of brightness in the US-Image your facilities QA program.
(missing elements / probe cable defect).
Probe must be coupled as this test.
Functional Checks of all Check general functions and image Also after corrective
probes section 10-5-3 appearance at human body with all • maintenance or as required by
on page 10-9 available Modes. your facilities QA program.
10 - 6 Section 10-3 - Maintenance Task Schedule

Section 10-4
System maintenance
10-4-1 Preliminary checks
The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the Ultrasound system user
documentation whenever necessary.
Table 10-3 System preliminary checks
Step Item Description

1. Ask and Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.
2. Paperwork Fill in the top of the EQC inspection form. Record all probes and Ultrasound system options.
3. • Turn the Ultrasound system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on.
• Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.
Power up
• Where applicable, confirm that the battery is charged. If no AC Input present, use the internal
battery.
4. Probes Verify that the Ultrasound system properly recognizes all probes.
5. Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel (where present).
6. Where applicable, for Warranty and Contract Customers only:

InSite • Verify that InSite is functioning properly.
• Ensure two-way remote communications.
7. Review Where applicable, Error Logs can be reviewed via system diagnostics.
Error Logs
8. Diagnostics Optional.
9. Presets Backup all Customer Presets to an appropriate media.

10. Image Archive Back up the Image Archive onto appropriate media.

Section 10-5
Tools Required
10-5-1 Tools, supplies and equipment
Table 10-4 lists the suggested tools, supplies and equipment that can be used during the maintenance
tasks.
Specific requirements for periodic maintenance
See: Table 10-4 and 8-2-5 "Tools needed for servicing the LOGIQ E10" on page 8-6.
Table 10-4 Tools Supplies and Equipment
Item Comments
Digital Volt Meter (DVM)
Anti Static Kit Typically includes antistatic-mat, wrist strap and ground cable.
Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner If available on site.
Any calibrated Electrical Safety Analyzer compliant with AAMI/

Safety Analyzer
ESI 1993 or IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551.
Phantom If available on site.
CD-R/DVD-R Media
(minimum quad speed)
DVD+RW Disc Media blank
B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet see printer user manual for requirements.
Color Printer Cleaning Sheet see printer user manual for requirements.
Disposable Gloves
10 - 8 Section 10-5 - Tools Required

10-5-2 Functional checks

The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the Ultrasound system user
documentation whenever necessary.
10-5-3 System functional checks

Table 10-5 System functional checks
Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic Ultrasound system controls that affect this
1 B-Mode
mode of operation.
Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic Ultrasound system controls
2 CF-Mode
that affect this mode of operation.
3 Doppler Modes Where applicable, verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic
Ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of operation.
Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic Ultrasound system controls that affect this mode
4 M-Mode
of operation.
Where applicable, verify basic 3D Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this
5 3D Mode
mode of operation.
RealTime 4D Where applicable, verify basic RealTime 4D Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that
6
Mode affect this mode of operation.
Basic
7 Check Distance and Tissue Depth Measurement.
Measurements
Perform an Element Test on each probe to verify that all the probe elements and system channels
8 Probe Elements
are functional.
Applicable
Verify the basic operation of all optional modes. Check the basic system controls that affect each
9 Software
options operation.
Options
System
10 Perform the Automatic Tests.
Diagnostic
Transmit/ Use the Visual Channel Utility on the 12L probe to verify that all system xmit/recv channels are
11
Receive functional.
Operator Panel
12 Perform the Operator Panel Test Procedure.
test
13 Keyboard Do the interactive keyboard test.
14 Touch Panel Where applicable, verify basic Touch Panel display functions.
15 Monitor Verify basic monitor display functions.
16 Peripherals See: 10-5-4 "Peripheral/option checks" on page 10-10‘.

10-5-4 Peripheral/option checks

If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted.
Table 10-6 GE approved peripheral/hardware option functional checks

1 Media Verify media drive(s) read/write properly. Clean if necessary.
2 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
3 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
4 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.
5 ECG Verify basic operation with customer
6 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary.
10-5-5 Mains cable inspection
Table 10-7 Mains Cable Inspection, As Appropriate

1 Unplug cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and Ultrasound system.
2 Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kinds.
3 Verify Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that
no strands may cause a short circuit.
4 Verify Inlet connector retainer is functional.
10-5-6 Optional diagnostic checks

To complete the Ultrasound System checks, view the error logs and run desired diagnostics.
10-5-7 View the logs

1.) Review the Ultrasound system error log for any problems.
2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.
10 - 10 Section 10-5 - Tools Required

10-5-8 Physical inspection

NOTE: These features may not be present on all Ultrasound systems.
Table 10-8 Physical checks

1 Labeling Verify that all Ultrasound system labeling is present and in readable condition.
Scratches &
2 Inspect the exterior for dents, scratches or cracks.
Dents
3 Covers Where applicable, verify all covers are secured in place and are properly aligned with other covers.
Replace any covers that are damaged.
4 Input Power Refer to: 10-5-5 "Mains cable inspection" on page 10-10.
5 External I/O Check all connectors for damage.
• Where applicable, check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop
Wheels and
6 the Ultrasound system from moving, and release mechanism.
Brakes
• Where applicable, check all wheel locks and wheel swivel locks for proper operation.
• Where applicable, verify ease of Operator Panel (Operator Control Panel) movement in all
Control Panel
7 acceptable directions.
Movement
• Where applicable, ensure that the Control panel latches in position as required.
Control Panel
8 Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights.
Lighting
Inspect the LCD Display for scratches and bad pixels.

Verify proper operation of Contrast and Brightness controls.
Where applicable, confirm that the LCD arm allows:
• swivelling the screen to the left and to the right
9 LCD
• folding the screen to the locked position
• release and adjustment backwards and forwards
• can be adjusted in the up/down positions.
Note: LCD Arm movement may vary and is not applicable to all Ultrasound systems.
10 Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lighting, if available.
Cables and Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay
11
Connectors special attention to probe strain or bend reliefs.
Shielding and Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place.
12
Covers Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.
13 Control Panel Inspect alphanumeric keyboard and Operator Panel. Record any damaged or missing items.
14 Probe Holders Where applicable, inspect the Probe Holders for cracks or damage.
Power and
15 System Status Check for proper operation of all Power and System Status Indicators.
Indicators
Where applicable, check that the battery is not damaged, does not leak, does not emit an odor, and
16 Battery is not deformed or discolored. Observe all warnings and cautions for battery handling, recharging,
storing, and/or disposal,

10-5-9 Cleaning
Refer to the User Manual for the Ultrasound System for instructions.
10-5-10 Air filter cleaning

Refer to the User Manual for the Ultrasound System for instructions.
10-5-11 Probe maintenance

Refer to the Ultrasound System User Manual, or the probe’s User Manual/Probe Care Card for probe
maintenance, checks, cleaning, and disinfecting instructions.
Section 10-6
Using a Phantom
The use of a Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of
their Quality Assurance Program tests. Refer to the Phantom’ s User Manual for information on how to
use it.
Section 10-7
Electrical Safety Tests
10-7-1 Overview
NOTE: For all instructions in the “Electrical safety tests” section in case of using a UPS (un-interruptible
power supply) the terms outlet, wall outlet, AC wall outlet and power outlet refer to the AC power
outlet of the UPS. In case of further available AC (or DC) power outlets at the same used UPS,
these must remain unused i.e.not connected to any other devices.
The following topics and measurements are covered in this subsection:
• ‘Safety test overview’ on page 10-13

• ‘Leakage current limits’ on page 10-14
• ‘Grounding continuity’ on page 10-16
• ‘Chassis leakage current test’ on page 10-17
• ‘Isolated patient lead (source) leakage–lead to ground’ on page 10-20
• ‘Isolated patient lead (source) leakage–lead to lead’ on page 10-21
• ‘Isolated patient lead (sink) leakage-isolation test’ on page 10-24
• ‘Probe leakage current test’ on page 10-25
10 - 12 Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom

10-7-2 Safety test overview

The electrical safety tests in this section are based on NFPA 99 Standard for Health Care Facilities and
IEC 62353 Medical electrical equipment – Recurrent test and test after repair of medical electrical
equipment. These standards provide guidance on evaluating electrical safety of medical devices which
are placed into service and are intended for use in planned maintenance (PM) or testing following
service or repair activities. They differ somewhat from the standards that are used for design verification
and manufacturing tests (e.g., IEC 60601-1 and UL 60601-1) which require a controlled test
environment and can place unnecessary stress on the Ultrasound system.
These tests may refer to particular safety analyzer equipment as an example. Always consult the
manufacturer’s user manual of the Safety Analyzer that will be used to perform the tests.
Prior to initiating any electrical test, the Ultrasound system must be visually inspected. Perform the
following visual checks:
• Check for missing or loose enclosure covers that could allow access to internal live parts.
• Examine the mains cord, mains plug and appliance inlet for damaged insulation and adequacy of
strain relief and cable clamps.
• Locate and examine all associated transducers. Inspect the cables and strain relief at each end.
Inspect the transducer enclosure and lens for cracks, holes and similar defects.
Equipment users must ensure that safety inspections are performed whenever damage is
suspected and at least every 12 months in accordance with local authorities and facility
procedures. Do not use the Ultrasound system or individual probes which fail any portion of the
safety test.
NOTE: For all instructions in the “Electrical safety tests” section in case of using a UPS (un-interruptible
power supply) the terms outlet, wall outlet, AC wall outlet and power outlet refer to the AC power
outlet of the UPS. In case of further available AC (or DC) power outlets at the same used UPS,
these must remain unused i.e. not connected to any other devices.
WARNING To minimize risk of electric shock, only trained persons are allowed to perform the
electrical safety inspections and tests.
CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the Ultrasound system under test MUST NOT be connected to other
electrical equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The Ultrasound system
under test must not be contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.
CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components
that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures
before handling the equipment.

10-7-3 Leakage Current Limits

In accordance with these standards, fault conditions like Reverse Polarity of the supply mains and Open
Neutral are no longer required for field evaluation of leakage current. Because the main source of
leakage current is the mains supply, there are different acceptance limits depending on the
configuration of the mains (100-120 or 230-240).
Per IEC 60601-1 section 4.7
Single fault Condition for Medical Equipment (ME EQUIPMENT) shall be so designed and
manufactured that it remains SINGLE FAULT SAFE, or the RISK remains acceptable as determined
through application of 4.2.
- Sub clause 4.7 – SINGLE FAULT CONDTION for ME EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION Compare all safety-test results with safety-test results of previously performed safety tests (e.g.
last year etc.). In case of unexplainable abrupt changes of safety-test results consult
experienced authorized service personnel or GE for further analysis.
Table 10-9 Leakage current limits for Ultrasound system operation on 100-120 Volt mains
(US/Canada/Japan)
System Grounding/PE
Leakage Current Test
Power Conductor Limit in mA (1)
Chassis/Enclosure Leakage On and Off Open 0.3
Closed 0.1
Type BF Applied Parts On (transmit)
Open 0.5
Closed 0.01
Type CF Applied Parts On (transmit)
Open 0.05
Type BF Applied Parts (sink leakage, mains

On and Off Closed 5
voltage on applied part)
Type CF Applied Parts (sink leakage) On and Off Closed 0.05
(1) UL standard
Table 10-10 Leakage current limits for Ultrasound system operation on 230-240 Volt mains
System Ground/PE Limit in Limit in

Leakage Current Test
Power Conductor mA µA
Closed 0.1 100
Chassis On
Open 0.5 500
Closed 0.1 100

Type BF Applied Parts On (transmit)
Open 0.5 500
Closed 0.01 10
Type CF Applied Parts On (transmit)
Open 0.05 50
Type BF Applied Parts (sink leakage, mains

On and Off Closed 5 5000
voltage on applied part)
Type CF Applied Parts (sink leakage) On and Off Closed 0.05 50
10 - 14 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

10-7-3 Leakage Current Limits (cont’d)
NOTE: Leakage current limits for Ultrasound system operation on 230-240 Volt mains
Table 10-11 ISO and Mains Applied (On a calibrated Electrical Safety Analyzer compliant with
AAMI/ESI 1993 or IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551.) Limits*
Probe Type Measurement

BF 5.0 mA (5000 µA)
CF 0.05 mA (50 µA)
*ISO and Mains Applied (On a calibrated Electrical Safety Analyzer compliant with AAMI/ESI 1993 or
IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551.) refer to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to
the part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains
voltage.
Table 10-12 Equipment Type and Test Definitions
Applied Parts Parts or accessories that contact the patient to perform their function. For ultrasound
(AP) equipment, this includes transducers, ECG leads and e-TRAX Needle Sensor.
Body Floating or non-conductive ultrasound

probes which are marked with the 'man in box'
Type BF
BF symbol. this includes all transducers and or
ECG leads
Cardiac Floating or non-conductive,

intraoperative probes for direct cardiac contact,
Type CF isolated ECG connections and e-TRAX Needle
Sensor which are marked with the 'heart in box' or
CF symbol.
Sink The current resulting from the application of mains voltage to the applied part. This test
Leakage is required test for Type CF applied parts.


CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed protectively - earthed
metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms.
Reference the procedure in the IEC60601-1.
Figure 10-2 Ground Continuity Test
2 1
3
Ω 4
1. Ultrasound System 3. Ohmmeter
2. Ground Pin 4. Accessible Metal Parts (chassis - non-earth

ground, unprotected surface)


CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the Ultrasound
system!
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the
Ultrasound system is powered ON. Be sure to turn the Ultrasound system power OFF before
switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the
Ultrasound system may be damaged.
Definition
Also known as Enclosure Leakage current test, this test measures the current that would flow through
a grounded person who touches the accessible conductive parts of the equipment during normal and
fault conditions.
The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis.The testing meter is connected to parts
of the equipment, easily contacted by the user or patient.
Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in:
• Table 10-9 on page 10-14.

• Table 10-10 on page 10-14 as applicable. Record the highest reading.

Generic Procedure
The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis.
The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground.
• Table 10-9 on page 10-14

• Table 10-10 on page 10-14. Record the highest reading of current.
1.) Connect Safety analyzer to wall AC power outlet.
2.) Plug the equipment under test power cable into the receptacle on the panel of the meter.
3.) Connect the meter to an accessible metal surface of the scanner using the cable provided with
the meter.
4.) Select the Chassis or Enclosure leakage function on the meter.
NOTE: Consult the manufacturer’s user manual of the Safety Analyzer.
5.) Test opening and closing the ground with the scanner on and off as indicated in Table 10-9 or
Table 10-10 as applicable.
NOTE: Consult the manufacturer’s user manual of the Safety Analyzer that will be used to perform the tests.
The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in:

• Table 10-10 on page 10-14 as Chassis/Enclosure Leakage.

10-7-6 Data sheet for enclosure/chassis leakage current

Table 10-13 on page 10-19 shows a typical format for recording the enclosure/chassis leakage current.
Measurements should be recorded from multiple locations for each set of test conditions.
The actual location of the test probe may vary by Ultrasound system.
Table 10-13 Typical data format for recording enclosure/chassis leakage
Unit under test___________________________ Date of test:_____________________
Test Conditions Measurement/Test Point Location
System Rear Lower Probe Main

Power Grounding/PE Panel Frame Connector Handle
Off Closed
Off Open
On Closed
On Open

10-7-7 Isolated patient lead (source) leakage-lead to ground

CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the
system is powered ON. Be sure to turn the system power OFF before switching them using the
POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the system may be damaged.
Definition
This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The
meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching
some other grounded surface.

• Table 10-10 on page 10-14 as applicable.
For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the
worst case condition.

Generic Procedure

3.) Connect the ECG cable to the scanner and the Patient leads to the analyzer.
4.) Select the Patient lead leakage function on the meter.
5.) Test opening and closing the ground with the scanner on and off as indicated in Table 10-9 or
NOTE: Consult the manufacturer’s user manual of the Safety Analyzer that will be used to perform the tests.

For each combination, the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the
worst case condition.
Figure 10-3 Set Up for Test of Earth Leakage Current, UL60601-1/IEC 60601-1 Clause 19
H3 2 1
G
4
5
A
1. Ultrasound System 4. Leakage Test Meter (Ammeter)
2. Polarity Reversing Switch 5. Accessible Metal Parts (chassis - non-earth

ground, unprotected surface)
3. Power Outlet - Color of Power Outlet Cable:
USA and Canada - Others -

H - Hot, Black H - Hot, Brown
N - Neutral, White N - Neutral, Blue
G - Ground, Green or Green-yellow G - Ground, Green-yellow

10-7-8 Isolated patient lead (source) leakage–lead to lead

Select and test each of the ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the
power and ground condition combinations found in:

• Table 10-10 on page 10-14 as applicable. Record the highest leakage current measured.

Lead to lead leakage test record
Table 10-16 on page 10-27 shows a typical format for recording the patient lead to lead leakage current.
Measurements should be recorded from each lead combination under each set of test conditions
specified in:

Record all data on the EQC inspection certificate. Also known as Patient Auxiliary Current.

2.) Plug the equipment under test (Scanner) power cable into the receptacle on the panel of the meter.
4.) Select the Lead to lead or Patient Auxiliary leakage function on the meter.
• Test opening and closing the ground with the scanner on and off as indicated in Table 10-9 or
Table 10-10 Typical data format for recording patient lead to lead leakage
Table 10-14 Typical data format for recording isolated lead (sink) leakage
Test Conditions Patient Lead or Combination Measured
System Lower
Power Grounding/PE RA-LA Frame LA-LL LL-RA
System Off Closed
System On
Open
(Transmit)
10-7-9 Isolated patient lead (sink) leakage-isolation test

CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock
hazard, the Ultrasound system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone
while the ISO TEST switch is depressed. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch
the Ultrasound system!

Isolated lead (sink) leakage test record
Table 10-15 on page 10-24 shows a typical format for recording the isolated patient lead sink leakage
current.
Measurements should be recorded for the full lead combination under each set of test conditions
specified in:

Record all data on the Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-15 Typical data format for recording isolated lead (sink) leakage
Test Conditions Patient Lead
System Power Grounding/PE RA+LA+LL

On Closed
Off Closed

4.) Select the Lead isolation or main applied function on the meter.
• Test opening and closing the ground with the scanner on and off as indicated in Table 10-9 or

10-7-10 Probe leakage current test

DANGER DO NOT USE THE PROBE IF THE INSULATING MATERIAL HAS BEEN PUNCTURED OR
OTHERWISE COMPROMISED. INTEGRITY OF THE INSULATION MATERIAL AND PATIENT
SAFETY CAN BE VERIFIED BY SAFETY TESTING ACCORDING TO IEC60601-1.
This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who
is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.
NOTE: Some leakage current is expected on each probe, depending on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in
line voltage and test lead placement. It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage
current is detected, check the configuration of the test equipment.
Generic Procedure on Probe Leakage Current
The most common method of measuring probe leakage is to partly immerse the probe into a saline bath
while the probe is connected to the Ultrasound system and active. This method measures the actual
leakage current resulting from the transducer RF drive.

For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition.
Figure 10-4 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current
2 1
9
8
5
3
4 7
A6
1. Ultrasound System 4. Ground Switch 7. Isolator
2. Tester 5. Polarity Reversing Switch 8. Ultrasound Probe
3. Neutral Switch 6. Meter 9. Saline Probe

Generic Procedure on Probe Leakage Current (cont’d)
Figure 10-5 Test set with meter
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage current, dependent on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in
line voltage and test lead placement.
The ultrasound probe’s imaging area is immersed in the Saline solution along with a grounding probe
from the test meter to complete the current path.
NOTE: The Saline solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free ions to the water, making
it conductive. Normal saline solution is 0.9% salt and 99.1% water. If ready-mixed saline
solution is not available, a mixture of 1 quart or 1 liter water with 9 or more grams of table salt,
mixed thoroughly, will substitute.
CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid
beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid
or any part of the unit under test while doing the test.

Generic Procedure on Probe Leakage Current (cont’d)

Follow the test conditions and test limits described in:

• Table 10-10 on page 10-14 as applicable for every probe.
Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of maintenance data using
Table 10-16 on page 10-27
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity or the status of the Neutral when the
Ultrasound system is powered on. Power off the Ultrasound system, allow the stored energy to
bleed down, and turn the circuit breaker off BEFORE switching the POLARITY switch and/or the
NEUTRAL switch on the leakage meter to avoid possible power supply damage
Table 10-16 on page 10-27 shows a typical format for recording ultrasound probe source leakage
current.

Table 10-16 Typical data format for recording probe (source) leakage
Unit under test____________________________________ Date of test:_____________________
Test Conditions Probe as measured in saline bath
System
Power Grounding/PE 4C i12L TS E8C
Off Closed
Off Open
On Closed
On Open

10-7-11 Mains on applied part

NOTE: Mains Applied refers to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to
determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage.
Mains on applied part is one of the described leakage current tests applicable for probes (Ref:
IEC60601-1). This is to be performed with the probe disconnected from the Ultrasound system. Apply
mains voltage over the insulation barrier. (Between protective earth on the probe connector, and an
electrical anode in saline solution. The patient applied part of the probe is immersed into the saline
solution.) Measure current flowing in the circuit. = leakage current.
As a minimum, tests according to IEC606601-1 must be performed once a year. The requirements for
Body Floating (BF) have to be applied for TEE and Trans thorax probes bearing the symbol for safety
class BF.
The symbol for BF is indicated on the probe connector label below:
Figure 10-6 GE Probe Connector Label example
Where applicable, a typical test setup of non-TEE Probes can be as illustrated in: "Set Up for Probe
Leakage Current" on page 10-25.
A typical test setup for TEE probes could be as indicated below:
WARNING The handle of the TEE probes must not be immersed.
The test passes when the reading measure less than the values in: Table 10-11 on page 10-15.

Section 10-8
When There’s Too Much Leakage Current...
10-8-1 Chassis Fails
Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity.Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or
intermittent. Replace any defective part.
Where applicable, tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or
owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used
instead.
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding
wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a
possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
10-8-2 Probe Fails

Test another probe to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner.
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from
differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for
body surface contact probe differs from an inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe
type in the appropriate space on the check list.
If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the Ultrasound system connector for bent pins,
poor connections, and ground continuity.
If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
10-8-3 Peripheral Fails

Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
10-8-4 Still Fails

If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones,
one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
Where applicable, in the case of using a UPS (un-interruptible power supply), perform the tests in the
“Electrical Safety tests” section without using the UPS (i.e. directly connect the Ultrasound system to
the AC wall outlet). If this leads to a pass result, the specific UPS must no longer be used.
New Unit
If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new Ultrasound system and if situation can not be
corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the Ultrasound system problem. Remove
Ultrasound system from operation.

10-8-5 ECG Fails

Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.
10-8-6 Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check (EQC and IQC)

GE employees can download and use the latest version of these forms. They can be retrieved from
MyWorkshop.
• EQC -- Refer to DOC0929340 in MyWorkshop
10 - 30 Section 10-8 - When There’s Too Much Leakage Current...

INDEX
A F
Acclimate Time 2-2 Facility Needs 2-9
Acoustic Noise Output 3-16 Functional Checks 4-1
Archiving and Loading Presets 4-24 2D Mode (B mode) Checks 4-18
Average Installation Time 3-2 Basic Controls 4-15
Cineloop Check 4-23
Color Mode Checks 4-21
C Doppler Mode Checks 4-22
Color Mode ECG Check 4-27
Overview 4-22 Locks 4-14
Compatibility M Mode Checks 4-20
Hardware/Software Compatibility 9-4 Multi Image Checks 4-26
Completing the Installation 3-16
Components and Functions 5-1
Configuration 3-35 G
Console Gathering Trouble Data 7-2
Mechanical Checks 4-10
Contact Information 1-33
Conventions H
Conventions Used in Book 1-6 Hardware/Software Compatibility 9-4
Cooling 2-3 Hazard Icons 1-7
Customer Assistance 1-33 Height 3-16
Human Safety 1-18
Humidity 2-2
D
Dangerous Procedure Warnings 1-27
Depth 3-16 I
DICOM Installation
DICOM Option Pre-Installation Requirements 2-13 Warnings 3-2
Worksheet for DICOM Network Information 2-14 Internal Peripherals 3-36
Disconnect Probe 3-20 Introduction to this manual 1-1
Display Platform Mechanical Checks 4-10
K
E Keyboard Mechanical Checks 4-10
Electrical
Needs 2-4
Safety 1-24 L
Specifications 3-17 Labels Locations 1-26
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 1-31 LCD (Monitor) Adjustments 6-2
Electrostatic Discharge Warning 1-32 Lighting 2-3
EMC 1-31 List of Abbrevations 9-2
EMI 1-31 Loading and Archiving Presets 4-24
Limitations 2-6 Loading Presets from a Removable Disk 4-24
Protection 3-15 LOGIQ E10 Models and Hardware/Software
Environmental Conditions Compatibility 5-2, 9-4
Probes 2-8 LOTO 1-28
ESD 1-32
External Peripherals 3-36
Description 5-28 M
Index Index - 1
GE
Manpower Requirements 2-8 Packing Materials 3-11

Mechanical Reject
Safety 1-21 Optimizing 2D 4-19
Mechanical Safety 1-21 Renewal Parts 9-1
Monitor Adjustments 6-2 Required Facility Needs 2-10
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts 8-5
N
Networking Pre-installation Requirements 2-13 S
Safety
Considerations 1-18
O Precaution Messages 1-6
Off-board Peripherals 3-36 Screen Captures 7-10
On-board Peripherals 3-36, 5-27 Service Adjustments 6-1
Operating Temperature 2-2 Site
Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection 3-36 Circuit Breaker 2-5
Options (Software) Configuration 3-37 Power Outlets 2-5
Requirements
Desirable Features 2-11
P Software
Packing Materials Software Option Installation 3-37
Recycling Information 3-11 Software Options Configuration 3-37
Peripherals 5-27 Software/Hardware Compatibility 9-4
Checks 3-36 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment 10-8
Connection 3-36 Standard Hazard Icons 1-7
External Peripherals 3-36 Storage temperature 2-2
Internal Peripherals 3-36 System
Physical Configuration 3-35
Dimensions 3-16 Manufacture 1-35
Inspection 3-12 Overview 1-5
Power Stability Requirements 2-5 Systems Covered by this Manual 1-4
Power Transients 2-5
Voltage Dop-out 2-5
Power Transients 2-5 T
Power-up Procedures Theory 5-1
Voltage Settings 3-17 Time and Manpower Requirements 2-8
Pre-Installation 2-1 Top Console 5-20
Requirements Transporting the scanner 5-20
DICOM 2-13 Trouble Image with Logs 7-4
Preparing Unit for Installation 3-12 Troubleshooting
Probe Gathering Trouble Data 7-2
Disconnect Probe 3-20 Screen Captures 7-10
Probes Trouble Image with Logs 7-4
Disconnecting 4-27 Vital System Information 7-3
Environmental Requirements 2-8
Probes/Connector Usage
Functional Checks 4-17 U
Product Icons 1-10, 1-17 Unpacking the Equipment 3-4
Purchaser Responsibilities 2-9
V
R Voltage
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-4 Drop-out 2-5
Recycling Information Settings 3-17
Index - 2 -
W
Warnings and Cautions 1-18
Width of LOGIQ E10 3-16
Worksheet for DICOM Network Information 2-14
Index - 3
Index - 4 -
© 2018, General Electric Company.
GE Healthcare
Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA
www.gehealthcare.com

Logiq E10

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Logiq E10

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LOGIQ E10

Basic Service Manual

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Mail the information to:

SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN

THIS SYSTEM CONTAINS THE

FCC ID: PD98260NG

Revision Date Reason for change

List of Effected Pages (LOEP)

Chapter Revision Chapter Revision Chapter Revision

Warnings Rev. 1 Chapter 5 Rev. 1 Index Rev. 1

Chapter 1 Rev. 1 Chapter 7 Rev. 1

Chapter 2 Rev. 1 Chapter 8 Rev. 1

This page was intentionally left blank.

Service manual overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Dangerous procedure warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 27

Lockout/tagout (LOTO) requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 28

Returning/shipping probes and repair parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 30

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 31

General LOGIQ E10 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Facility needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Receiving and unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

Completing the setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16

Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36

LOGIQ E10 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2

LOGIQ E10 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Software overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Top Console with Main Monitor and Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20

Main Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22

Air Flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25

Casters and Brakes description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26

Options and Peripherals descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27

Monitor adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Monitor Arm and/or Monitor range of motion Adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10

Operator Panel movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13

Adjust time-out for DICOM servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17

Volume Navigation Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17

Gathering troubleshooting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

Warnings and important information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Definitions of Left, Rear / Back, Right and Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7

Loading / Reloading / Upgrading the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Replacing Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29

Column Cover Assembly replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69

Replacing Top Console Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83

Replacing XYZ Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 185

Main Console parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 217

Casters and Brakes replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 228

Front End Acquisition / Card Cage parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 253

MPS (Main Power Supply) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 368

Peripherals replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 373

Cables replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 385

V Nav Roll Stand Assembling or Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 394

Options replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 406

Parts list groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3

LOGIQ E10 Model Software Configuration and Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4

Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5

Top Console parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11

XYZ Mechanism parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16

Main Console parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18

Casters (Wheels) parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22

Card Rack parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24